JP2012011005A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To simplify an attachment structure of an illumination board in an illumination mechanism for presenting light emission on the rolling surface of a stage.SOLUTION: A display frame body having a window to enclose a display part for performing a symbol variable game in a symbol display device is arranged in the board body of a game board, where a game area is formed on the front side. The game board includes the stage 150 arranged to be positioned on the lower inner side of the window and has the rolling surface to guide a game ball taken in from the game area to roll in right and left directions. The illumination mechanism 310 positioned on the lower side of the rolling surface 168 of the stage 150 and presenting light emission on the rolling surface 168 by radiating light upward is arranged in a rear unit disposed on the rear side of a board body.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine in which a game board includes a display frame that surrounds a display unit of a symbol display device with a window.

  For example, in a pachinko machine that is one of the representative examples of gaming machines, a display frame body, also referred to as a center accessory, is disposed at a substantially central position of a gaming area defined on the front side of a gaming board set in the machine. ing. In addition, the pachinko machine is provided with a symbol display device on the rear side of the game board for performing a required symbol variation game by changing and stopping various symbols, and a display unit of the symbol display device for performing the symbol variation game is displayed on a display frame. It faces the window defined by the body from the rear. In the pachinko machine, the pachinko ball launched on the board surface (game area) of the game board wins the start winning device arranged at the lower position of the display frame so that the symbol change game on the symbol display device can be performed. To be done.

  In the pachinko machine, the lighting device is arranged on the display frame, and the lighting / emitting means of the lighting device is turned on / off in accordance with the symbol variation game, thereby improving the decoration / effect effect by the light emission. (See, for example, Patent Document 1). In addition, a stage for guiding a pachinko ball taken from a game area partitioned outside the display frame in the left-right direction is provided at the lower part of the display frame.

JP 2007-136002 A

  The conventional display frame is configured such that the illumination device emits light forward, and the portion constituting the front surface of the game board emits light. However, since the upper surface of the stage is a rolling surface that guides the pachinko sphere to the left and right, it is difficult to effectively emit light on the rolling surface with only the illumination device that emits light toward the front.

  That is, the present invention has been proposed in order to suitably solve these problems inherent in the gaming machine according to the prior art, and includes an illumination board for an illumination mechanism that produces a lighting effect on the rolling surface of the stage. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can be easily held only by assembling other constituent members.

In order to overcome the above-mentioned problems and achieve the intended purpose, a gaming machine according to claim 1 of the present application is
A symbol display device (13) provided on the rear side of the game board (40) for playing a symbol variation game, and a symbol variation game provided on the game board (40) for the symbol display device (13). A display frame (100) having a window (100a) surrounding the display unit (13a), and a lower part inside the display frame (100), which is taken from the game area (40a) of the game board (40). In a gaming machine equipped with a stage (150) that rolls a game ball (W) left and right,
Provided below the rolling surface (168) on which the game ball (W) rolls on the stage (150), and has an illumination mechanism (310) that emits light on the rolling surface (168),
The illumination mechanism (310)
An illumination board (312) having a plurality of illumination bodies (313) on the upper surface;
A decorative portion (316) covering the front side of the illumination board (312);
The decoration part (316) is located above the illumination board (312) and sandwiches the illumination body (313) provided at the front end of the illumination board (312) between the decoration part (316) and the decoration part (316). A partition (326) attached to the
The decorative portion (316) has a housing portion (303) formed to be recessed rearward from the front surface to which the decorative portion (316) is attached. The lighting substrate (313) is accommodated in the housing portion (303) and the decorative portion (316) is accommodated. And an installation part (302) to which
The decorative portion (316) holds the lighting board (313) in a thickness direction so as to be vertically regulated by a pair of holding pieces (319, 320) formed to extend rearward and spaced apart vertically. The partition (326) is placed on and supported by the upper clamping piece (320),
The partition part (326) holds the rear end part of the illumination board (313) so as to restrict its position to the left and right by being sandwiched by a pair of holding pieces (328) that are formed to extend downward and spaced apart from each other on the left and right. And holding the lighting board (313) between the decorative part (316) and the holding piece (328) so as to restrict the position in the front-rear direction,
The installation portion (302) is configured to be placed on a placement portion (303a) provided on a bottom surface of the housing portion (303) and to support a rear portion of the illumination board (313). .
According to the first aspect of the present invention, the illumination board of the illumination mechanism that produces the light emission effect on the rolling surface of the stage is not fixed by fastening means such as screws, but only by assembling the other constituent members constituting the illumination mechanism. Easy to hold.

In the invention according to claim 2, the illumination mechanism (310) is provided on the rear side of the partition part (326) above the illumination board (313), and a light emitting part (336) capable of transmitting light to the upper surface. A plurality of upper cover parts (322, 334) and the upper cover part (322, 334) attached to the upper side, attached to the partition part (326), and arranged in accordance with the adjacent light emitting part (336) ( 313) and a partition part (330) having a partition wall (332) separating the gaps.
According to the invention which concerns on Claim 2, since the illumination board | substrate is hold | maintained with the attitude | position which followed the thickness direction up and down, the space between the rolling surface of a stage and an illumination board | substrate can be used effectively.

In the invention according to claim 3, the stage (150) has a stage portion (166) constituting a rolling surface (168) positioned above the illumination mechanism (310) attached to the illumination mechanism (310). This is the gist.
According to the invention which concerns on Claim 3, handling of both becomes easy by attaching the stage part which comprises the rolling surface which an illumination mechanism light-emits effect to this illumination device.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to easily hold the illumination board of the illumination mechanism that emits light on the stage simply by assembling other constituent members.

1 is a front view showing a pachinko machine according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention. It is a rear view which shows the pachinko machine of an Example. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the pachinko machine of an Example. It is a front view which shows the inner frame of an Example. It is a front view of the game board of an Example, Comprising: A movable member exists in the 1st position. It is a front view of the game board of an Example, Comprising: A movable member exists in a 2nd position. It is a front view of the game board of an Example, Comprising: The state which permeate | transmitted the transparent board | substrate body is shown. It is a rear view of the game board of an Example, Comprising: It is in the state which attached the symbol display apparatus. It is a rear view of the game board of an Example, Comprising: The connection structure of wiring is shown. It is a rear view of the game board of an Example, Comprising: The connection structure of a ground wire is shown. It is a perspective view which shows the game board of an Example from the rear side. It is a side view which shows the game board of an Example. It is a perspective view which shows the board body of an Example from the front side. It is a front view which shows the back unit of an Example. It is a side view which shows the back unit of an Example. It is a perspective view which shows the back unit of an Example from the front side. It is a front view which shows the indicator of an Example. It is a front view which shows the display frame of an Example. It is a rear view which shows the display frame of an Example. It is a rear view which shows a part of display frame body of an Example, Comprising: The connection structure of wiring is shown. It is a side view which shows the display frame of an Example. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the display frame body of an Example from the front side. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the display frame body of an Example from the rear side. It is a perspective view which shows the display frame of an Example. It is a perspective view which shows the warp channel | path of an Example. It is the C1-C1 sectional view taken on the line of FIG. It is the C2-C2 sectional view taken on the line of FIG. It is the C3-C3 sectional view taken on the line of FIG. It is a front view which shows the stage of an Example. It is a top view which shows the stage of an Example. It is a perspective view which shows the stage of an Example. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the light emission effect device which concerns on an Example from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the light emission effect device which concerns on an Example from the rear side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the cover member which concerns on an Example from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the cover member which concerns on an Example from the rear side. It is a rear view of the cover main body which concerns on an Example. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view which shows the light emission effect apparatus which concerns on an Example. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the reflective member which concerns on an Example, the 1st light-emitting device, and the rear protective cover from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the reflective member which concerns on an Example, the 1st light-emitting device, and the rear protective cover from the rear side. It is a front view of the light emission effect device according to the example. It is a front view which shows the illuminating device of an Example. It is a rear view which shows the illuminating device of an Example. It is a top view which shows the illuminating device of an Example. It is a side view which shows the illuminating device of an Example. It is a front view which shows the 1st illumination mechanism of an Example. It is a perspective view which shows the 1st illumination mechanism of an Example. It is the DD sectional view taken on the line of FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the 1st illumination mechanism of an Example from the front side. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the 1st illumination mechanism of an Example from the rear side. It is a front view which shows the 2nd illumination mechanism of an Example. It is a rear view which shows the 2nd illumination mechanism of an Example. It is a top view which shows the 2nd illumination mechanism of an Example. It is a side view which shows the 2nd illumination mechanism of an Example. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the 2nd illumination mechanism of an Example from the front side. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the 2nd illumination mechanism of an Example from the rear side. It is a perspective view which shows the lower decoration member of an Example from the front side. It is a perspective view which shows the lower decoration member of an Example from the rear side. It is a front view which shows the channel | path structural member of an Example. It is a rear view which shows the channel | path structural member of an Example. It is a top view which shows the channel | path structural member of an Example. It is a bottom view which shows the channel | path structural member of an Example. It is the E1-E1 sectional view taken on the line of FIG. It is the E2-E2 sectional view taken on the line of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the channel | path structural member of an Example from the front side. It is a perspective view which shows the channel | path structural member of an Example from the rear side. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the channel | path structural member and indicator of an Example from the front side. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the channel | path structural member and indicator of an Example from the rear side. It is a front view which shows the back side channel | path half body of an Example. It is a rear view which shows the back side channel | path half body of an Example. It is a top view which shows the back side channel | path half body of an Example. It is a bottom view which shows the back side channel | path half body of an Example. It is a front view which shows the front side channel | path half body of an Example. It is a rear view which shows the front side channel | path half body of an Example. It is a top view which shows the front side channel | path half body of an Example. It is a bottom view which shows the front side channel | path half body of an Example. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A1-A1 of FIG. FIG. 10 is a sectional view taken along line B1-B1 of FIG. FIG. 10 is a sectional view taken along line B2-B2 of FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the movable body device concerning an example from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the movable body device concerning an example from the back side. It is the perspective view which looked at the case body for 1st based on an Example from the front side. It is the perspective view which looked at the case body for 1st based on an Example from the rear side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the movable body concerning an example from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the movable body which concerns on an Example from the rear side. It is the perspective view which looked at the 1st movable production device concerning an example from the back side. It is a front view which shows the movable body in an original position. It is the perspective view which looked at the movable body motor for 1st and the motor attachment board | substrate from the front side. It is the perspective view which looked at the movable body motor for 1st and the motor attachment board | substrate from the rear side. It is a front view which shows the state which the movable body moved to the left. It is a front view which shows the state which the movable body moved to the right side. It is a perspective view which shows a mode that a wiring pressing member is attached to the case body for 1st. It is a perspective view which shows the state which attached the wiring pressing member to the case body for 1st. It is the perspective view which looked at the base sheet metal which concerns on an Example from the front side. It is the perspective view which looked at the base sheet metal which concerns on an Example from the back side. It is the perspective view which looked at the 1st movable body decoration member concerning an example from the front side. It is the perspective view which looked at the 1st movable body decoration member concerning an example from the back side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the movable member device concerning an example from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the movable member apparatus which concerns on an Example from the rear side. It is the perspective view which looked at the movable member device concerning an example from the back side, and shows the state where a movable member exists in the 1st position. It is a front view of the movable member apparatus which concerns on an Example. It is the perspective view which looked at the movable member main part concerning an example from the front side. It is the perspective view which looked at the movable member main part concerning an example from the back side. It is the perspective view which looked at the movable member light-emitting device concerning an example from the front side. It is the perspective view which looked at the movable member light-emitting device concerning an example from the back side. It is the F1-F1 line longitudinal cross-sectional view of FIG. 100 is a partially enlarged F2-F2 line longitudinal sectional view of FIG. It is a rear view of the movable member apparatus which concerns on an Example, Comprising: It shows in the state which removed the action body. It is the perspective view which looked at the base substrate which concerns on an Example from the front side. It is the perspective view which looked at the base substrate which concerns on an Example from the rear side. It is the perspective view which looked at the movable member device concerning an example from the back side, and shows the state where a movable member exists in the 2nd position. It is the perspective view which looked at the action body concerning an example from the front side. It is the perspective view which looked at the action body concerning an example from the back side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the left arm member and the drive arm from the front side. It is a front view which shows the support drive mechanism and operating body which concern on an Example, Comprising: The operating body has shown the state which moved below. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the right side arm member and the drive arm from the front side. It is a front view which shows the state which has the drive arm which concerns on an Example in a 1st attitude | position. It is a front view which shows the state which has the drive arm which concerns on an Example in a 2nd attitude | position. It is the perspective view which looked at the locking board which concerns on an Example from the rear side. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the connection structure of a 1st connection part and a 2nd connection part. It is a rear view of the movable member apparatus which concerns on an Example, Comprising: The state which has a movable member in a 1st position is shown. It is a rear view of the movable member apparatus which concerns on an Example, and shows a mode that a movable member and an action body move below. It is a rear view of the movable member apparatus which concerns on an Example, Comprising: The state which has a movable member in a 2nd position is shown. It is a perspective view which shows the motor for movable members, and a front support case body. It is a front view which shows the support drive mechanism and operating body which concern on an Example, Comprising: The state before an operating body moves is shown. It is explanatory drawing of the guide mechanism which concerns on an Example, Comprising: It is the GG sectional view taken on the line of FIG. It is explanatory drawing of the guide mechanism which concerns on an Example, Comprising: A mode that a connection guide part rotates is shown. It is a top view of the operation body concerning an example. It is a rear view of the action body concerning an example. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the support case member which concerns on an Example from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the support case member which concerns on an Example from the rear side. It is a front view which shows a mode that an operation body rotates. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the 2nd movable production device concerning an example from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the 2nd movable production device concerning an example from the back side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the right part installation member which concerns on an Example from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the right part installation member which concerns on an Example from the rear side. It is a side view of the right part installation member which concerns on an Example. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the right part rotation body which concerns on an Example from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the right part rotation body which concerns on an Example from the rear side. It is a perspective view which shows a mode that the wiring of a right part rotation body is pulled out by the right part installation member via an arc-shaped guide part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship of a guide through-hole part and an arc-shaped guide part, Comprising: The state which has a right part rotation body in a right part normal attitude | position is shown. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship of a guide through-hole part and an arc-shaped guide part, Comprising: The state which has a right part rotation body in a right part rotation attitude | position is shown. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the 2nd movable production | presentation apparatus which concerns on an Example, Comprising: A mode that the wiring of a right part rotation body is pulled out by the right part installation member via an arc-shaped guide part is shown. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the 3rd movable production device concerning an example from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the 3rd movable production device concerning an example from the back side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the left part installation member of the 3rd movable production device from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the left part installation member of the 3rd movable production device from the back side. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A2-A2 of FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the ball passage gate concerning an example from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the ball passage gate concerning an example from the back side. It is a front view of the 3rd movable production device concerning an example, and shows the state where a left part rotation object is in a left part normal posture. It is a front view of the 3rd movable production device concerning an example, and shows the state where a left part rotation body is in a left part rotation posture. It is a front view which shows the wiring holder of an Example. It is a top view which shows the wiring holder of an Example. It is explanatory drawing which shows the earth structure of the pachinko machine of an Example. It is a control block diagram of the pachinko machine of an example.

  Next, the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings by way of preferred embodiments. In the embodiment, a pachinko machine that plays a game using a pachinko ball as a game ball will be described as an example. Further, in the following description, “front”, “rear”, “left”, and “right” are states when the pachinko machine is viewed from the front side (player side) as shown in FIG. 1 unless otherwise specified. It points at.

(About pachinko machines)
As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 according to the embodiment includes an outer frame 11 that is formed in a rectangular frame shape and is fixed to an installation frame base (not shown) of a game shop. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a middle frame 12 as a main body frame on which a game board 40 (see FIG. 3 or FIG. 5) is detachably held is assembled to the front side of the opening of the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and detachable. ing. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back side of the game board 40 so that a symbol display device 13 capable of variably displaying various symbols can be attached and detached (see FIG. 2 or FIG. 8). On the front side of the middle frame 12, a front frame 14 as a decorative frame having a glass window 14a for seeing through the game board 40 is installed so as to be openable and closable, and a pachinko ball W (see FIG. 31) below the front frame 14. (See FIG. 1 or FIG. 3). In the embodiment, an upper ball tray 16 that stores pachinko balls W is integrally assembled at a lower position of the front frame 14, and the upper ball tray 16 is also opened and closed integrally with the opening and closing of the front frame 14. It is configured as follows. As the symbol display device 13, a conventionally known display device capable of variably displaying various symbols such as a liquid crystal display device, a drum type display device, and a belt type display device can be used.

(About the middle frame)
As shown in FIG. 3 or 4, the middle frame 12 has an upper frame member 17 that forms an upper edge, a lower edge, and a lower frame member 18 that is provided with a speaker 33, a ball hitting device 34, an operation handle 35, and the like. And a left frame member 19 forming a left side edge and a right frame member 20 forming a right side edge. The middle frame 12 is formed in a rectangular frame shape that aligns with the opening of the outer frame 11 when the upper, lower, left and right frame members 17, 18, 19, 20 are assembled. And the opening part opened to the front and back when the upper and lower, left and right frame members are assembled functions as the game board holding part 22 for installing the game board 40. Here, the middle frame 12 is pivotally supported via a support shaft (not shown) provided at the upper left end and the lower left end of the outer frame 11, and rotates the middle frame 12 around the left end. Thus, the middle frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 11.

  As shown in FIG. 3 or FIG. 4, the left end of the game board 40 is rotatably and detachably held at a position separated vertically in the opening inner side of the left frame member 19 (game board holding part 22 side). A plurality of rotating holders 23, 23 are provided. In addition, at the right end (on the right frame member 20 side) of the upper and lower frame members, fixing tools 24 and 24 that can be rotated to a fixing position and a fixing releasing position are provided, respectively, and the fixing boards 24 and 24 are used to play the game board. The upper right and lower ends of the right side 40 can be fixed to the middle frame 12. In the pachinko machine 10, with the left end of the game board 40 held by the rotation holders 23, 23, the right end of the game board 40 is pushed in and the left end of the game board 40 (rotation holders 23, 23). The game board 40 is entirely turned to face the game board holding part 22, and the fixtures 24, 24 are rotationally displaced to the fixed positions to support and fix the right upper and lower ends of the game board 40. In this way, the game board 40 has the rotating holders 23, 23 and the fixtures 24, with the back surface of the peripheral edge thereof being in contact with and supported by the upper, lower and left frame members 17, 18, 19, 20. 24, the front surface of the corresponding portion is abutted and supported, and movement in the front-rear direction is restricted. In this state, the front surface of the game board 40 (the front face of the board main body 42 described later) is located at a position separated from the glass window 14a of the front frame 14 assembled to the middle frame 12 by a preset distance. It is configured to face.

  As shown in FIG. 2 or 4, on the back side of the upper frame member 17, a ball tank 25 for storing pachinko balls W supplied from an external ball supply facility provided on an installation frame base or the like is provided on the upper frame member. It is provided over substantially the entire width of 17 left and right widths. The ball tank 25 is formed so as to overlap with the upper part on the back side of the game board 40 provided in the game board holding part 22 so that the vertical dimension of the game board 40 can be maximized. In addition, on the back side of the lower frame member 18, a ball supply path that communicates with the upper and lower ball trays 15 and 16 and a ball discharge path that communicates with a ball collection basket provided on the installation frame base are formed, respectively. The set member 26 is disposed (see FIG. 2). The ball tank 25 and the set member 26 are connected to each other via a ball passage unit 27 installed between the two members. The ball discharge device 27a disposed in the ball passage unit 27 drives the ball tank 25a. The pachinko ball W supplied to the tank 25 is configured to be fed to the upper and lower ball trays 15 and 16.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the set member 26 includes a power supply device 28 that controls the power supply of the pachinko machine 10, a payout control device 29 that drives and controls a ball payout device 27 a disposed in the ball passage unit 27, and the hitting ball launch A launch control device 30 that drives and controls the device 34, an interface board 31 connected to an external terminal, and the like are disposed. Each of these devices 28, 29, 30, 31 is wired to a main control device 32 disposed on the back side of the game board 40, and performs predetermined control based on a control signal from the main control device 32. This is executed (see FIG. 155).

(Game board)
As shown in FIGS. 5 to 12, the game board 40 includes a board body 42 made of a transparent synthetic resin plate material such as acrylic or polycarbonate, and a back unit 50 provided on the rear side of the board body 42. Composed. In the game board 40, a game area 40a through which the pachinko ball W can flow down is provided on the front surface of the board main body 42, and game parts such as a game nail (nail) 43 and a windmill 44 are provided in the game area 40a. In addition, on the game board 40, the symbol display device 13 is detachably disposed on the rear side of the back unit 50 (see FIG. 2 or FIG. 8), and the symbol display device 13 performs a symbol variation game and other display effects. The display portion 13a is visible from the front side. In the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko ball W that is launched into the game area 40 a defined on the front surface of the board main body 42 and flows down is awarded to the front side of the game board 40 in accordance with the winning of the winning device or the like. A design variation game and a predetermined display effect are performed on the display unit 13a.

(Board body)
As shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 13, the board main body 42 is a flat plate-like member based on a substantially rectangular shape. It is said that. The panel body 42 has an outer rail 45 extending in a circular arc shape from the lower left part to the upper right part, and an inner rail 46 arranged side by side from the central lower part to the upper left part inside the outer rail 45. Yes. Note that the pachinko ball W launched from the hitting ball launcher 34 passes between the outer rail 45 and the inner rail 46 and is launched into the upper left portion of the game area 40a. Further, the panel body 42 is provided with a first panel surface decoration member 47 extending from the upper right part of the outer rail 45 to the lower part of the inner rail 46 on the right side of the front surface. Has been. A substantially circular game area 40 a is defined on the front surface of the board main body 42 by the outer rail 45, the inner rail 46, and the first board surface decoration member 47. Further, on the front surface of the board main body 42, second board surface decoration members 48 are respectively disposed at the upper and lower positions on the left side of the outer rail 45 (outside the game area 40a).

  As shown in FIG. 5, a large number of game parts such as game nails 43 and windmills 44 are disposed on the front surface of the board main body 42 in the game area 40a. In the game board 40, the pachinko balls W launched into the game area 40 a by the hitting ball launching device 34 are guided by the game nails 43 arranged side by side, or the pachinko balls W are distributed by the windmill 44 to flow down the game area 40 a. The movement of the pachinko ball W is changed irregularly. For example, in the game board 40, a path for guiding the pachinko ball W from the lower left side of the display frame 100, which will be described later, disposed in the center to the start winning ports 70a, 70b of the start winning device 70 located in the center. The game nails 43 are arranged so as to form (see FIG. 5).

  As shown in FIG. 13, the board body 42 has front and rear in accordance with the display frame 100 provided in the game area 40 a, various winning devices 70 and 74, the display 460 provided in the back unit 50, and the like. A plurality of through-holes 42a, 42b, 42c, 42d, and 42e are formed. The board body 42 is opened at the display through hole 42a which is largely opened in the game area 40a, and below the display through hole 42a, and through the winning device through which a start winning device 70 and a special winning device 74 which will be described later are arranged. The opening 42b is provided on the left side of the winning device through-hole 42b, and includes a lower decorative through-hole 42c in which a lower decorative member (decorating member) 402 constituting the left normal winning device 400 is disposed. In addition, the board body 42 is established on the upper left side of the lower decorative through hole 42c, and is positioned between the display through hole 42d facing the display 460, the display through hole 42a, and the inner rail 46. And a gate through-hole 42e in which a gate sensor 799 is disposed. In the embodiment, the gate through hole 42e is formed continuously with the display through hole 42a, and the two are connected.

  The display through hole 42a is slightly biased and formed on the upper side of the board main body 42, and occupies an area of 1/2 or more of the board main body (see FIG. 13). The display through hole 42a is formed on the front side of the display unit 13a in the symbol display device 13, and at the game board 40, at least a symbol change game is performed in an area overlapping the display through port 42a in the display unit 13a. It is like that. The panel main body 42 is provided with a display frame 100 which will be described later by fitting into the display through hole 42a (see FIG. 5).

  The board main body 42 has a start winning device 70 capable of winning a pachinko ball W flowing down the game area 40a below the display through hole 42a (the display frame 100 fitted and attached to the display through hole 42a). It is fitted to the upper part of the winning device through hole 42b (see FIG. 5 or FIG. 6). Also, on the board main body 42, below the start winning device 70, a special winning device 74 capable of winning a pachinko ball W flowing down the game area 40a is fitted in the lower portion of the winning device through hole 42b. . Further, the board main body 42 is fitted into a lower ornamental through-hole 42c formed along the lower edge of the game area 40a, and constitutes a front portion of a left-side ordinary winning device (ordinary winning device) 400 located on the left side. A lower decorative member 402 is provided (see FIG. 13). Furthermore, the board main body 42 is provided with a ball passage gate 798 including a gate sensor 799 so as to be fitted to the gate through hole 42e (see FIG. 5).

(Back unit)
As shown in FIGS. 14 to 16, the back unit 50 is a synthetic resin member formed in a box shape that opens forward, and the open end is abutted against the rear surface of the panel main body 42, and the panel main body 42. (See FIG. 11 or FIG. 12). The back unit 50 includes an installation plate portion 52 that constitutes the rear surface of the game board 40, a peripheral plate portion 54 that extends forward from the periphery of the installation plate portion 52, and outward from the front end of the peripheral plate portion 54. And an edge plate portion 55 extending toward the end. In the back unit 50 of the embodiment, the portions constituting the upper and lower sides of the installation plate portion 52, the peripheral plate portion 54 and the edge plate portion 55 are integrally formed, while the portions constituting the left and right sides of the edge plate portion 55 are formed integrally. Each of the integrally formed portions is formed separately. The back unit 50 is formed so that the front opening surrounded by the peripheral plate portion 54 is approximately matched to the game area 40 a and the outer peripheral edge of the edge plate portion 55 is approximately matched to the outer peripheral edge of the board body 42. It is formed with. The rear unit 50 abuts the edge plate portion 55 against the panel main body 42 and is screwed and fixed to the rear surface of the panel main body 42, and the installation plate portion 52 is spaced from the rear surface of the panel main body 42. A space in which devices and members can be arranged is defined between the panel main body 42 (see FIG. 77).

  In the back unit 50, a rectangular display opening 53 is formed at the center position of the installation plate portion 52 so as to penetrate therethrough (see FIGS. 9 to 11). In the rear unit 50, devices and members that produce or decorate the game board 40 are installed on the front side of the installation plate portion 52, and the symbol display device 13 and the relay board 38 are installed on the rear side of the installation plate portion 52. It has become. In the gaming board 40 according to the embodiment, the first movable effect device 500 is installed on the front side of the upper side portion 52 a extending above the display opening 53 of the installation plate portion 52 in the back unit 50. The second movable effect device 750 is installed on the front surface of the right side portion 52b that extends to the right side of the third movable effect device 780. Is installed (see FIG. 14 or FIG. 16). Further, in the game board 40, the lighting device 300 is installed on the front surface of the lower side part 52 d extending below the display opening 53 in the installation plate part 52.

  In the game board 40, the symbol display device 13 is attached to the rear side of the installation plate portion 52 in the back unit 50 with the display portion 13a facing the display opening 53 (see FIG. 2 or FIG. 8). The display opening 53 of the embodiment is formed so as to be smaller than the display through hole 42 a of the board main body 42 and overlaps the rear side of the display through hole 42 a. The display unit 13a of the symbol display device 13 facing the front side is positioned inside the display through hole 42a (see FIG. 5 or FIG. 6).

  The back unit 50 is provided with display holding means 56, 57, 58 for detachably holding the symbol display device 13 on the rear surface of the installation plate portion 42 (see FIGS. 8 to 11). The display holding means is a device holding portion 56 (in the embodiment, spaced vertically) provided with a receiving port (see FIG. 12) that is formed in a portal shape on the rear surface of the left side portion 52c of the installation plate portion 52 and opens to the display opening 53 side. 2), a holding opening 57 (two spaced apart in the vertical direction in the embodiment) formed through the right side portion 52b of the installation plate portion 52, and a rear surface of the lower side portion 52d of the installation plate portion 52. The lower receiving piece 58 is formed to extend rearward so as to extend along the opening 53. The symbol display device 13 inserts insertion pieces (two spaced apart in the embodiment in the embodiment: two not shown) protruding leftward on the left side surface into corresponding receptacles of the device holding portions 56 and 56. The lower surface is placed on the lower receiving piece 58, and a device fixing tool 59 such as a ny latch provided on the right side is locked by the holding openings 57, 57, so that it can be attached to the back unit 50 (see FIG. 8). . The display opening 53 of the back unit 50 is closed with the symbol display device 13.

  The back unit 50 is provided with a substrate installation portion 60 on the rear surface that holds the relay substrate 38 and is located below the attachment area of the symbol display device 13 (see FIGS. 8 to 11). In the embodiment, the board installation portions 60 are provided at three positions apart from each other on the left and right, and three relay boards 38 are installed side by side on the rear surface of the back unit 50 (see FIG. 11). The substrate mounting portion 60 of the embodiment is connected to the rear surface of the relay board 38 and the board support piece 60 a that extends rearward from the rear surface of the mounting plate section 52 and extends to match the corresponding relay board 38. The board holding piece 60b is configured to stop and sandwich the relay board 38 between the board holding piece 60a. In the substrate placement unit 60, a pair of substrate pressing pieces 60b are vertically arranged opposite to each other with the relay substrate 38 interposed therebetween, and one (in the embodiment, the upper side) substrate pressing piece 60b contacts and separates from the other substrate pressing piece 60b. It is configured to be elastically deformable in the direction. The substrate installation portion 60 is supported at the periphery by the substrate support piece 60 a and is held away from the rear surface of the back unit 50. Moreover, the board | substrate installation part 60 can insert / remove the relay board | substrate 38 easily by fingertip operation, without using a tool by bending one board | substrate holding piece 60b.

  The relay board 38 is provided on the front side of the back unit 50, movable side effect devices 500, 750, 780, the light side effect devices 200, the lighting device 300, and the like, and the main control attached to the rear side of the back unit 50. Electrically relays to control-side electrical equipment such as the device 32 and the overall control device 37, and is connected to wiring connected to the production-side electrical equipment, wiring connected to the control-side electrical equipment, and other relay boards 38. Wiring to be connected is connected (see FIG. 9). In addition, the game board 40 is located on the front side of the back unit 50 as a production-side electric device, and the light-emission production device 200 and the frame body illumination means (illumination means) 130, 131, 132, 133, 134 provided on the board body 42. Etc. (see FIG. 18).

  Thus, the game board 40 is provided with the upper first movable effect device 500, the left and right second and third movable effect devices 750 and 780, and the lower illumination device 300 surrounding the display unit 13a. It is comprised so that a required production can be performed with the apparatus of (refer FIG. 5 or FIG. 6). In the game board 40 of the embodiment, the movable body provided in each of the first to third movable effect devices 500, 750, 780 of the display unit 13a facing the front side of the game board 40 in the symbol display device 13 is provided. It operates between a first position at the peripheral edge (see FIG. 5) and a second position (see FIG. 6) displaced from the first position toward the center of the display unit 13a.

(Start-up prize-winning device)
As shown in FIG. 5, the start winning device 70 includes upper and lower start winning ports (winning ports) 70a and 70b which are provided on the front surface of the board main body 42 and can win a pachinko ball W flowing down the game area 40a. . The start winning device 70 is attached to the board body 42 by closing the upper portion of the winning device through hole 42b. In the pachinko machine 10, when the pachinko ball W won in the start winning ports 70a and 70b of the start winning device 70 is detected by the start winning sensor 72 (see FIG. 155), the symbol variation is performed on the display unit 13a of the symbol display device 13. Is started, and a predetermined number (for example, five) of pachinko balls W are paid out to the upper and lower ball trays 15 and 16 as prize balls. At the same time, in the pachinko machine 10, symbol variation is started in a special display section 465 of the display 460 described later (see FIG. 17). A pair of blade members 71 and 71 swingable so as to approach and separate from each other are provided at the left and right positions sandwiching the lower start winning opening 70b (see FIG. 5), and driving means such as a solenoid (not shown). By swinging the blade members 71, 71, the lower start winning opening 70b is opened and closed.

(Special winning equipment)
As shown in FIG. 5 or FIG. 6, the special winning device 74 is fitted to the lower part of the winning device through-hole 42b and attached to the board main body 42, and is opened so as to face the front of the board main body 42 and open front and rear. A horizontally long special winning opening 74a (see FIG. 5) is provided. The special prize winning device 74 includes an opening / closing door 75 for opening and closing the special winning opening 74a. The special winning opening 74a is opened and closed by displacing the opening / closing door 75 by a driving means such as a solenoid (not shown). It has come to be. In the special winning device 74, the special winning opening 74a facing the game area 40a is always closed by the open / close door 75, and the special display on the display 460 is triggered by the winning of the pachinko ball W to the starting winning opening 70a, 70b. As a result of the symbol variation in the portion 465, a so-called “big hit” occurs when the symbol is stopped and displayed on the special display portion 465 with a predetermined symbol combination, and thereby the opening and closing door 75 is controlled to open, A large number of winning balls can be obtained by winning the special winning opening 74a. In the symbol display device 13, from the start of the symbol variation on the special display unit 465 triggered by the winning of the pachinko ball W to the starting prize opening 70a, 70b of the starting prize winning device 70, the winning as a result of the symbol variation is performed. The symbol change effect related to the symbol change game performed in the special display unit 465 is performed between the time and the determination of losing, so that the player can have a sense of expectation or superiority.

  A ball passage gate 798 through which a pachinko ball W flowing down the game area 40a can pass is disposed on the front surface of the board main body 42 on the left side of the display frame 100 in the game area 40a (see FIG. 5 or FIG. 6). The ball passing gate 798 is configured such that when the passage of the pachinko ball W is detected, a normal symbol displayed on a normal display unit 467 (see FIG. 17) of the display 460 described later starts to fluctuate. It is set to perform a lottery to determine whether or not to open 70 blade members 71 and 71.

(Normal winning equipment)
As shown in FIG. 5 or FIG. 6, the board main body 42 is provided with normal winning ports 406 and 452 on both the left and right sides of the special winning port 74a. In the game board 40, the pachinko balls W won in the normal winning holes 406 and 452 from the game area 40 a are guided to the rear side of the board body 42 and flow down through the ball passages 410, 414 and 416 provided in the back unit 50. (See FIG. 14). In the pachinko machine 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are detected by detecting the pachinko balls W with a normal winning sensor (detecting means) 401 provided on the downstream side of the ball passages 410, 414, and 416. The upper and lower ball trays 15 and 16 are configured to be paid out. Here, the game board 40 has a left normal winning device 400 corresponding to the normal winning port 406 positioned on the left side of the special winning port 74a and a right normal winning corresponding to the normal winning port 452 positioned on the right side of the special winning port 74a. Device 450.

  The game board 40 flows down to the bottom of the game area 40a, that is, below the special prize-winning device 74 without winning the starting prize-winning ports 70a and 70b, the special prize-winning port 74a, and the respective normal prize-winning ports 406 and 452. An out port 41 for discharging the pachinko ball W to the back side of the machine is formed (see FIG. 5 or FIG. 6).

  On the back surface of the symbol display device 13 detachably disposed on the rear surface of the game board 40 (back unit 50), as shown in FIG. 2, an effect display control device 36 for controlling the display of the symbol display device 13 is provided. It is arranged. Further, on the rear surface of the symbol display device 13, the movable effect devices 500, 750, and 780 are operated or controlled to emit light, the light effect device 200, the illumination device 300, the frame illumination means 130, 131, 132, 133, 134, and the like. An overall control device 37 that controls the light emission of the light emitting device and controls the sound effect output of the speaker 33 is disposed adjacent to the effect display control device 36. In the pachinko machine 10, control devices (control-side electric devices), or control-device and movable effect devices 500, 750, 780 and light-emitting devices 130, 131, 132, 133, 134, 200, 300, etc. The symbol display device 13, the speaker 33, the start winning sensor 72, the special winning sensor 76, the normal winning sensor 401, and the like are electrically connected directly by wiring or via the relay board 38 (see FIG. 155).

  The main control device 32 includes a detection signal from the start winning sensor 72 that detects the pachinko ball W won in the start winning ports 70a and 70b, and a special winning sensor 76 that detects the pachinko ball W won in the special winning port 74a. And a detection signal from the normal winning sensor 401 that detects the pachinko ball W that has won the normal winning holes 406 and 452 are input (see FIG. 155). The main control device 32 is a main control CPU capable of executing control operations in a predetermined procedure, a main control ROM storing a control program for the main control CPU, and a main control ROM capable of writing and reading necessary data. An electronic component such as a RAM (not shown) is provided.

  The main control device 32 updates the values of various random numbers such as the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the variation pattern distribution random number every predetermined cycle, and the updated value is set in the main control RAM setting area. The value before update is rewritten by storing (setting) in, and random number update processing (random number generation processing) is executed. For example, in the main control device 32, when a detection signal is input from the start winning sensor 72, the main control CPU acquires a big hit determination random number from the main control RAM, and the big hit determination random number and the main control ROM The big hit determination value is compared, and a big hit lottery (big hit determination) is performed to determine whether or not to win. In the main control device 32, when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, the big hit effect is determined from the variation pattern table including only the big hit effect.

  On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot determination is out of place, the out effect is determined from the variation pattern table including only the out effect. The determination of the big hit effect and the off-line effect is performed by a random number acquired from the main control RAM by the main control CPU, similarly to the big hit determination. Note that the variation pattern of the jackpot effect and the off-stage effect determined from the variation pattern table specifies at least the variation time and the content of the effect of the symbol variation game. In the pachinko machine 10, the effect display control device 36 causes the symbol display device 13 to perform a predetermined effect display based on the control signal of the overall control device 37 output according to the lottery result of the main control device 32. Based on the control signal of the payout control device 29 output by the control of the main control device 32, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out by the ball payout device 27a (see FIG. 155). Further, in the pachinko machine 10, based on the control signal of the overall control device 37, the movable effect device is operated, various light emitting devices are made to emit light, and sound effects are output from the speaker 33.

(Display frame)
As shown in FIG. 5 or FIG. 6, the panel main body 42 is provided with a display frame 100 which is a large decorative member also called a center accessory. The display frame 100 is formed in a frame shape that defines the window 100a on the inside, and is fitted to the display through-hole 42a and attached to the panel main body 42. In the game board 40, the outer shape of the display frame body 100 and the display through hole 42a are formed so as to be aligned, and the opening edge of the display through hole 42a is bordered by the display frame body 100 attached to the board body 42. (See FIG. 5). The display frame 100 has a substantially annular outer shape as viewed from the front, and a portion that bulges downward from the basic portion to the lower right side is formed, and the lower right portion of the window 100a is extended downward (see FIG. 18). Correspondingly, the panel main body 42 is formed with a notch portion that extends downward from the basic portion to the right portion of the lower edge, with the display through-hole 42a being basically circular in front view (FIG. 13). reference). Note that the extended portion at the lower right side of the display frame 100 is referred to as an extended portion 102 when particularly distinguished. Here, the extension part 102 of an Example is formed so that it may taper off as it goes below from the center part side of the window 100a.

  The display frame 100 is attached to the panel main body 42 so that the window 100a is formed larger than the display opening 53 of the back unit 50 and the display opening 53 is positioned inside the window 100a (see FIG. 5). . That is, in the game board 40, the display unit 13a facing the front side through the display opening 53 in the symbol display device 13 is positioned inside the window 100a. The game board 40 is configured to decorate the periphery of the display unit 13a with a display frame 100 surrounding the display unit 13a, and to partition the game area 40a and the display unit 13a with the display frame 100. Further, in the embodiment, a part of the first to third movable effect devices 500, 750, and 780 faces the inside of the window 100a, and the part is visible from the front side of the game board 40 (see FIG. 7). ).

  As shown in FIGS. 18 to 21, the display frame 100 includes a plate-like frame flange portion 104 that contacts the front surface of the opening of the display through-hole 42 a in the panel main body 42, and a front side of the frame flange portion 104. And a frame insertion portion 108 protruding rearward from the frame flange portion 104. The display frame 100 is fixed by screwing via a frame flange portion 104 that is brought into contact with the front surface of the panel main body 42 by inserting the frame insertion portion 108 into the display through hole 42a. Here, the frame flange portion 104 that covers the front surface of the panel main body 42 in the display frame 100 is provided with an inclined surface at the joint with the panel main body 42, or by setting the plate thickness to be thin, etc. Pachinko balls W are formed so as to be able to circulate between them, and constitute a part of the game area 40a (see FIG. 5).

  The heel portion 106 protrudes from the frame body flange portion 104 with a dimension equal to or larger than the diameter of the pachinko ball W (see FIG. 21 or FIG. 24), and the display frame body 100 is pachinko balls launched into the game area 40a by the heel portion 106. W is restricted from flowing across the window 100a (display unit 13a). The display frame 100 is provided with a heel portion 106 at a portion from the upper edge of the display frame 100 to the left and right side edges and a portion surrounding the extended portion 102 formed at the lower right portion (see FIG. 24). . The display frame 100 is not provided with a flange portion on the lower edge from the lower left edge to the upper left edge of the extension 102, and the frame flange portion 104 that forms the front surface of the lower edge is connected to the front surface of the panel main body 42. The substantially same surface is configured, and inflow from the game area 40a from the lower edge front side to the stage 150 provided on the upper lower edge of the display frame 100 (inside the window 100a) is allowed. The frame insertion portion 108 protrudes from the frame flange portion 104 with a dimension equal to or smaller than the plate thickness of the panel main body 42, and does not protrude from the display through hole 42a to the rear of the panel main body 42.

  The display frame 100 is not only decorative by appearance, but also means for emitting effects such as the light emitting effect device 200 and the frame illumination means 130, 131, 132, 133, 134 installed in the expansion unit 102, passing through the sphere A part of the gate 798 and the stage 150 is provided (see FIG. 18). In the display frame 100 of the embodiment, the first frame illuminating unit 130 is provided on the left side of the lower edge, and the second frame illuminating unit 131 is biased toward the center side from the first frame illuminating unit 130 and on the left side of the lower edge. The third frame illuminating means 132 is provided biased to the center side on the right side of the lower edge, and the fourth frame illuminating means 133 is located on the right side of the third frame illuminating means 132 so as to define the extension 102. It is provided at the left edge. Further, the display frame 100 is provided with a fifth frame illumination means 134 at the right edge. In the display frame 100, the second frame illuminating means 131 and the third frame illuminating means 132 have a bilaterally symmetric relationship across a ball outlet 172 of a later-described ball guide path 170 provided at the lower edge. Has been placed. Further, the display frame 100 is provided with a gate installation portion 800 of a ball passage gate 798 extending to the left side (the side opposite to the window 100a) on the left edge (see FIG. 18).

  The display frame 100 includes a closed ring-shaped frame main body 110, a plurality of frame decoration parts (decoration parts) 120 provided on the front side of the frame main body 110, and a bowl-shaped part provided on the front side of the frame main body 110. 122, 124, and 126 (see FIG. 22 or FIG. 23), the frame flange portion 104, the flange portion 106, and the frame insertion portion 108 described above are formed of these components. The frame main body 110 of the embodiment is made of synthetic resin and is entirely transparent. The frame main body 110 extends rearward from the rear surface of the front wall portion 111 and has a plate-like front wall portion 111 extending in parallel with the panel main body 42, and extends in accordance with the display through hole 42a. The outer wall 112 is formed (see FIG. 23). The frame main body 110 includes a main body inner wall portion (inner wall portion) 114 that is formed so as to extend rearward from the rear surface of the front wall portion 111 and is spaced from the outer wall portion 112 inside the outer wall portion 112. The front wall portion 111 extends between the outer wall portion 112 and the main body inner wall portion 114. The frame main body 110 is provided with an outer wall portion 112 over the entire circumference of the front wall portion 111 extending in an annular shape corresponding to the display through hole 42a (see FIG. 19), and the outer wall portion 112 constituting the frame body insertion portion 108. Is fitted into the display through hole 42a so as to face the inner peripheral surface of the display through hole 42a. In the frame main body 110, a portion extending outward from the outer wall portion 112 in the front wall portion 111 constitutes a frame body flange portion 104.

  In the frame main body 110, a main body inner wall portion 114 is provided on the left side of the lower edge and the left side edge of the extended portion 102 with the center of the lower edge of the display frame body 100 (see FIG. 22 or FIG. 23), and separated from the left and right. A lower rolling portion 157 of a stage 150, which will be described later, provided between the body wall portions 114 blocks between the left and right main body inner wall portions 114, 114 (see FIG. 24). That is, in the display frame body 100, the lower rolling portion 157 constitutes the inner wall portion of the frame main body 110, and the outer wall portion 112, the inner wall portions 114 and 157, and the front wall portion 111 extending between the two are arranged on the rear side. An open groove-like wiring passage 116 is defined at least at the lower edge of the display frame body 100 (lower edge of the frame body 110). In the following description, the main body inner wall portion 114 and the lower rolling portion 157 that define the wiring passage 116 are simply referred to as an inner wall portion unless otherwise distinguished. The frame main body 110 has inner wall portions 114, extending from the installation site of the frame body illumination means 130, 131, 132, 133, 134 to the light emitting effect device 200 installed in the extended portion 102 provided in the lower right portion of the display frame 100. 157 is provided (see FIG. 20), and the inner wall portions 114, 157 and the outer wall portion 112 constitute the frame insertion portion 108. On the other hand, in the display frame 100, the upper edge of the display frame 100 where the frame illumination means 130, 131, 132, 133, and 134 are not provided and the upper portions of the left and right side edges are the frame insertion portion 108. It is comprised only by the outer wall part 112 (refer FIG. 19).

  The frame body 110 is provided with frame body light transmitting portions (light transmitting portions) 130 a, 131 a, 132 a, 133 a constituting the first to fourth frame illuminating means 130, 131, 132, 133 on the front wall portion 111. (See FIG. 22). In the frame main body 110 of the embodiment, the first frame light transmitting part 130 a corresponding to the first frame light illuminating means 130 is provided on the left side of the lower edge, and the second frame light transmitting light corresponding to the second frame light illuminating means 131. The portion 131a is provided on the left side of the lower edge so as to be biased toward the center side from the first frame transparent portion 130a. Further, the frame main body 110 is provided with a third frame transparent portion 132a corresponding to the third frame illuminating means 132 so as to be biased toward the center side on the right side of the lower edge, and corresponds to the fourth frame illuminating means 133. The fourth frame body translucent part 133a is located on the right side of the third frame body translucent part 132a and is provided on the left edge that defines the extension part 102. The first to third frame transparent parts 130a, 131a, and 132a are formed over the inside and outside of the display frame 100, and the length extends in the inside and outside directions of the display frame 100 (see FIG. 18).

  The first to third frame transparent portions 130a, 131a, 132a are formed longer than the separation width between the outer wall portion 112 and the inner wall portions 114, 157 facing the outer wall portion 112, and outward from the outer wall portion 112. It is configured to protrude from the inner wall portions 114 and 157 toward the window 100a (see FIG. 22). The fourth frame body translucent part 133a is provided to protrude forward from the first to third frame body translucent parts 130a, 131a, 132a, and extends along the left edge surrounding the expansion part 102, and the expansion part A part of the flange portion 106 at the left side edge of 102 is formed. The frame light transmitting portions 130a, 131a, 132a, and 133a are configured to transmit light and have a light diffusing structure. Provided (see FIG. 26). The frame main body 110 has a substrate insertion recess 113 formed to be recessed forward in each of the portions of the outer wall portion 112 corresponding to the rear side of the first to third frame light transmitting portions 130a, 131a, 132a. (See FIG. 23).

  Here, in this application, “light can be transmitted” means “transparency” in which the light transmittance is extremely high and the other side can be seen through the portion, and the property of transmitting light in the same manner as this “transparency”. However, because the transmitted light is diffused or the transmittance is low, the shape on the other side cannot be clearly recognized through the portion, unlike “transparent”, or cannot be recognized at all. For example, it refers to the state of polished glass or milky white plastic.

  In addition, the light diffusing structure referred to in the present application refers to, for example, surface processing for forming irregularities on the surface of a light-transmitting member or light diffusing ink containing light-reflecting fine particles with various concentration distributions. Refers to processing that prints or applies to the surface of a member having transparency, dispersion processing of light-reflective particles in the resin itself that constitutes the member, for example, lame processing, processing that changes the refractive index of transmitted light, etc. Only one process or a plurality of processes may be combined. Specific examples of surface processing include groove processing, diamond cutting processing, texture processing, blast processing, and the like. As processing for changing the refractive index of light, the surface of a member has a fine refractive index different from that of the member. Examples thereof include a sheet lens provided with unevenness.

  The frame decoration 120 is provided on the front surface of the front wall 111 of the frame main body 110 with the frame transparent parts 130 a, 131 a, 132 a, and 133 a removed, and constitutes the front of the display frame 100. (See FIG. 18). The display frame body 100 is provided with a first frame body decoration portion 120A located on the left side of the first frame body light transmission portion 130a, and the first frame body light transmission portion 130a and the second frame body light transmission portion 131a. The second frame body decoration part 120B is provided between the second frame body light transmission part 131a and the third frame body light transmission part 132a, and the third frame body decoration part 120C is provided between A fourth frame decoration portion 120D is provided between the three frame body light transmitting portion 132a and the fourth frame body light transmitting portion 133a. The first to third frame decoration parts 120A, 120B, and 120C are plate-like parts (see FIG. 22 or FIG. 23), and the thickness of the frame decoration part 120 from the front surface of the front wall part 111. The first to third frame translucent portions 130a, 131a, 132a formed so as to protrude only by the front face are aligned (see FIG. 24). The fourth frame decoration portion 120D has a plate-like portion covering the front surface of the front wall portion 111 constituting the lower edge of the frame main body 110, and protrudes forward from the plate-like portion, to the left of the fourth frame transparent portion 133a. A convex portion extending along the edge, the plate-like portion is aligned with the front surface of the third frame transparent portion 132a, and the convex portion is aligned with the front surface of the fourth frame transparent portion 133a. It has become. The third frame decoration portion 120C is cut out so as not to block the ball outlet 172 of the ball guide path 170.

  The plate-like portions of the first to third frame decoration parts 120A, 120B, 120C and the fourth frame decoration part 120D are first to third frame bodies whose widths in the inside and outside directions of the display frame body 100 are adjacent to each other. It is set in accordance with the light transmitting portions 130a, 131a and 132a, and is configured to protrude outward from the outer wall portion 112 and to protrude toward the window 100a from the inner wall portions 114 and 157 (see FIG. 24). In the display frame 100, the plate-like portions of the first to third frame decoration parts 120A, 120B, and 120C, the fourth frame decoration part 120D, and the first to third frame light transmission parts 130a, 131a, A pachinko ball W is configured to be able to circulate between 132a and the front surface of the board body 42. In the display frame 100, the first to third frame decoration parts 120A, 120B, 120C, the plate-like part of the fourth frame decoration part 120D, and the first to third frame transparent parts 130a, 131a, The frame flange portion 104 is configured by 132a. Further, the display frame body 100 is provided with a fifth frame body decoration portion 120E along the right edge (on the extended portion 102 side) of the fourth frame transparent portion 133a (see FIG. 18). The heel portion 106 at the left edge of 102 is constituted by the convex portion of the fourth frame body decoration portion 120D, the fourth frame body light transmitting portion 133a, and the fifth frame body decoration portion 120E.

  The display frame body 100 includes first to third frame body translucent portions 130a, 131a, and 132a that are adjacent frame body decoration portions 120 that are installed in the frame body 110 apart from each other in the circumferential direction of the window 100a. The frame transparent parts 130a, 131a, and 132a are bordered by the frame decorative part 120 (see FIG. 18 or FIG. 24). Moreover, the 1st-4th frame decoration part 120 is comprised so that the whole surface can reflect light. The first to fourth frame decorations 120 of the embodiment can reflect light not only on the front surface but also on the rear surface facing the stage 150 and the illumination device 300 located on the rear side. Here, the 1st-4th frame decoration part 120 is comprised so that light may be reflected by the mirror surface process by metal plating, and a stage is carried out by the rear surface of the frame decoration part 120 which covers the front surface of the transparent frame main body 110. The light of the frame illuminating means 130, 131, 132, 133 can be reflected on the 150 rolling surfaces 153, 154.

  The display frame 100 includes a first hook-shaped portion 122 provided on the right edge of the frame body 110 corresponding to the fifth frame body lighting means 134 and a second hook-shaped portion 124 provided on the left edge of the frame body 110. And a third hook-like part 126 extending between the upper side of the first hook-like part 122 and the upper side of the second hook-like part 124, and these hook-like parts 122, 124, 126 are used to A flange portion 106 and a frame flange portion 104 are formed across the left edge, the upper edge, the right edge, and the right edge of the extension 102 (see FIG. 24). That is, the first to third hook-shaped parts 122, 124, and 126 include at least a portion that protrudes from the front surface of the panel main body 42, and the first hook-shaped part 122 of the embodiment includes a piece that extends outward. The frame flange portion 104 of the display frame 100 is also configured. The first to third hook-shaped portions 122, 124, 126 of the embodiment are provided with opaque decorations and patterns on the basis of being transparent, for example, capable of transmitting light. Therefore, the game board 40 is disposed on the rear side of the board body 42 via the transparent frame body 110 of the display frame 100 and the transparent parts of the bowl-shaped parts 122, 124, 126 and the transparent board body 42. Some of the installed members and devices are visible from the front side (see FIG. 7).

  The first saddle-shaped portion 122 is configured by combining a transparent portion and a portion capable of reflecting light, covers the front side of the fifth frame illuminating means 134, and is positioned on the front side of the fifth frame illuminating means 134. A transparent portion (fifth frame light transmitting portion) 134a emits light by the fifth frame body illumination means 134 (see FIG. 18 or FIG. 22). The second bowl-shaped portion 124 is provided with a ball inlet 141 of the warp passage 140 that opens to the game area 40a on the left side surface (see FIG. 25). The third hook-shaped portion 126 is configured by connecting a plurality of components attached to the front surface of the frame main body 110 and a portion protruding from the front surface of the front wall portion 111 of the frame main body 110.

  The first to fourth frame illuminating means 130, 131, 132, 133 are frame body illumination boards 130b installed on the rear side of the front wall portion 111 (frame body translucent portions 130a, 131a, 132a, 133a). 131b, 132b, 133b, and LED 130c as an illuminating body provided on the front surface of the frame body lighting boards 130b, 131b, 132b, 133b and disposed on the rear side of the frame body light transmitting portions 130a, 131a, 132a, 133a, It is basically composed of 131c, 132c, and 133c (see FIG. 22, FIG. 23, or FIG. 26). Similarly, the fifth frame illuminating means 134 is provided on the front surface of the fifth frame illuminating board 134b and the fifth frame illuminating board 134b installed on the rear side of the first bowl-shaped portion 122. It is basically composed of an LED 134c as an illuminating body arranged on the rear side of the frame body translucent part 134a. The frame illumination boards 130b, 131b, and 132b constituting the first to third frame illumination means 130, 131, and 132 have substrate protrusions that project outward at the outer edges in the inner and outer directions of the display frame 100. Each part 135 is provided (see FIG. 22). The substrate convex portion 135 is set so that the circumferential width of the window 100a in the display frame 100 is set in accordance with the substrate insertion concave portion 113 of the outer wall portion 112 and does not protrude outward from the substrate insertion concave portion 113. The In addition, the circumference direction of the window 100a in the display frame 100 is a direction along the outer periphery of the window 100a in the display frame 100 formed in a ring shape closed in a front view.

  The frame illumination boards 130b, 131b, and 132b of the first to third frame illumination means 130, 131, and 132 have their thickness directions along the front-rear direction, and the substrate projection 135 on the board insertion recess 113 of the outer wall 112. And are accommodated between the outer wall portion 112 and the inner wall portions 114 and 157 (see FIG. 19 or FIG. 20). Further, the frame illumination boards 130b, 131b, 132b of the first to third frame illumination means 130, 131, 132 are provided at the rear ends of the board mounting bosses 117 protruding rearward from the rear surface of the front wall portion 111 in the frame main body 110. At the same time, the substrate projection 135 is brought into contact with the bottom of the substrate insertion recess 113 and fixed to the substrate mounting boss 117 with screws. That is, the frame illumination boards 130b, 131b, and 132b of the first to third frame illumination means 130, 131, and 132 are sandwiched between the outer wall portion 112 and the inner wall portions 114 and 157, and the inner and outer sides of the display frame body 100 are arranged. In addition to being positioned in the direction, the substrate protrusion 135 is sandwiched between the substrate insertion recesses 113 and positioned in the circumferential direction of the display frame 100. The first to third frame illuminators 130, 131, and 132 are supported by the LEDs 130c, 131c, and 132c being spaced apart from the corresponding frame transparent portions 130a, 130b, and 130c (see FIG. 26). The rear surface of the third frame illumination boards 130b, 131b, and 132b is positioned in front of the rear end of the outer wall portion 112. The first to third frame illuminating means 130, 131, 132 are provided with sockets 130d, 131d, 132d on the rear surfaces of the first to third frame illuminating boards 130b, 131b, 132b, respectively. A frame illumination wiring (wiring) H1 connected to the first light emitting substrate 221 as a relay portion is connected to 132d (see FIG. 20).

  The fourth frame illuminating board 133b of the fourth frame illuminating means 133 is accommodated between the outer wall portion 112 and the main body inner wall portion 114 with its thickness direction along the front-rear direction. The fourth frame body lighting board 133b is fixed so that the LEDs 133c are separated from the fourth frame body light transmitting part 133a, and the rear surface of the fourth frame body lighting board 133b is behind the outer wall part 112 and the main body inner wall part 114. It is located in front of the end. The fourth frame illuminating means 133 is provided with a socket 133d on the rear surface of the fourth frame illuminating board 133b, and a frame illuminating wiring (wiring) H1 connected to the first light emitting board 221 is connected to the socket 133d. (See FIG. 20). Here, the fourth frame illuminating means 133 is provided with a socket 133d under the fourth frame illuminating board 133b extending along the left side edge of the extended portion 102.

  The fifth frame illumination means 134 includes a fifth frame illumination board 134b installed on the front side of the illumination board base 134e attached to the window 100a side of the frame main body 110, and a front side of the fifth frame illumination board 134b. And an LED 134c as an illuminating body provided corresponding to the fifth frame body translucent part 134a of the first bowl-shaped part 122 (see FIG. 22 or FIG. 23). The fifth frame illuminating means 134 of the embodiment is from the first to fourth frame illuminating means 130, 131, 132, 133 that illuminate the frame transparent parts 130 a, 131 a, 132 a, 133 a provided on the frame main body 110. A fifth frame body translucent portion 134a made of a transparent portion that is large and extends to the inside and outside of the display frame 100 on the first bowl-shaped portion 122, and a transparent located at the edge of the window 100a The fifth frame body translucent part 134a and the like, which are parts, are light-emitted by the LEDs 134c of the fifth frame body lighting board 134b.

  The frame main body 110 is provided with a pair of decorative attachment receiving portions (attachment portions) 118 and 118 protruding rearward from the rear surface of the front wall portion 111 (see FIG. 23). The pair of decorative attachment receiving portions 118, 118 are provided corresponding to the first to third frame light transmitting portions 130a, 131a, 132a, respectively, and are arranged with the frame light transmitting portions 130a, 131a, 132a interposed therebetween. Has been. Each decoration attachment receiving portion 118 is located on the outer wall 112 side of the front wall portion 111 in the frame main body 110 and is disposed laterally outward with respect to the opening side edge in the circumferential direction of the board insertion recess 113. The board insertion recess 113 is sandwiched between decorative attachment receiving parts 118 and 118 adjacent in the direction around the window 100a. The decoration attachment receiving portion 118 is formed so as to protrude from the bottom of the substrate insertion recess 113 with a dimension equal to or larger than the thickness of the frame body lighting board 130b, 131b, 132b, and the rear end thereof is located in front of the rear end of the outer wall portion 112. (See FIG. 26). Moreover, each decoration attachment receiving part 118 is formed in the cylinder shape provided with the through-hole penetrated to the front and back.

  The display frame 100 is fitted with a decorative mounting boss 121 formed rearwardly projecting on the rear surface of the first to fourth frame decorative parts 120A, 120B, 120C, 120D in the through hole of the decorative mounting receiving part 118, A decorative attachment member (attachment member) 136 is attached to the decorative attachment boss 121 facing the rear side of the frame main body 110 through the through hole (see FIG. 19 or FIG. 20). As a result, in the display frame 100, the first to fourth frame decoration parts 120 </ b> A, 120 </ b> B, 120 </ b> C, 120 </ b> D are held on the frame body 110 by being held by the decoration attachment member 136 larger than the through hole of the decoration attachment receiving part 118. Fixed. Here, the decoration attachment member 136 is passed to a pair of frame decoration parts 120A, 120B, 120C, and 120D that are adjacent to each other in the circumferential direction of the window 100a across the frame light transmission parts 130a, 131a, and 132a. 110 is attached to both frame decoration portions 120A, 120B, 120C, and 120D from the rear side. Therefore, the decoration attachment member 136 does not hold only the same frame decoration part 120, but the frame body between the frame decoration parts 120, 120 adjacent to each other with the frame light transmission parts 130a, 131a, 132a interposed therebetween. 110 is connected on the back side.

  The ornament mounting member 136 is a member having screw holes at both ends. In the embodiment, the decoration mounting member 136 is formed in a shape like an iron array in which both ends of the rod-shaped portion swell (see FIG. 22 or FIG. 23). Further, on the decoration mounting member 136, a wiring wall piece 136a protruding rearward is formed on the rear surface of the rod-shaped portion along the rod-shaped portion (see FIG. 20). The ornament attachment member 136 is connected to the ornament attachment boss 121 of the frame ornament portion 120 facing one of the pair of ornament attachment receiving portions 118 disposed with the frame transparent portions 130a, 131a, and 132a interposed therebetween. One of the parts is fixed with screws, and the other end of the pair is attached to the decoration mounting boss 121 of another frame body decoration part 120 facing the other of the pair of decoration attachment receiving parts 118 with screws. The display frame 100 fixes two adjacent frame decorations 120 and 120 to the frame main body 110 with one decoration attachment member 136 with the frame transparent parts 130a, 131a, and 132a interposed therebetween, and two adjacent frames. The two frame decoration parts 120, 120 are configured to be connected to each other by a decoration attachment member 136. Here, the decoration attachment member 136 is located on the rear side of the frame illumination boards 130b, 131b, and 132b and on the rear side of the board insertion recess 113 and extends so as to cross the frame transparent parts 130a, 131a, and 132a. The outer wall 112 cut out in accordance with the frame transparent portions 130a, 131a, and 132a is connected (see FIG. 26). At this time, the wiring wall piece 136 a of the decoration mounting member 136 constitutes a part of the wiring passage 116.

  In the display frame 100, a wiring passage 116 is provided on the rear side of the frame main body 110 from the frame illumination means 130, 131, 132, 133, 134 to the light emitting effect device 200 installed in the extended portion 102. (See FIG. 20). The wiring passage 116 is defined so as to open rearward between the outer wall portion 112 and the inner wall portions 114 and 157 arranged in the inner and outer directions in the display frame body 100, and the board body on the inner side of the display through hole 42 a. It is within the range of 42 plate thickness. The wiring passage 116 is provided from the lower edge left side to the lower edge right side of the display frame 100 in which the first frame illumination means 130 is installed, and is provided from the lower edge right side to the lower part of the left edge of the extension portion 102. . Here, the first to fourth frame illuminating means 130, 131, 132, 133 are accommodated in the wiring passage 216, and are positioned on the side far from the first light emitting substrate 221 (hereinafter referred to as the upstream side). The frame illumination wiring H1 connected to the frame illumination means 130, 131, 132 to pass through the rear side of the frame illumination boards 131b, 132b, 133b located in front of the rear end of the outer wall portion 112. . In the light emitting effect device 200, the first light emitting substrate 221 faces the rear surface, and the frame body illumination wiring H1 connected to each frame body illumination means 130, 131, 132, 133 is connected to the light emitting substrate of the extension portion 102. In addition to being connected from the downstream end of the wiring passage 116 located at the lower left edge, an illumination wiring (wiring) H2 connected to the control electrical device side is connected to the first light emitting substrate 221.

  More specifically, based on FIG. 20, the frame illumination wiring connected to the socket 130d provided on the rear surface of the first frame illumination board 130b of the first frame illumination means 130 located on the most upstream side. H1 passes through the rear side of the frame illumination boards 131b and 131c of the second and third frame illumination means 131 and 132 in the wiring passage 116 extending to the lower edge of the display frame 100, and is on the left edge of the extension portion 102. The first light-emitting substrate from the lower part of the wiring passage 116 that extends to the left edge of the extended portion 102 through the rear side of the fourth frame illumination board 133b of the fourth frame illuminating means 133 in the wiring passage 116 that extends to 221 is connected. The frame illumination wiring H1 connected to the socket 131d provided on the rear surface of the second frame illumination board 131b of the second frame illumination means 131 is together with the frame illumination wiring H1 of the first frame illumination means 130. In the wiring passage 116 extending to the lower edge of the display frame 100, the wiring passage 116 passes through the rear side of the third frame illumination board 132 b of the third frame illumination means 132 and extends to the left edge of the extension portion 102. In FIG. 5, the fourth frame illumination means 133 is connected to the first light emitting substrate 221 from the lower part of the wiring passage 116 that passes through the rear side of the fourth frame illumination board 133 b and extends to the left edge of the extension portion 102. The frame illumination wiring H1 connected to the socket 132d provided on the rear surface of the third frame illumination board 132b of the third frame illumination means 132 is the frame of the first and second frame illumination means 130, 131. The fourth frame illumination of the fourth frame illuminating means 133 in the wiring passage 116 extending from the wiring passage 116 extending to the lower edge of the display frame 100 together with the illumination wirings H1 and H1 to the left edge of the extension portion 102. The first light emitting substrate 221 is connected from the lower part of the wiring passage 116 that extends to the left edge of the extended portion 102 through the rear side of the substrate 133b. The frame illumination wiring H1 connected to the socket 133d provided on the lower rear surface of the fourth frame illumination board 133b of the fourth frame illumination means 133 is connected to the first to third frame illumination means 130, 131, 132. Together with the frame illumination wirings H1, H1, and H1, the lower part of the wiring passage 116 extending to the left edge of the extended portion 102 is connected to the first light emitting substrate 221.

  Thus, in the game board 40, the frame illumination wiring H1 of the plurality of frame illumination means 130, 131, 132, 133 provided in the display frame 100 is wired to the first light emitting substrate 221 of the light emitting effect device 200. They are collected via the passage 116. In the game board 40, the lighting wiring H <b> 2 from the first light emitting substrate 221 together with the wiring for the light emitting effect device 200 is connected via the right wiring opening 83 opened at the lower side of the right side portion 52 c of the installation plate portion 52. It is pulled out to the rear side of the back unit 50 and connected to the relay board 38.

  In the display frame 100, another wiring passage 119 is provided on the rear side of the frame main body 110 from the lower side of the fifth frame illuminating means 134 to the upper right edge of the extended portion 102 (see FIG. 20). The fifth frame illuminating means 134 is provided with a socket 134d on the lower rear surface of the fifth frame illuminating board 134b so as to be exposed from the illuminating board base 134e, and is located below the fifth frame illuminating board 134b. One end of the frame illumination wiring H1 is connected to the socket 134d that opens toward the wiring passage 119, and the other end of the frame illumination wiring H1 housed in another wiring passage 119 and routed downward is the first. One light emitting substrate 221 is connected. Another wiring passage 119 is opened rearward from the outer wall portion 112, the main body inner wall portion 114, and the front wall portion 111 extending between the outer wall portion and the main body inner wall portion 114 in the same manner as the wiring passage 116 described above. It is formed in a groove shape.

  In the game board 40, the wiring connected to the gate sensor 799 may also be disposed in the wiring passage 116 defined on the rear side of the display frame 100. For example, the warp passage 140 is formed between the gate wiring connected to the rear end of the gate sensor 799 held by the sensor holding part provided at the center of the left edge of the frame body 110 and the second hook-like part 124. What is necessary is just to draw around to the wiring channel | path 116 through the clearance gap (refer FIG. 20) formed between the warp structural member 144 and the outer wall part 112, and to draw out to the back side of the back unit 50 with the wiring H2 for illumination.

  The display frame 100 has wiring holding means for pressing the frame illumination wiring H1 accommodated in the wiring passage 116 (see FIG. 20). Here, the wiring holding means is provided on the illumination board cover 137 that is integrally formed with the frame body 110 of the display frame body 100 or covers the components of the stage 150 attached to the frame body 110 and the rear side of the frame body illumination board 133b. It has been. The frame main body 110 is located at a connection portion between the lower edge and the upper left edge of the extension portion 102, and extends from the rear end of the outer wall portion 112 toward the inside and outside of the display frame body 100 (the side of the window 100 a). An outer wiring holding piece 110a extending to the rear side of the wiring passage 116 is provided. The frame illumination wiring H1 accommodated in the wiring path 116 is prevented from coming out of the wiring path 116 that bends from the lower edge of the display frame 100 to the left side edge of the extended portion 102 by the outer wiring holding piece 110a.

  The lower rolling portion (component member) 157 of the stage 150 constituting a part of the inner wall portion is extended to the outside of the window 100a so as to extend to the rear side of the wiring passage 116. It includes a piece (locking piece) 157b (see FIG. 20), and a stage mounting portion (mounting portion) 115 (see FIG. 23) provided on the front wall portion 111 through the wiring locking piece 157b. It is attached. Two wiring locking pieces 157b are provided on the lower surface of the lower rolling portion 157 with the ball guide path 170 located at the center of the display frame 100 interposed therebetween, and extend downward from the lower rolling portion 157. And is configured to extend to the rear side of the wiring passage 116. The stage 150 is attached so as to extend from the rear end of the main body inner wall portion 114 to the inside of the window 100a, and from the ball discharge port 142 of the warp passage 140 opened to the lower left side inner side of the display frame 100, the display frame. It has an internal barrier (component member) 164 that rises to the rear side of the lower rolling surface 153 over a required area toward the center of 100 (see FIG. 25). The inner barrier 164 is attached so as to rise from the rear side of the wiring passage 116 beyond the rear end of the main body inner wall portion 114, and extends between the outer wall portion 112 and the main body inner wall portion 114 and extends to the rear side of the wiring passage 116. (See FIG. 20). The frame illumination wiring H1 accommodated in the wiring passage 116 is prevented from coming out of the wiring passage 116 by the wiring locking pieces 157b and the internal barrier 164.

  The illumination board cover 137 is attached to the frame main body 110 so as to close the space between the outer wall portion 112 and the main body inner wall portion 114 constituting the left edge of the extension portion 102 (see FIG. 20). The illumination board cover 137 is provided with a cover wiring holding piece 137a protruding in a bowl shape on the rear surface, and the frame body illumination wiring H1 is inserted between the cover wiring holding piece 137a and the rear surface of the illumination board cover 137. To hold. Thus, the frame illumination wiring H1 accommodated in the wiring passage 116 is prevented from coming out of the wiring passage 116 by the cover wiring holding piece 137a.

  The frame body 110 extends from the rear end of the outer wall portion 112 constituting another wiring passage 119 toward the inside and outside of the display frame 100 (on the side of the window 100a), and to the rear side of the other wiring passage 119. The outer wiring holding piece 110a that extends and the rear end of the main body inner wall portion 114 that constitutes another wiring passage 119 extend outward inward and outward of the display frame 100 and extend to the rear side of another wiring passage 119. The existing inner wiring holding pieces 110b are alternately provided in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 20). The frame illumination wiring H1 accommodated in the separate wiring passage 119 is prevented from coming out of the separate wiring passage 119 by the outer wiring holding piece 110a and the inner wiring holding piece 110b. Note that a portion of the outer wall portion 112 facing the inner wiring holding piece 110b and a portion of the main body inner wall portion 114 facing the outer wiring holding piece 110a are notched, and a frame is formed from the side to the front side of the wiring holding pieces 110a and 110b. The body illumination wiring H1 can be easily inserted and removed.

  As described above, the display frame body 100 includes the frame body lighting boards 130b, 131b, and 132b provided in the frame body 110 in the wiring passages 116 and 119 defined between the outer wall portion 112 and the inner wall portions 114 and 157. , 133b, 134b, the frame illumination wiring H1 does not need to be disposed on the rear side of the panel main body 42. Therefore, according to the display frame 100, the frame illumination wiring H1 can be easily routed without causing interference with various devices installed on the rear side of the display frame 100. Further, the frame insert portion 108 of the display frame 100 in which the wiring passages 116 and 119 are provided is accommodated in the display through hole 42a of the panel main body 42, and the wiring passages 116 and 119 themselves do not protrude from the rear surface of the panel main body 42. Therefore, the space behind the display frame 100 can be freely used without worrying about interference with the frame illumination wiring H1. In the display frame 100, the frame illumination boards 130b, 131b, 132b, 133b, 134b and the first light emitting board 221 to which the frame illumination wiring H1 is connected are all installed in the frame main body 110. The frame illumination wiring H1 can be attached to the board main body 42 in a state in which the frame illumination wiring H1 is accommodated in advance in the passages 116 and 119. At this time, the frame illumination wiring H1 does not interfere with the installation. In other words, the degree of freedom of the work of arranging the frame body illumination wiring H1 is high, and the workability of attaching the display frame body 100 to the panel main body 42 is also good. Then, the frame illumination wiring H1 relays the first light emitting substrate 221 of the light emitting effect device 200 installed in the display frame 100, and collects from the first light emitting substrate 221 to the rear side of the back unit 50. Since it is turned, the wiring of the display frame body 100 attached to the panel main body 42 and the control-side electric device provided on the rear side of the back unit 50 can be simplified, and interference with other devices can be made difficult. Further, by accommodating the frame illumination wiring H1 in the wiring passages 116, 119, the frame illumination wiring H1 is hidden by the frame decoration portion 120, the frame illumination boards 131b, 132b, 133b, etc., and the game board 40 Even if the transparent panel main body 42 is employed, the appearance of the frame body illumination wiring H1 routed around the display frame body 100 is not deteriorated.

  The wiring passages 116, 119 are provided with wiring holding means 110a, 110b, 137a to prevent the frame illumination wiring H1 housed in the wiring passages 116, 119 from coming off (see FIG. 20). Here, the wiring holding means is not only integrally formed with the frame main body 110 but also a wiring locking piece 157b provided on the lower rolling portion 157 that is a constituent member of the stage attached to the frame main body 110 and a constituent member of the stage 150. Since the inner barrier 164 is used, it is possible to appropriately prevent the frame illumination wiring H1 from coming off from the wiring passage 116 while avoiding the complicated shape of the frame main body 110. In addition, since the wire locking piece 157b provided in the lower rolling portion 157 is shared as a part for attaching the lower rolling portion 157 to the frame body 110, the configuration of the stage 150 and the wiring holding means can be simplified.

  In the display frame 100, the first to third frame illumination boards 130b, 131b, and 132b are fitted with the substrate insertion recesses 113 formed in the outer wall 112 so that the first to third frame illumination boards 130b, 131b, and 132b are fitted. Although the frame illumination boards 130b, 131b, and 132b can be positioned, a decoration that fixes the frame decoration 120 provided on the front side of the front wall 111 is provided in the lacked portion of the outer wall 112 by providing the board insertion recess 113. The attachment member 136 extends to close the missing portion (see FIG. 26). Therefore, the frame illumination wiring H <b> 1 passing through the wiring passage 116 can be appropriately held over the entire route of the wiring passage 116.

  The display frame 100 is attached so that a decoration attachment member 136 for fixing the frame decoration 120 to the frame main body 110 extends over the adjacent frame decorations 120, 120. The display frame 100 can be reinforced by the decoration mounting member 136. That is, the display frame body 100 is provided with the frame body decoration portion 120 on the front side of the frame body light transmission portions 130a, 131a, and 132a for the purpose of exposing the frame body light transmission portions 130a, 131a, and 132a that emit light to the front side. Therefore, the rigidity of the portions corresponding to the frame transparent portions 130a, 131a, and 132a including only the frame main body 110 is inferior to the portion where the frame body decoration portion 120 and the frame main body 110 overlap. However, since the display frame 100 is mounted with the decoration attachment member 136 across the two frame decoration parts 120, 120 adjacent to each other with the frame transparent parts 130a, 131a, 132a interposed therebetween. The ornament mounting member 136 compensates for the rigidity of the portions corresponding to the frame body translucent portions 130a, 131a, and 132a. In addition, since the decoration attachment member 136 that holds the frame decoration 120 is used as a reinforcement for the display frame 100, the configuration can be simplified without increasing the number of parts.

  Therefore, like the pachinko machine 10 of the embodiment, the area where the symbol variation game is played on the game board 40 is increased, and accordingly the window 100a of the display frame 100 is also set to be larger. Even if the thickness of the display frame 100 is reduced, the display frame body 100 is not easily deformed, and is easy to handle during transportation and mounting, and can be attached to the panel body 42 in an appropriate posture. Further, even when the display frame 100 is used as an installation target of the large light emitting effect device 200, the load of the light emitting effect device 200 can be appropriately supported. Further, even if the substrate insertion recess 113 is provided in the outer wall 112 in order to position the substrate protrusion 135 of the first to third frame illumination boards 130b, 131b, and 132b, the display frame 100 is not limited to the outer wall 112. Since the decoration attaching member 136 that fixes the frame body decoration portion 120 extends in the portion lacking, the rigidity of the display frame body 100 can be secured by the decoration attachment member 136.

(stage)
As shown in FIG. 31, the game board 40 is provided with a stage 150 that guides a pachinko ball W taken from the game area 40a to roll left and right inside the window 100a of the display frame 100. ing. The stage 150 is provided in the display frame 100 and is provided in the frame stage part 152 that forms the front region of the stage 150 and the illumination device 300 that is installed in the lower side part 52d of the back unit 50. And a unit stage portion (stage portion) 166 forming a rear region of the rear side. The stage 150 includes rolling surfaces 153, 154, and 168 on which the pachinko balls W roll on the frame stage unit 152 and the unit stage unit 166, respectively, and the unit is made up of the rolling surfaces 153 and 154 of the frame body unit 152. The rolling surface 168 of the stage unit 166 is configured to be positioned on the upper side. Thus, the stage 150 is provided with a plurality of stages of rolling surfaces 153, 154, and 168 covering the front and back from the front surface of the panel main body 42 to the display unit 13a of the symbol display device 13. Here, in the stage 150, a plurality of stages of rolling surfaces 153, 154, 168 are provided so as to descend from the rear side toward the front side, and the pachinko ball W taken directly from the game area 40a or from the warp passage 140 is displayed on the display unit It can be guided from the 13a side toward the game area 40a and finally released into the game area 40a. Each of the rolling surfaces 153, 154, 168 is curved so that the left and right side edges are higher than the center portion, and the pachinko balls W riding on the rolling surfaces 153, 154, 168 are placed on the rolling surfaces 153, It is comprised so that it may guide in the left-right direction or the front-back direction with the inclination attached | subjected to 154,168.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the frame stage unit 152 is formed on the lower edge inside the display frame 100 from the ball discharge port 142 of the warp passage 140 that opens toward the inside of the window 100a at the lower left edge of the display frame 100. A lower rolling surface (first rolling surface) 153 extending to the upper left edge of the extended portion 102, and a step higher than the lower rolling surface 153 on the rear side of the lower rolling surface 153. And a middle rolling surface (first rolling surface) 154. Here, the stage 150 has a front region formed by the lower rolling surface 153 and the middle rolling surface 154 of the frame body stage 152, and an upper rolling surface (second rolling surface) provided in the unit stage portion 166. 168 constitutes the rear region.

  The lower rolling surface 153 and the middle rolling surface 154 are concave so that portions corresponding to the upper sides of the start winning ports 70a and 70b provided on the lower side of the lower edge of the display frame 100 are lower than the left and right side edges. (See FIG. 18). The lower rolling surface 153 is formed such that the portion corresponding to the upper side of the start winning ports 70a and 70b (in the embodiment, directly above the starting winning port 70a) is slightly raised from the lowest portion located on the left and right of the portion. Has been. The frame stage part 152 has a wall part that rises at the rear edge of the lower rolling surface 153 (a wall part that connects the inner rolling part 157 and the lower rolling part 157 and the middle rolling part 158 described later). It is formed so as to be parallel to the front edge of the lower rolling surface 153 (see FIG. 30), and the front and rear widths of the lower rolling surface 153 are set to dimensions that allow the flow of one pachinko ball. The frame body stage portion 152 is curved so that the wall portion that rises at the rear edge of the middle rolling surface 154 bulges toward the front side as it goes from the left and right side edges to the portion corresponding to the upper part of the start winning ports 70a and 70b. The front and rear widths of the intermediate rolling surface 154 formed are narrower from the left and right side edges toward the part corresponding to the upper part of the start winning ports 70a and 70b (see FIG. 30). The middle rolling surface 154 is set so that the front-rear width in the vicinity of the portion corresponding to the upper part of the start winning openings 70a, 70b is smaller than one pachinko ball, and the pachinko ball W rolling on the middle rolling surface 154 is started. It is guided to the lower rolling surface 153 side in the vicinity of the portion corresponding to the upper side of the winning openings 70a, 70b.

  The frame body stage portion 152 is attached to the rolling member (component member) 156 provided at the center of the lower edge of the frame body 110 and the rear edge of the rolling member 156, and is formed on the rolling member 156. A rear barrier (wall portion) 160 standing upward from the rear edge of the middle rolling surface 154 corresponding to a part of the middle rolling surface 154 and a right edge of the rolling member 156 are attached to the lower rolling surface 154. A rolling barrier 162 that rises from the right edge of the moving surface 153 and the middle rolling surface 154, a main body inner wall 114 that extends between the rolling member 156 from the lower left edge of the frame main body 110, and the main body inner wall 114 It is basically composed of an internal barrier 164 that rises at the trailing edge (see FIG. 24). The members 114, 156, 160, 162, 164 constituting the frame stage unit 152 are configured to transmit light (transparent in the embodiment), and the lower rolling surface 153 and the middle rolling surface 154 are An uneven shape in which peaks extend in the front-rear direction is a light diffusion structure provided on the lower surface of the corresponding portion of the rolling member 156 and the main body inner wall 114.

  The rolling member 156 is a member formed in a two-step staircase shape, and includes a lower rolling portion 157 whose upper surface is a lower rolling surface 153 and an intermediate rolling portion whose upper surface is a middle rolling surface 154. 158 and a wall portion extending up and down are integrally formed (see FIG. 22 or FIG. 23). The rolling member 156 includes a lower rolling portion 157 between a main body inner wall portion 114 provided on the lower left side portion of the frame main body 110 and an upper left edge portion of the extension portion 102 provided on the lower right portion of the frame main body 110. It is attached to the frame main body 110 so as to be closed. The rolling member 156 has a lower rolling part 157 spaced from the outer wall part 112 of the frame main body 110 and installed at the lower edge of the frame main body 110, and the lower rolling part 157 is wired between the opposing outer wall part 112. It functions as an inner wall that defines the passage 116. The frame stage portion 152 includes an upper surface of the main body inner wall portion 114 extending between the rolling member 156 and the ball discharge port 142 of the warp passage 140, and an upper surface of the lower rolling portion 157 of the rolling member 156. Thus, a lower rolling surface 153 extending in the left-right direction is formed inside the lower edge of the display frame 100 (see FIG. 30). The middle stage rolling surface 154 is located on the upper surface of the middle stage rolling part 158 of the rolling member 156 and the rear side of the main body inner wall part 114 (inner wall barrier 164) and extends to the left side of the rolling member 156. Is constituted by the upper surface of the illumination peripheral portion 348 of the second illumination mechanism 340 (see FIG. 43). In the stage 150, the frame decoration part 120 provided on the frame main body 110 and the frame body translucent parts 130a, 131a, 132a, 133a of the frame main body 110 are above and above the start winning openings 70a, 70b on the lower rolling surface 153. The pachinko ball W is configured to extend slightly above the front edge of the lower rolling surface 153 except for the vicinity, and the pachinko balls W from other than the upper and upper vicinity of the start winning ports 70a, 70b on the lower rolling surface 153 It is difficult to flow down to 40a. Further, in the stage 150, the upper part of the lower rolling surface 153 and the vicinity of the upper part of the starting winning ports 70a and 70b serve as discharge portions from the lower rolling surface 153 to the game area 40a. The rising dimension from the lower rolling surface 153 of the frame decoration part 120 and the frame light transmission parts 130a, 131a, 132a, 133a is set smaller than the diameter of the pachinko sphere W.

  The unit stage portion 166 is provided above the first illumination mechanism (illumination mechanism) 310 in the illumination device 300 installed in the lower side portion 52d of the back unit 50, and the upper surface constitutes the upper rolling surface 168 ( (See FIG. 29 or FIG. 30). The unit stage portion 166 is a plate-like member that can transmit light (transparent in the embodiment), and includes a rolling regulation portion 166a that is formed on the left and right side edges and rises upward from the upper rolling surface 168. Yes. The upper rolling surface 168 is surrounded on the left and right and rear sides by the left and right rolling restricting portions 166a and 166a and the display portion 13a of the symbol display device 13 facing the rear side through the display opening 53. In addition, the unit stage unit 166 is formed with a recess inclined toward the front side in a required range of the central part, and has a spherical shape corresponding to the illumination lens part 336 located in the central part of the first illumination mechanism 310 in the center. A bulge is formed (see FIG. 41 or 43).

(Ball guideway)
The display frame 100 communicates from a ball inlet 171 opened on the rolling surfaces 153 and 154 of the stage 150 to a ball outlet 172 opened above the start winning ports 70a and 70b, and passes by one pachinko ball. Is provided with a so-called royal road route 170 (see FIG. 24). The ball inlet 171 is located above the start winning ports 70a and 70b and is provided so as to open from the middle rolling surface 154 to a part of the lower rolling surface 153, and allows the pachinko balls W to pass one by one. The rolling surfaces 153 and 154 are vertically penetrated so as to have a dimension (a dimension in which two pachinko balls W are not lined up) (see FIG. 27). The ball inlet 171 of the embodiment is formed in a circular shape, and the middle rolling surface 154 is divided into right and left by the ball inlet 171 (see FIG. 30). On the other hand, in the frame stage part 152, only a part of the rear part of the lower rolling surface 153 is cut out as a ball inlet 171, and the lower rolling surface on which the pachinko balls W can roll on the front side of the ball inlet 171. 153 is left. As described above, the stage 150 is provided with the ball inlet 171 that cuts through the rolling surfaces 153 and 154 itself and penetrates up and down, but the ball inlet 171 does not completely divide the rolling surface 153. .

  The ball outlet 172 is located at the center of the lower edge of the display frame 100 and is provided to open to the front surface of the display frame 100 (see FIG. 18). The ball outlet 172 of the embodiment has a circular shape and is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction so as to allow the pachinko balls W to pass one by one. The ball exit 172 is disposed immediately above the start winning openings (winning openings) 70a and 70b. It is discharged to the upper side of the start winning ports 70a and 70b at 40a.

  The ball guide path 170 includes a vertical guide portion 173 that defines a flow path that communicates with the vertical direction from the ball inlet 171, and a lateral direction that extends downstream from the vertical guide portion 173 and intersects the vertical guide portion 173. And a lateral guide portion 174 that defines the existing flow path (see FIG. 27 or FIG. 28). The ball guide path 170 according to the embodiment includes a vertical guide portion 173 that extends in the vertical direction and extends below the ball inlet 171, and extends in the front and rear direction that extends downstream from the vertical guide portion 173. And a side guide portion 174 connected to the channel, and has a substantially L-shaped channel in a side view (see FIG. 27).

  The ball guide path 170 is notched from the middle rolling part 158 of the rolling member 156 to the rear part of the lower rolling part 157, and forms a part of the ball inlet 171 extending from the middle rolling surface 154 to the rear part of the lower rolling surface 153. And the remaining part of the ball inlet 171 is formed by closing the notched portions of the rolling surfaces 153 and 154 with the rear barrier 160 attached to the rear edge of the middle rolling portion 158 of the rolling member 156. (See FIG. 27). The rear barrier 160 is provided with a semi-cylindrical upper vertical passage piece 160a that opens to the front side so as to extend in the vertical direction, and the upper vertical passage piece 160a is provided in the ball inlet 171 provided in the middle rolling portion 158. A rear upper portion of the vertical guide portion 173 is formed surrounding the lower side of the notch portion. On the lower surface of the lower rolling portion 157 of the rolling member 156, a semi-saddle-shaped upper lateral passage piece 157a that opens downward is provided so as to extend in the front-rear direction, and the upper lateral passage piece 157a is provided in the lateral guide portion. The upper end of the upper lateral passage piece 157 a defines the upper part of the ball outlet 172. The upper horizontal passage piece 157a is configured such that the rear edge of the open end that is separated from the left and right is aligned with the front edge of the open end that is separated from the left and right of the upper vertical passage piece 160a. A pair of wiring locking pieces 157b and 157b are formed on the lower rolling portion 157 so as to extend downward (see FIG. 20) with the upper lateral passage piece 157a interposed between the left and right sides. The rolling member 156 is attached to the frame main body 110 by being screwed and fixed to the stage attaching portion 115 via a wiring locking piece 157b extending to the rear side of the wiring passage 116.

  The frame main body 110 is provided with a semi-cylindrical lower lateral passage piece 138 that protrudes rearward from the front wall portion 111 and opens upward (see FIG. 27 or FIG. 28). . The lower lateral passage piece 138 forms a lower portion of the lateral guide portion 174 by aligning an open end separated from the left and right with an open end separated from the left and right of the upper lateral passage piece 157a, and also forms a front end of the lower lateral passage piece 138. Defines the lower part of the ball outlet 172. Further, the lower horizontal passage piece 138 has a wall portion connecting the rear edges of the open ends that are separated from each other in the left-right direction aligned with the lower end of the upper vertical passage piece 160a, and constitutes the lower portion of the vertical guide portion 173.

  The ball guide path 170 has a guide structure for stably guiding the pachinko ball W. The longitudinal guide portion 173 is provided with a guide recess 175 whose opening end facing the flow channel side extends in the vertical direction with a width smaller than the diameter of the pachinko sphere W and is recessed outward from the flow channel side ( (See FIG. 27). The guide recessed portion 175 of the embodiment is provided in the rear barrier 160 so as to correspond to the rear center portion of the vertical guide portion 173 and is formed to be recessed backward. Further, the guide recess 175 is provided continuously from the vertical guide portion 173 at a portion of the rear barrier (wall) 160 that rises upward to the rear side of the ball inlet 171, and has an upper end at the lower rolling surface 153 and the middle rolling surface 154. It is comprised so that it may be located above this ball | bowl inlet 171 opened in (refer FIG. 18). That is, the guide recess 175 extends above the lower rolling surface 153 and opens forward due to a drop between the spherical inlet 171 formed on the middle rolling surface 154 and the spherical inlet 171 formed on the lower rolling surface 153. It extends to the exposed portion of the vertical guide portion 173, and its upper end is located above the middle rolling surface 154.

  The vertical guide portion 173 includes a pair of guide vertical ribs 176 and 176 that are formed on the downstream side of the opening end of the guide concave portion 175 so as to protrude toward the flow channel side. (See FIG. 18, FIG. 27 or FIG. 28). In the embodiment, the guide vertical ribs 176 are provided on the front surface of the rear wall portion of the lower horizontal passage piece 138 in the frame body 110, and the pair of guide vertical ribs 176, 176 have the same pachinko as the left and right opening dimensions of the guide recess 175. The spheres W are spaced apart from each other at a distance smaller than the diameter of the sphere W. Each guide vertical rib 176 is formed so as to protrude from the wall surface toward the flow path side from the upper side to the lower side, and guides the pachinko sphere W toward the flow path side where the front surface of the guide vertical rib 176 is defined by the lateral guide portion. (See FIG. 27). Here, the front surface of each guide vertical rib 176 is inclined so as to protrude toward the flow path side from the side edge on the other guide vertical rib 176 side toward the side edge away from the other guide vertical rib 176 (see FIG. 18), the front surfaces of the guide vertical ribs 176 and 176 are aligned with the spherical surface of the pachinko ball W guided between the pair of guide vertical ribs 176 and 176.

  A pair of first guide lateral ribs (guide lateral ribs) 177 and 177 are provided on the bottom surface of the lateral guide portion 174 so as to be connected to the downstream sides of the pair of guide longitudinal ribs 176 and 176 (FIG. 18, (See FIG. 27 or FIG. 28). In the embodiment, the first guide lateral rib 177 is provided on the upper surface of the lower lateral passage piece 138 in the frame main body 110, and the pair of first guide lateral ribs 177, 177 is the same as the left and right opening dimensions of the guide recess 175. The pachinko balls W are spaced apart from each other at a distance smaller than the diameter of the pachinko ball W. The first guide lateral rib 177 is formed so as to incline downward toward the front, and the front surface of the first guide lateral rib 177 is an inclined surface that guides the pachinko ball W toward the ball outlet 172 (FIG. 27). reference). Here, the front surface of each first guide lateral rib 177 protrudes toward the flow path side from the side edge on the other first guide lateral rib 177 side toward the side edge away from the other first guide lateral rib 177. It is inclined (see FIG. 18), and the front surface of the first guide lateral rib 177 is aligned with the spherical surface of the pachinko sphere W guided between the pair of first guide lateral ribs 177 and 177.

  The lateral guide portion 174 is provided with second guide lateral ribs 178 and 178 which are paired in a symmetrical relationship with the first guide lateral rib 177 (see FIG. 18, FIG. 27 or FIG. 28). Each of the second guide lateral ribs 178 is formed at the upper end of the side edge of the lower lateral passage piece 138 of the frame main body 110 so as to protrude toward the flow path, and is located at the center of the side portion of the lateral guide portion 174.

  As described above, the stage 150 is connected to the game through the warp passage 140 from the ball inlet 141 opened on the left side of the display frame 100 or the lower edge without the flange portion 106 of the display frame 100. Pachinko balls W are introduced from the region 40a. The ball discharge port 142 of the warp passage 140 is configured to open to the lower rolling surface 153 of the stage 150 (see FIG. 25), and the pachinko balls W that have flowed in from the warp passage 140 mainly move the lower rolling surface 153 left and right. It rolls (refer FIG. 24 or FIG. 31). The stage 150 is provided with rolling surfaces 153, 154, 168 in a step-like manner so as to descend from the rear side toward the front side, and is taken in by the rolling surfaces 153, 154, 168 and left and right by the inclination of the rolling surface. The pachinko ball W guided to roll down flows toward the lower rolling surface 153. Then, the stage 150 releases the pachinko ball W from the lower rolling surface 153 to the game area 40a, or the pachinko ball W taken from the middle rolling surface 154 or the lower rolling surface 153 through the ball inlet 171 passes through the ball guide path 170. And discharged from the bulb outlet 172.

  As described above, the pachinko sphere W rolls left and right on the rolling surfaces 153 and 154 and then is taken into the ball entrance 171. Therefore, the pachinko sphere W has a vector in the left-right direction. However, a portion of the pachinko ball W that has fallen from the ball inlet 171 is fitted in a vertically extending groove-shaped guide recess 175 provided in the vertical guide portion 173 that communicates with the vertical guide portion 173. Since movement in the direction intersecting with the flow-down direction (left-right direction) is restricted, it is guided downward in a stable state without shaking in the direction crossing the flow-down direction. The pachinko ball W is transferred from the guide recess 175 to the pair of guide vertical ribs 176 and 176 at the connecting portion between the vertical guide portion 173 and the horizontal guide portion 174, and a part of the pachinko balls W is fitted into the pair of guide vertical ribs 176 and 176. Thus, the movement in the direction (left-right direction) intersecting the flow-down direction in the vertical guide portion 173 is regulated and guided toward the horizontal guide portion 174 in a stable state. Then, the pachinko ball W is transferred from the guide recess 175 to the pair of first guide horizontal ribs 177 and 177 in the horizontal guide portion 174, and a part of the pachinko balls W is fitted into the pair of guide vertical ribs 177 and 177. The movement in the direction intersecting with the flow-down direction at 173 (left-right direction) is regulated, and is guided toward the ball outlet 172 in a stable state, and discharged from the ball outlet 172 to the start winning ports 70a and 70b. .

  The ball guide path 170 has a configuration in which the ball inlet 171 is formed so as to penetrate the rolling surfaces 153 and 154 vertically, so that the rolling surface 153 becomes narrower as the ball inlet 171 becomes larger and falls into the ball inlet 171. The number of balls W increases so that the rolling surface 153 cannot be rolled left and right for a long time, and the pachinko ball W rolling on the rolling surface 153 attracts the player's interest for a long time. I can't. According to the stage 150 of the embodiment, the guide concave portion 175 provided in the vertical guide portion 173 connected to the lower side of the ball inlet 171 and communicated vertically is formed so as to be recessed outward (rear). By providing the guide structure of the pachinko sphere W in the vertical guide portion 173 like a protruding rib, the flow path is not narrowed. That is, the ball inlet 171 communicating with the upper part of the vertical guide portion 173 is not larger than the case where a rib protruding in the flow path is provided as a guide structure, and the ball of the ball guide path 170 is placed on the rolling surface 153 of the stage 150. Even if the inlet 171 is provided, the rolling surface 153 can be secured widely. In addition, in order to secure the rolling surface 153, it is not necessary to increase the front-rear width of the rolling surface 153, and the stage 150 can be made compact.

  Since the guide recess 175 is configured such that the upper end is positioned above the ball inlet 171, a part of the pachinko ball W is fitted into the guide recess 175 from the time when it passes through the ball inlet 171, and the pachinko ball W is stabilized. Can be made to flow down. The vertical guide portion 173 is provided with a pair of guide vertical ribs 176 and 176 that protrude toward the flow path. The guide vertical rib 176 is provided in a lower portion of the vertical guide portion 173 that faces the horizontal guide portion 174. Therefore, the flow down space of the pachinko sphere W is not substantially narrowed by the guide vertical ribs 176 and 176 protruding into the flow path, and the opening size of the ball inlet 171 is not affected.

(About the lighting effect device)
Next, the light emission effect device 200 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the light emitting effect device 200 is installed in an extension unit 102 provided on the lower right side of the display frame 100, and performs a light emitting effect in accordance with the game effect. As illustrated in FIGS. 32 and 33, the light emitting effect device 200 includes a cover member 201, a first light emitting device 202 that directly irradiates light to the cover member 201, and indirectly irradiates the cover member 201 with light. The second light emitting device 203, the reflecting member (reflecting portion) 204 that reflects the light from the second light emitting device 203 toward the cover member 201, and the rear protective cover 205 disposed on the rear side of the reflecting member 204. It basically consists of

(About cover members)
As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, the cover member 201 includes a cover main body 206 made of a synthetic resin having optical transparency as a whole, and a cover installation base 207 disposed on the lower side of the cover main body 206. And is formed in a bowl shape opening rearward. In the cover main body 206, a spherical portion facing forward through the window 100a of the display frame 100 constitutes a light emitting unit 208, and the light emitting unit 208 is in various modes by light from the first and second light emitting devices 202 and 203. It is designed to emit light. A cover wall portion 209 extends rearward from the outer edge of the light emitting portion 208, and the cover main body 206 has a substantially quadrangular shape that opens rearward and downward. As shown in FIG. 36, the rear opening of the cover body 206 has a semicircular shape. A pair of cover body boss receiving portions 206a and 206a are formed on the left and right lower edge portions of the cover body 206. In addition, a decorative portion recess 210 is provided on the front surface of the cover body 206 so as to extend below the light emitting portion 208 so as to extend in the left-right direction. In addition, a cover body positioning hole 210a that opens in the front-rear direction is formed.

  A cover locking piece 211 that protrudes rearward from the rear edge portion is formed on the upper portion of the cover main body 206. Further, as shown in FIG. 36, a pair of insertion portions 212, 212 are formed on the rear surface of the cover body 206 so as to sandwich the cover body positioning hole 210a. As shown in FIG. 37, each insertion portion 212 is formed with an insertion through-hole 212a that is inclined upward from the rear toward the front. A plurality of crack-like light passage holes 213 are formed in the light emitting portion 208 and the cover wall portion 209, and the design of the cover body 206 is enhanced.

  The cover installation base 207 is open upward and rearward, and is formed so that the front side bulges forward in an arc shape, and constitutes the lower part of the cover member 201. The cover installation base 207 is formed with a plurality of cover installation base bosses 207a corresponding to the cover main body boss receiving part 206a so as to protrude rearward. Then, the cover installation base boss 207a is fitted into the cover main body boss receiving part 206a, and a screw is screwed into the cover installation base boss part 207a through the through hole of the cover main body boss receiving part 206a. The base body 207 is screwed to the cover body 206. As shown in FIG. 35, on the cover installation base 207, three plate-like substrate installation plate portions 214, 214, 214 are formed in parallel and spaced apart in the left-right direction. Each board installation plate 214 has an inclined installation surface 214a that inclines upward from the rear toward the front. The three inclined installation surfaces 214a, 214a, and 214a are formed on the same surface, and the inclination angle is set equal to that of the insertion through hole 212a. Further, an installation plate portion boss portion 214b protruding rearward is formed at the rear end portion of the substrate installation plate portion 214 located at the center, and an installation plate portion positioning projection 214c is provided below the installation plate portion boss portion 214b. Is formed to protrude rearward.

  On the front part of the cover installation base 207, an effect decoration part (decoration part) 232 is formed so as to protrude upward. The effect decorative portion 232 is a decorative member that does not transmit light, and the effect decorative portion 232 fits into the decorative portion recess 210 in a state where the cover installation base 207 is attached to the cover main body 206. The same spherical surface as that of the light emitting unit 208 is formed. Note that a cover installation base body positioning projection 207b is formed on the rear surface of the effect decoration portion 232 so as to protrude rearward. When the cover installation base body 207 is attached to the cover body 206, the cover installation base body positioning projection 207b is The cover installation base 207 is configured to be positioned with respect to the cover main body 206 by being inserted into the positioning hole 210a.

(About reflective members)
As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the reflection member 204 is configured so as to reflect light effectively by being plated. The reflecting member 204 basically includes a substantially semicircular reflecting portion main body 215 that closes the rear opening of the cover member 201, and a protruding portion 216 that protrudes forward from the front surface of the reflecting portion main body 215. A pair of reflecting member boss receiving portions 215a and 215a are recessed on the front surface of the reflecting portion main body 215 corresponding to the cover setting base boss portion 207a of the cover setting base 207. In addition, a reflection member locking hole 215 b that opens in the front-rear direction is formed in the upper part of the reflection portion main body 215 corresponding to the cover locking piece 211 of the cover main body 206. Then, the cover locking piece 211 is inserted into the reflecting member locking hole 215b, and the rear end portion of the cover installation base boss portion 207a is fitted to the reflecting member boss receiving portion 215a, so that the reflecting member boss receiving portion 215a The reflective member 204 is screwed to the cover member 201 by screwing a screw into the cover installation base boss 207a through the through hole. In a state where the reflecting member 204 is attached to the cover member 201, the locking portion of the cover locking piece 211 protrudes rearward of the reflecting portion main body 215 via the reflecting member locking hole 215b, and the upper edge of the reflecting member locking hole 215b. It is designed to be locked to the part.

  A plurality of reflecting member positioning protrusions 215c protruding rearward are formed on the rear surface of the reflecting portion main body 215, and a pair of reflecting member screw holes 215d and 215d opening rearward are formed apart from each other. In addition, effect attachment portions 217 and 217 are formed so as to protrude outward from the left and right outer edge portions of the reflection portion main body 215, and an effect boss receiving portion 217a is recessed in front of each effect attachment portion 217. ing. Further, an effect cylindrical mounting portion 233 is formed on the outer edge portion of the reflecting member 204 at a position biased to the left from the central portion in the left-right direction, and an effect boss receiving portion is provided in front of the effect cylindrical mounting portion 233. 217a is recessed. And the boss receiving part 217a for production | presentation corresponding to the rear-end part of the boss | hub part provided in the display frame 100 is fitted, and the boss part of the display frame 100 through the through-hole of this boss receiving part 217a for production | presentation The reflection member 204 (the light emitting effect device 200) is screwed to the extended portion 102 of the display frame body 100 by screwing in the screw. Further, the right effect mounting portion 217 is formed with a reflection member ground protrusion 217b that protrudes rearward from the rear surface, and is reflected when the reflection member 204 (light emission effect device 200) is attached to the display frame 100. The member grounding protrusion 217 b comes into contact with the horizontal ornament grounding piece 78 provided on the right inner surface of the back unit 50, and the display frame 100 and the light emitting effect device 200 are grounded via the horizontal ornament grounding piece 78. Note that a pair of reflecting member positioning holes 215e and 215e that are open in the front-rear direction are formed in the reflecting portion main body 215 so as to be separated from each other in the left-right direction.

  The protrusion 216 has a semicircular shape that is substantially aligned with the rear opening of the cover main body 206 when viewed from the front, and when the reflecting member 204 is attached to the cover member 201, the protrusion 216 opens the rear opening of the cover main body 206. It is designed to fit in. On the front surface of the projecting portion 216, a reflecting surface 219 composed of a plurality of rectangular small reflecting portions 218 aligned vertically and horizontally is formed. The reflecting surface 219 has a spherical shape with the lowermost center in the left-right direction recessed most rearward, and is configured to reflect light from the second light emitting device 203 toward the light emitting unit 208. The outer shape of the reflecting surface 219 is substantially the same as that of the light emitting unit 208 in a front view, and the reflecting surface 219 is located behind the light emitting unit 208 in a state where the cover member 201 and the reflecting member 204 are assembled (FIG. 37). reference). In the left-right direction, the reflective surface 219 is formed by continuously arranging the rectangular small reflecting portions 218 to form a smooth curved surface, while in the vertical direction, the rectangular small reflecting portions 218 are arranged in a step shape and are discontinuous. A curved surface is formed. As described above, in the vertical direction, the reflection surface 219 is formed as a discontinuous curved surface so that the light irradiated on the reflection surface 219 can be reflected while being diffused. In the reflecting member 204, a plurality of light passing holes 220 penetrating the reflecting portion main body 215 and the protruding portion 216 in the front-rear direction are formed side by side in the vertical and horizontal directions. The light passage hole 220 has an opening size on the rear side (first light emitting device 202 side) set larger than that on the front side (light emitting unit 208 side). As shown in FIG. 40, the light passage hole 220 located on the upper right side is located behind the light passage hole 213 and can be viewed from the front.

(About the first light-emitting device)
The first light emitting device 202 is controlled to emit light by the overall control device 37 and directly irradiates the light emitting unit 208 with light. The first light emitting device 202 includes a first light emitting substrate 221 disposed on the rear surface of the reflecting member 204 and a plurality of first light emitting elements (first light emitters) 222 disposed on the front surface of the first light emitting substrate 221. It consists of and. The first light emitting substrate 221 is a plate member having an upper edge formed in an arc shape, and the first light emitting element 222 is disposed in the upper half region of the first light emitting substrate 221. The region of the first light emitting substrate 221 where the first light emitting element 222 is disposed is a portion corresponding to the light emitting unit 208 in a state where the first light emitting substrate 221 is attached to the rear surface of the reflecting member 204. It can cover almost the whole. In the first light emitting substrate 221, a plurality of first substrate through holes 221a corresponding to the reflecting member screw holes 215d and a plurality of first substrate positioning holes 221b corresponding to the reflecting member positioning protrusions 215c are opened in the front-rear direction, respectively. Is formed. Further, a first light emitting board connector portion 221c is provided on the rear surface of the first light emitting board 221 so as to protrude rearward, and the frame illumination wiring H1 or the light emitting wiring H2 is connected to the first light emitting board connector portion 221c. (See FIG. 37).

  The first light emitting element 222 disposed on the front surface of the first light emitting substrate 221 is configured to irradiate light in a direction orthogonal to the first light emitting substrate 221. That is, each first light emitting element 222 irradiates light forward with the first light emitting substrate 221 attached to the reflecting member 204. As shown in FIG. 37, each first light emitting element 222 faces the rear opening of the light passage hole 220 with the first light emitting substrate 221 attached to the reflecting member 204, and the first light emitting element The light emitted from the element 222 passes through the light passage hole 220 and is emitted to the light emitting unit 208. That is, the light passage hole 220 is formed in the reflecting member 204 corresponding to each first light emitting element 222, and the directivity is enhanced by the light of the first light emitting element 222 passing through the light passage hole ss. Clear light reaches the light emitting unit 208. The first light emitting elements 222 can be turned on / off all at once by the overall control device 37, or can be turned on / off sequentially in the left-right direction or the up-down direction to emit light in various light emission patterns. Yes.

(About the second light emitting device)
The second light emitting device 203 is controlled to emit light independently of the first light emitting device 202 by the overall control device 37, and causes the light emitting unit 208 to emit light indirectly. The second light emitting device 203 includes a second light emitting substrate 223 and a plurality of second light emitting elements (second light emitters) 224 disposed on the upper surface of the second light emitting substrate 223, and is inclined to the cover member 201. It is arranged with the posture. The second light emitting substrate 223 has a shape that is wide in the left-right direction, and the size of the second light emitting substrate 223 in the left-right direction is set to be substantially equal to that of the first light-emitting substrate 221. Further, the dimension in the front-rear direction of the second light-emitting substrate 223 (see L in FIG. 33) is set smaller than the dimension in the vertical direction of the first light-emitting substrate 221. That is, the area of the second light emitting substrate 223 is smaller than that of the first light emitting substrate 221, and the installation area of the second light emitting element 224 in the second light emitting substrate 223 is larger than the installation area of the first light emitting element 222 in the first light emitting substrate 221. It is narrower.

  On the second light emitting substrate 223, a pair of substrate insertion pieces 225, 225 protruding forward from the front edge is formed corresponding to the substrate insertion portions 212, 212 of the cover body 206. The second light emitting substrate 223 is attached to the substrate installation plate portion 214 of the cover member 201 via the substrate fixing member 226. The substrate fixing member 226 is a pentagonal plate-like piece formed at an acute angle on the lower side, and a fixing member boss corresponding to the installation plate portion boss portion 214b of the cover installation base 207 is formed on the front surface of the substrate fixing member 226. The receiving part 226a is recessed. A fixing member positioning hole 226b that opens in the front-rear direction is formed below the fixing member boss receiving portion 226a corresponding to the installation plate portion positioning protrusion 214c of the cover installation base 207. Further, the substrate fixing member 226 is formed with a substrate pressing piece 227 extending obliquely upward and forward from the upper edge portion. Then, the lower surface of the second light emitting substrate 223 is brought into contact with the inclined installation surfaces 214a, 214a, 214a of the three substrate installation plate portions 214, 214, and the substrate insertion pieces 225, 225 are inserted through the substrate insertion portions 212, 212. The second light emitting substrate 223 is installed in the substrate installation plate portion 214 by being inserted into the holes 212a and 212a. Further, the installation plate portion positioning projection 214c is fitted into the fixing member positioning hole 226b of the substrate fixing member 226, and the rear end portion of the installation plate portion boss portion 214b is fitted into the fixing member boss receiving portion 226a. The board fixing member 226 is screwed to the cover installation base 207 by screwing the screw into the installation plate boss 214b through the through hole of the receiving part 226a. As a result, as shown in FIG. 37, the rear end side of the second light emitting substrate 223 is sandwiched between the inclined installation surface 214a of the central substrate installation plate 214 and the substrate pressing piece 227, and the second light emitting substrate 223 is The cover member 201 is attached.

  Here, in a state where the second light emitting device 203 is installed on the cover member 201, the second light emitting substrate 223 is inclined downward from the front to the rear, and the second light emitting element 224 is directed toward the reflecting surface 219. ing. In addition, the second light emitting substrate 223 is located on the obliquely lower front side of the reflecting surface 219 and below the light passage holes 220 arranged at the lowest position. That is, the second light emitting device 203 is provided at a position outside the region through which the light from the first light emitting device 202 passes, so that the second light emitting device 203 does not interfere with the light of the first light emitting device 202. . Further, the second light emitting substrate 223 is located behind the effect decoration portion 232 and is covered with the effect decoration portion 232 from the front side. In other words, the second light emitting device 203 is hidden from the front side by the effect decorative portion 232 so that the second light emitting device 203 cannot be visually recognized through the transparent cover member 201. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second light emitting device 203 from being seen from the player side and to prevent the game from being lost.

  The second light emitting element 224 disposed on the front surface of the second light emitting substrate 223 emits light in a direction orthogonal to the second light emitting substrate 223. That is, each of the second light emitting elements 224 emits light obliquely upward to the rear (a direction different from that of the light emitting unit 208), and irradiates the reflection surface 219 with light obliquely. As shown in FIG. 37, the light emitted from the second light emitting element 224 is reflected forward while being diffused by the reflecting surface 219, and reaches the light emitting unit 208. In other words, the light from the second light emitting device 203 is reflected by the reflecting surface 219 so that the entire light emitting unit 208 is irradiated with the diffused light and the entire light emitting unit 208 is illuminated.

  Here, the second light-emitting substrate 223 is inclined so that the second light-emitting element 224 emits light obliquely to the reflection surface 219, so that the installation region of the second light-emitting element 224 is the reflection surface 219. Despite being narrower than the area, the light of the second light emitting device 203 can reach substantially the entire reflecting surface 219. Therefore, the size of the second light emitting device 203 can be made compact compared to the reflecting surface 219, the degree of freedom of installation of the second light emitting device 203 is improved, and the second light emitting device 203 is installed in a narrow space in the cover member 201. Can be installed. The plurality of second light emitting elements 224 can be turned on / off all at once by the overall control device 37, or can be turned on / off in order in the left-right direction in the same manner as the first light emitting elements 222. It is comprised so that light can be emitted.

(About rear protective cover)
The rear protective cover 205 is disposed on the rear side of the reflecting member 204 and accommodates and protects the first light emitting device 202. The rear protective cover 205 is configured to open forward from the rear protective cover main body 228 and the rear protective cover wall 229 extending forward from the peripheral edge of the rear protective cover main body 228. On the front surface of the rear protective cover main body 228, a pair of rear protective cover positioning protrusions 228a and 228a corresponding to the reflecting member positioning holes 215e of the reflecting member 204 are formed to protrude forward. Further, the rear protective cover 205 is formed with a pair of rear protective cover through holes 228b and 228b corresponding to the first substrate through holes 221a of the first light emitting substrate 221, which are opened in the front-rear direction. Then, the reflecting member positioning protrusion 215 c is fitted into the first substrate positioning hole 221 b of the first light emitting substrate 221, and the first light emitting substrate 221 is positioned on the rear surface of the reflecting portion main body 215. Further, the rear protective cover positioning protrusion 228a is fitted into the reflecting member positioning hole 215e, and the rear protective cover 205 is set so as to cover the first light emitting device 202 from the rear. Then, the rear protective cover 205 together with the first light emitting substrate 221 is screwed into the reflection member screw hole 215d of the reflector main body 215 through the rear cover cover through hole 228b aligned with the first substrate through hole 221a. It is screwed to the rear surface of the reflector main body 215 (reflecting member 204). As described above, since the reflecting member 204 can also be used as an installation member for the first light emitting device 202, a separate member for installing the first light emitting device 202 is not required, and the number of components can be reduced.

  The rear protective cover main body 228 is formed with a connector rectangular opening 230 that opens in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIG. 37, the connector light-emitting rectangular opening 230 has a first light-emitting board connector of the first light-emitting device 202. Part 221c is facing. The frame illumination wiring H1 and the light emission wiring H2 connected to the first light emitting board connector portion 221c are drawn out to the rear side of the rear protective cover body 228 through the connector rectangular opening 230. The upper side rear protective cover wall 229 has a locking piece escape portion 231 recessed from the front end to the rear. A cover locking piece 211 of the cover member 201 that protrudes rearward through the reflection member locking hole 215b of the reflection member 204 faces the locking piece relief portion 231. The cover locking piece 211 Prevents the rear protective cover wall 229 from interfering.

(About the lighting effect of the lighting effect device)
Next, the light emission effect of the light emission effect device 200 will be described below. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the overall control device 37 sends a control signal to the first light emitting device 202 and the second light emitting device 203 to cause both the light emitting devices 202 and 203 to emit light. First, the case where the first and second light emitting devices 202 and 203 are caused to emit light simultaneously will be described. As for the first light emitting device 202, the first light emitting elements 222 are turned on all at once and irradiate light forward. Then, the light of the first light emitting element 222 passes through the reflecting member 204 through the light passage hole 220 provided corresponding to each first light emitting element 222. At this time, the directivity of the light of the first light emitting element 222 is strengthened while passing through the light passage hole 220. The light of the first light emitting element 222 that has passed through the light passage hole 220 reaches the light emitting unit 208 and causes the light emitting unit 208 to emit light clearly. That is, the light of the first light emitting element 222 whose directivity has been strengthened by the light passage hole 220 is directly applied to the light emitting unit 208, and thus the light emitting unit 208 emits light with a clear outline.

  On the other hand, for the second light emitting device 203, the second light emitting elements 224 are turned on all at once and irradiate light obliquely upward rearward. That is, as shown in FIG. 37, the second light emitting device 203 does not directly irradiate the light emitting unit 208 but irradiates the reflecting surface 219 of the reflecting member 204 with light. The light of the second light emitting device 203 that has reached the reflecting surface 219 is reflected toward the light emitting unit 208 while being diffused, and the light reaches almost the entire light emitting unit 208. That is, the light of the second light emitting device 203 is reflected and diffused by the reflecting surface 219, so that the entire light emitting unit 208 is caused to emit light with a dim light. Accordingly, it is possible to add light intensity (contrast) to the light emitting unit 208 by adding clear light from the first light emitting device 202 after the light emitting unit 208 by the second light emitting device 203 emits light as a whole. It becomes. Thereby, the light emission part 208 can be light-emitted with various light emission patterns, and it becomes possible to perform an effective light emission effect. In addition, since the directivity of the light from the first light emitting device 202 is improved by passing through the light passage hole 220, the light emitting unit 208 is totally reflected by the light from the second light emitting device 203 reflected by the reflecting surface 219. Even in the state where the light is emitted, the player can visually recognize the clear light of the first light emitting device 202.

  Here, by forming the light passage hole 213 in the cover member 201, it is possible to produce a light emission effect such that light leaks from the light passage hole 213, and the production effect is further enhanced. In addition, the strong light of the first light emitting device 202 leaks out from the light passage hole 220 located behind the light passage hole 213, so that the player can enjoy a light emission effect with impact. By the way, the first light emitting device 202 and the second light emitting device 203 are configured not only to turn on and off the light emitting elements all at once by the overall control device 37 but also to emit light in various modes. For example, when light emission control is performed so that the first light emitting elements 222 of the first light emitting device 202 are sequentially turned on and off for each column, the second light emitting device 203 causes the light emitting unit 208 to emit light entirely. Thus, it is possible to produce a light emission effect such that clear light from the first light emitting device 202 travels left and right through the light emitting unit 208. In addition, when the second light emitting elements 224 of the second light emitting device 203 are sequentially turned on / off for each column, the entire light emitting unit 208 can be flashed in a flash shape, and a flashy lighting effect with impact can be achieved. Can be done.

(Lighting device)
The game board 40 includes a lighting device 300 that emits light around the rolling surface 168 of the stage 150 and the start winning ports 70a and 70b and the special winning port 74a arranged on the lower side of the stage 150. It is provided on the lower side 52d (see FIG. 7, FIG. 14 or FIG. 16). The lighting device 300 includes a first lighting mechanism 310 that mainly emits light on the rolling surface 168 of the stage 150, and a second lighting mechanism 340 that mainly emits light around the start winning ports 70a and 70b and the special winning port 74a. It has. In the lighting device 300, the constituent members of the first lighting mechanism 310 and the constituent members of the second lighting mechanism 340 are provided in the lighting base member (installation portion) 302, and the lighting base member 302 is used as a common base to the back unit 50. Thus, it can be handled as a single unit (see FIGS. 41 to 44).

(First lighting mechanism)
The first illumination mechanism 310 is disposed below the unit stage portion 166 whose upper surface is the upper rolling surface 168, and irradiates light upward and passes through a region having light transmittance of the unit stage portion 166. The upper rolling surface 168 is configured to emit light (see FIGS. 45 to 47). Since the unit stage portion 166 of the embodiment is entirely transparent, the upper rolling surface 168 emits light corresponding to an illumination lens portion (light emitting portion) 336 of an illumination translucent member 334 described later of the first illumination mechanism 310. Directed.

  The first illumination mechanism 310 is provided on the illumination base member 302 and the illumination decoration member (decoration part) 316 that covers the front side of the first illumination substrate (illumination substrate) 312 and forms the front surface of the first illumination mechanism 310. A lighting housing (housing) 303 for housing the first lighting board 312 between the lighting decoration member 316 attached to the lighting base member 302, and the first lighting mechanism 312 provided above the first lighting board 312; The outline is basically constituted by the illumination cover member 322 constituting the upper surface of 310 (see FIG. 48 or 49). The first illumination mechanism 310 includes an illumination partition member (partition portion) 326 that closes the rear side of the convex portion 317 provided on the illumination decoration member 316, and the first illumination board 312 and the illumination cover member 322. An illumination partition member (partition unit) 330 provided, and an illumination translucent member 334 provided between the illumination partition member 330 and the illumination cover member 322 and covering the illumination opening 324 provided in the illumination cover member 322 I have. That is, the upper cover portion of the first illumination mechanism 310 is configured by the illumination cover member 322 and the illumination translucent member 334 that blocks the illumination opening 324 of the illumination cover member 322.

  The first lighting board 312 includes a plurality of LEDs 313 as an illuminating body on the upper surface, and a socket 314 with a connection opening facing rearward at a position biased rearward in the central portion of the lower surface in the left-right direction (see FIG. 47-FIG. 48). The first illumination board 312 is formed such that the front edge is curved in accordance with the inner surface of the illumination decoration member 316 that is curved forward so that the center part is convex, and the middle side compared to the left and right side end parts. The rear edge of the portion is formed so as to protrude rearward (see FIG. 48). In addition, a plurality of LEDs 313 are arranged on the first illumination board 312 along the front edge so as to correspond to the convex portion 317 of the illumination decoration member 316 and the illumination opening of the illumination cover member 322 installed above. The LED 313 is installed at a position corresponding to the lower side of the H.324.

  The lighting decoration member 316 is provided with a plurality of convex portions 317 simulating fangs on the upper and lower sides (see FIGS. 41, 45, 46, 48, and 49). In the illumination decoration member 316 of the embodiment, the plurality of convex portions 317 are arranged in a bilaterally symmetrical relationship across the center located above the start winning ports 70a and 70b. The illumination decoration member 316 is located on the rear side of the rear barrier 160 in the frame body stage 152, rises to the rear side of the middle rolling surface 154, and faces the middle rolling surface 154 and the upper rolling surface 168. (See FIG. 31). In other words, the illumination decoration member 316 has a body portion visible from the front side through the transparent rear barrier 160, and a convex portion 317 protrudes from the upper edge of the rear barrier 160 and is visible from the front side. The illumination decoration member 316 is configured such that the main body portion is impermeable to light, and at least the upper portion of the convex portion 317 is configured to transmit light, and the first illumination substrate 312 corresponds to the lower portion of the convex portion 317. The corresponding convex portion 317 emits light individually by the light emission of the LED 313 disposed on the front edge (see FIG. 47). The illumination decoration member 316 is configured such that the main body portion cannot transmit light by painting.

  The lighting decoration member 316 is a pair of edge wall portions 318 extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the plate-like portion that forms the front surface and a plate-like portion that covers the front side of the first lighting substrate 312 and is spaced apart from each other. Illumination holding pieces (holding pieces) 319 and 320 (see FIG. 47 or FIG. 49). The illumination decoration member 316 is provided with a plurality of pairs of illumination sandwiching pieces 319 and 320 (two pairs in the embodiment) spaced apart from each other in the left and right pairs. In the embodiment, the illumination sandwiching pieces 319 and 320 that form a pair vertically. Are arranged in a symmetrical relationship (see FIG. 49). The upper and lower illumination clamping pieces 319 are formed so as to extend rearward from the rear surface of the plate-like portion covering the front side of the first illumination substrate 312. The two upper and lower illumination clamping pieces 319 and 320 forming a pair are arranged at positions shifted left and right, and an upper illumination clamping piece (hereinafter referred to as a lower illumination clamping piece) 319 (hereinafter referred to as a lower illumination clamping piece) 319. (Referred to as an upper illumination clamping piece) 320 is arranged on the center side in the left-right direction. The vertical distance between the upper surface of the lower illumination clamping piece 319 and the lower surface of the upper illumination clamping piece 320 is set equal to or slightly larger than the plate thickness of the first illumination board 312.

  The lower illumination pinching piece 319 is formed so that the plate surface extends in the up-down direction, and the protruding dimension is set to be smaller than the width in the up-down direction so that it is difficult to elastically deform in the up-down direction. (See FIG. 47 or FIG. 49). On the other hand, the upper illumination pinching piece 320 is formed in a thin piece shape with the plate surface extending in the left-right direction, and has a protruding dimension larger than the width in the left-right direction, and is configured to be elastically deformable in the up-down direction. Has been. The upper illumination clamping piece 320 protrudes rearward from the lower illumination clamping piece 319 (see FIG. 47). The illumination decoration member 316 is configured to hold the front end portion of the first illumination board 312 in the thickness direction between the illumination sandwiching pieces 319 and 320 that form a pair of upper and lower sides. As described above, the front end portion of the first illumination board 312 is held by the upper and lower illumination clamping pieces 319 and 320, so that the position thereof is vertically regulated.

  In the illumination decoration member 316, an edge wall portion 318 extending rearward to the outer peripheral edge of the plate-like portion extends horizontally at the same height as the upper surface of the lower illumination holding piece 319 on the left and right sides. Thus, it is formed in a step shape (see FIG. 47 or FIG. 49). When the first illumination mechanism 310 holds the front end portion of the first illumination board 312 with the upper and lower illumination clamping pieces 319 and 320, the first illumination mechanism 310 is placed on the horizontal portion of the illumination decoration member 316 (hereinafter referred to as an illumination placement portion 318 a). The side part of the 1st illumination board 312 is mounted (refer FIG. 47). In other words, in the embodiment, the first illumination board 312 is supported not only by the two sets of upper and lower illumination clamping pieces 319 and 320 but also by the left and right illumination placement portions 318a and 318a.

  The illumination partition member 326 is formed in a shape corresponding to the rear surface shape of the illumination decoration member 316 above the first illumination substrate 312 held between the upper and lower illumination clamping pieces 319 and 320 (see FIG. 49). ). The illumination partition member 326 is fitted with a convex portion formed in accordance with the convex portion 317 inside an edge wall portion 318 erected on the outer peripheral edge of the convex portion 317, and a gap is formed between the rear surface of the illumination decoration member 316. And is fixed to the lighting decoration member 316 with screws. At this time, the illumination partition member 326 sandwiches the LED 313 provided at the front end portion of the first illumination board 312 between the illumination decoration member 316 and the LED 313 is located between the convex portion 317 and the illumination partition member 326. (See FIG. 47). The illumination partition member 326 includes sandwiching piece recesses 327 and 327 formed in a concave shape in accordance with the left and right upper illumination sandwiching pieces 320 (see FIG. 49). The illumination partition member 326 is mounted on the upper surfaces of the upper illumination sandwiching pieces 320 and 320 by fitting the sandwiching piece recesses 327 and 327 to the upper illumination sandwiching pieces 327 and 327. As described above, the illumination partition member 326 is supported by the upper illumination sandwiching pieces 320 and 320, and is positioned right and left under the fitting of the upper illumination sandwiching piece 320 and the sandwiching piece recess 327.

  The illumination partition member 326 includes an illumination holding piece (holding piece) 328 extending downward from the lower end portion (see FIG. 48 or FIG. 49). The illumination partition member 326 is provided with a pair of illumination holding pieces 328 and 328 spaced apart on the left and right sides, corresponding to the left and right side rear edges having a narrow front and rear width in the first illumination board 312. ing. The lighting partition member 326 holds the rear end of the first lighting board 312 held at the front end by the upper and lower lighting holding pieces 319 and 320 between the rear face of the lighting decoration member 316 by the lighting holding pieces 328 and 328. The position of the first illumination board 312 is regulated forward and backward. Here, the spacing between the left and right illumination holding pieces 328 and 328 is set to be the same as or slightly larger than the left and right width of the inner side portion of the first illumination board 312 extending rearward as compared to the left and right side portions. . That is, the illumination partition member 326 holds the left and right illumination holding pieces 328 and 328 so that the inner side portion of the first illumination board 312 is sandwiched between the left and right illumination holding pieces 328 and 328 so as to restrict the position to the left and right.

  The illumination cover member 322 is formed in a substantially tray shape that is open downward, and is configured so as not to transmit light (see FIGS. 47 to 49). The illumination cover member 322 of the embodiment is configured such that the entire surface is plated with a conductive metal, and the surface can reflect light. The illumination cover member 322 is provided with a plurality of illumination openings 324 penetrating up and down (see FIG. 47 or FIG. 48). In the illumination cover member 322, a plurality of illumination openings 324 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, a circular illumination opening 324 is formed at the center in the left-right direction, and a triangle ( Illumination openings 324 and 324 having equilateral triangles in the embodiment are provided. Two triangular illumination openings 324 and 324 are provided on each side of the illumination cover member 322 sandwiching the circular illumination opening 324, and the top of the triangular illumination opening 324 is located on the central illumination opening 324 side. .

  The illumination translucent member 334 has an outer shape that matches the internal shape of the substantially tray-shaped illumination cover member 322 that opens downward, and is fitted and attached inside the illumination cover member 322 (see FIG. 47). The illumination translucent member 334 is a transparent member, and includes an illumination lens portion 336 formed on the upper surface so as to match the illumination opening 324 of the illumination cover member 322 (see FIG. 48 or FIG. 49). That is, the illumination translucent member 334 is provided with a plurality of illumination lens portions 336 spaced apart from each other on the left and right, and the illumination lens portion 336 located at the center of the illumination translucent member 334 has a spherical shape like a face down. An illumination lens portion 336 that is formed in a part of the shape and is located on the side of the illumination translucent member 334 is formed in a triangular shape having a flat upper surface. Note that the illumination lens unit 336 has a light diffusion structure made of fine embossing on the surface.

  In the first illumination mechanism 310, an LED 313 is installed on the upper surface of the first illumination substrate 312 corresponding to the lower side of the illumination lens portion 336 (see FIG. 47). That is, on the first illumination board 312, at least one LED 313 is installed corresponding to the central illumination lens unit 336, and at least one LED 313 is installed corresponding to each of the side illumination lens units 336. . Here, the first illumination board 312 is provided with one LED 313 corresponding to each convex portion 317 except for the convex portions 317 located on the left and right outermost sides, and the central illumination lens portion. Four LEDs 313 arranged in a rectangular shape corresponding to 336 are installed, and two LEDs 313 arranged in the left-right direction are installed corresponding to each of the side illumination lens portions 336 (FIG. 48 or FIG. 49). reference).

  The illumination partition member 330 is a frame-like member configured by partition walls 332 that divide between the LEDs 313 arranged corresponding to the illumination lens portions 336 (see FIG. 48 or FIG. 49). The illumination partition member 330 surrounds the periphery of the LED 313 corresponding to the central illumination lens portion 336 with a partition wall 332, and the periphery of the LED 313 corresponding to the left and right side illumination lens portions 336 adjacent to the central illumination lens portion 336. Is surrounded by a partition wall 332 to separate the central LED 313 and the side LEDs 313 adjacent to the central LED 313. The LED 313 corresponding to the outermost illumination lens portion 336 located on the outermost side is disposed outside the illumination partition member 330, and the side illumination lens located on the inner side by the partition wall 332 that forms the outline of the illumination partition member 330. The LED 313 corresponding to the part 336 is separated. The illumination partition member 330 is formed such that a partition wall 332 surrounding the LED 313 corresponding to the central illumination lens portion 336 defines a space communicating vertically. Similarly, the illumination partition member 330 is formed such that a partition wall 332 surrounding the LED 313 corresponding to the illumination lens portions 336 on the left and right sides adjacent to the central illumination lens portion 336 defines a space communicating vertically. (See FIG. 47). The illumination partition member 330 is installed such that the lower end of the partition wall 332 is separated from the upper surface of the first illumination substrate 312.

  The first illumination mechanism 310 inserts a cover fixing boss (not shown) that protrudes downward on the lower surface of the unit stage portion 166 into the illumination cover member 322 and the illumination translucent member 334 from above, and the illumination cover member 322. The unit stage 166, the illumination cover member 322, and the illumination translucent member 334 are assembled to each other by screwing and fixing to the cover fixing boss facing the lower surface of the illumination translucent member 334 with the illumination translucent member 334 interposed therebetween. . The first illumination mechanism 310 is placed on the upper surface of the illumination partition member 330, and the illumination translucent member 334 is screwed and fixed from below, and the illumination attachment is formed so as to extend to the left and right on the outer part of the partition wall 332, respectively. The lighting partition member 330 is attached to the lighting partition member 326 by abutting the pieces 333 and 333 against the rear surface of the lighting partition member 326 and screwing and fixing them from the rear side. That is, the illumination partition member 330 can be attached to the illumination partition member 326 together with the unit stage unit 166, the illumination cover member 322, and the illumination translucent member 334 attached on the upper side. The first illumination mechanism 310 is directly or indirectly with respect to the first illumination board 312, the illumination partition member 326 and the illumination partition member 330, the unit stage unit 166, the illumination cover member 322, and the illumination translucent member 334. The lighting decoration member 316 is assembled as a unit so that it can be handled as a unit.

  The illumination base member 302 includes an installation plate-like portion 302a to be attached to members constituting the second illumination mechanism 340, a peripheral wall portion 302b extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the installation plate-like portion 302a, and an upper portion thereof. And an illumination accommodating portion 303 in which the first illumination substrate 312 of the first illumination mechanism 310 is accommodated (see FIG. 48 or FIG. 49). The illumination base member 302 of the embodiment is a transparent synthetic resin molded product. The illumination accommodating portion 303 is formed by denting the middle in the left-right direction of the peripheral wall portion 302b extending above the illumination base member 302 downward (see FIG. 50, FIG. 51 or FIG. 52). The first illumination mechanism 310 includes an accommodation placement portion (placement portion) configured by the peripheral wall portion 302b that forms the bottom of the illumination accommodation portion 303 when the illumination decoration member 316 is attached to the front surface of the installation plate-like portion 302a. The rear portion of the first illumination board 312 is supported by 303a (see FIG. 47).

  The rear surface of the lighting housing portion 303 is closed by a housing rear wall portion 303b that rises from the rear edge of the housing placement portion 303a across the rear edge of the peripheral wall portion 302b that forms the side surface of the lighting housing portion 303 that faces the left and right. (See FIG. 50 or FIG. 51). The housing rear wall 303b has an upper end set lower than the upper surface of the lighting base member 302, and the rear portion of the lighting cover member 322 is accommodated above the housing rear wall 303b (see FIG. 42 or FIG. 47). In the first illumination mechanism 310, the first illumination board 312, the illumination partition member 330, the illumination translucent member 334, and the illumination cover member 322 are accommodated in the illumination accommodation unit 303, and the upper surface of the illumination cover member 322 is the illumination base member 302. The top surface and the height are aligned (see FIG. 42). The illumination partition member 330 is provided with a projection 331 on the rear surface, and the projection 331 fits into the holding through hole 303c provided in the housing rear wall 303b, so that the rear portion of the illumination partition member 330 housed in the illumination housing portion 303 is It is supported by the rear wall portion 303b (see FIG. 47 or FIG. 48).

  In the illumination accommodating portion 303, an illumination wiring passage 304 is formed through the central portion in the left-right direction from the rear portion of the accommodating placement portion 303a to the lower portion of the accommodating rear wall portion 303b (FIGS. 50, 51, and 52). . The illumination wiring passage 304 is overlapped with the front side of the central wiring opening 85 formed in the lower side portion 52d of the back unit 50 between the attachment area of the symbol display device 13 and the board installation portion 60. Yes. In the first illumination mechanism 310, the socket 314 of the first illumination board 312 faces the illumination wiring passage 304, and the first illumination wiring H6 connected to the socket 314 through the illumination wiring passage 304 and the central wiring opening 85 is back. It is pulled out to the rear side of the unit 50 (see FIG. 9). The first illumination mechanism 310 has a stage ground wire (ground wire) E2 connected to the rear surface of the illumination cover member 322, so that the static electricity charged around the stage 150 can be prevented from affecting the first illumination substrate 312. It is removed via the stage ground wire E2. The stage ground wire E2 is drawn to the rear side of the back unit 50 through the illumination wiring passage 304 and the central wiring opening 85 together with the first illumination wiring H6 (see FIG. 10).

  In the first illumination mechanism 310, the front portion of the first illumination substrate 312 is gripped by the upper and lower illumination sandwiching pieces 319 and 320 of the illumination decoration member 316, and the rear portion is supported by the accommodation mounting portion 303 a of the illumination accommodation portion 303. As a result, the position of the first illumination board 312 is regulated vertically (see FIG. 47). In addition, the first illumination mechanism 310 includes the first illumination substrate 312 sandwiched between the rear surface of the illumination decoration member 316 and the illumination holding piece 328 of the illumination partition member 326 and accommodated in the illumination accommodation unit 303, thereby The first illumination board 312 is sandwiched between the rear surface of the illumination decoration member 316 and the accommodation rear wall 303b of the illumination accommodation part 303, and the position of the first illumination board 312 is regulated in the front-rear direction. Furthermore, the first illumination mechanism 310 is sandwiched between the left and right side surfaces of the illumination housing portion 303 by the first illumination board 312 being sandwiched between the left and right illumination holding pieces 328 and 328 and housed in the illumination housing portion 303. The position of the first illumination board 312 is restricted to the left and right. Thus, in the 1st illumination mechanism 310, the 1st illumination board 312 is hold | maintained by the member which comprises this 1st illumination mechanism 310, without using fasteners, such as a screw and a screw.

  In the first illumination mechanism 310, the first illumination substrate 312 that emits light on the upper rolling surface 168 of the stage 150 is assembled to other fasteners such as screws by simply assembling other components constituting the first illumination mechanism 310. It is positioned without fixing with. That is, the trouble of screwing the first illumination board 312 can be saved, and the assembly work of the first illumination mechanism 310 can be simplified. In addition, since the unit stage portion 166 that forms the upper rolling surface 168 is attached to the first illumination mechanism 310, the handling of both is facilitated.

  In the game board 40, the first lighting mechanism 310 is installed by effectively using the space below the upper rolling surface 168, and the first rolling mechanism 168 emits light. Here, in the first illumination mechanism 310, the first illumination board 312 is installed in parallel to the upper rolling surface 168, and an illumination lens is provided from the LED 313 provided on the upper surface of the first illumination board 312 facing the upper rolling surface 168. The upper rolling surface 168 is illuminated by light linearly applied to the upper rolling surface 168 via the portion 336. That is, the first illumination mechanism 310 can illuminate the upper rolling surface 168 with the light directly irradiated from the LED 313 of the first illumination board 312. For example, an LED is provided on the front surface of the illumination board extending vertically. Compared with the case where the upper rolling surface 168 is illuminated by light emitted forward from the LED, the upper rolling surface 168 can be effectively illuminated. The first illumination mechanism 310 directly illuminates the upper rolling surface 168 located in the rear region, which tends to be darker than the front side, on the rolling surfaces 153, 154, and 168 of the stage 150, which is very effective. It is.

  Since the first lighting substrate 312 is held in a posture in which the thickness direction is vertically aligned, the installation space required in the vertical direction can be minimized, and the upper rolling surface 168 and the first lighting substrate can be minimized. A plurality of members such as an illumination cover member 322, an illumination partition member 330, and an illumination translucent member 334 can be disposed between the upper rolling surface 168 and the first illumination substrate. The space between 312 can be used effectively. That is, the first illumination mechanism 310 provides the illumination partition member 330 to partition the LEDs 313 corresponding to the adjacent illumination lens portions 336 with the partition wall 332, and the LED 313 is turned off when the illumination lens portion 336 emits light. It is possible to prevent light from entering the adjacent illumination lens unit 336, and to effectively produce a light emission effect for each illumination lens unit 336. In addition, the combination of the illumination cover member 322 that does not transmit light and the illumination translucent member 334 that transmits light causes only the illumination lens unit 336 to emit light, not the entire upper surface of the first illumination mechanism 310, so that the illumination lens unit 336 The corresponding upper rolling surface 168 can be emphasized to produce a light emission effect.

  The game board 40 is provided with first to third frame illumination means 130, 131, 132 at the lower edge of the display frame 100, below the lower rolling surface 153. The lower rolling surface 153 is indirectly illuminated by light irradiated forward from the LEDs 130c, 131c, 132c of the frame illumination boards 130b, 131b, 132b of the frame illumination means 130, 131, 132. Here, the frame decoration portion 120 located on the front side of the frame illumination boards 130b, 131b, and 132b is configured such that the rear surface reflects light, so that the light emitted forward from the LEDs 130c, 131c, and 132c. Can be reflected toward the lower rolling surface 153, and the lower rolling surface 153 can be illuminated by the reflected light. The first illumination mechanism 310 that directly illuminates the upper rolling surface 168 is provided on the back unit 50 side, whereas the first to third frame illuminating means 130, 131, which indirectly illuminate the lower rolling surface 153. 132 is provided on the display frame 100 (board main body 42 side). As described above, the first illumination mechanism 310 and the first to third frame body illumination means 130, 131, and 132 are allocated to the back unit 50 and the display frame body 100. An excessive load can be avoided.

(Second illumination mechanism)
The second illumination mechanism 340 is installed on the rear side of the illumination base member 302, a second illumination board 342 having a plurality of LEDs 343 as an illumination body on the front surface, a gantry 344 that covers the front side of the illumination base member 302, and this An illumination translucent portion 346 provided on the front side of the gantry 344 and illuminated by the LED 343 of the second illumination board 342 via the illumination base member 302 and the gantry 344, and an illumination peripheral decoration that decorates the periphery of the illumination transmissive portion 346 Part (decorative member) 348 (see FIGS. 50 to 55). In the second illumination mechanism 340, the illumination translucent portion 346 and the illumination peripheral ornament portion 348 constitute a front surface that can be visually recognized through the transparent board body 42, and the front surface starts from the lower side of the stage 150 in the game area 40a. It faces the left and right areas of the winning openings 70a, 70b (see FIG. 7). Here, the second illumination mechanism 340 is provided with a plurality of illumination translucent sections 346, and a pair of illumination translucent sections sandwiching the start winning ports 70a and 70b on the left and right sides (in particular, special illumination translucent sections when distinguished from each other). 346A and others are referred to as normal illumination translucent part 346B) (see FIG. 41 or FIG. 50). The second illumination mechanism 340 is provided with a device accommodating portion 340a that is formed in a concave shape that opens downward in the center and accommodates a portion that protrudes to the rear side of the board main body 42 in the start winning device 70. Yes.

  The gantry 344 is a transparent member, and is formed in accordance with the front shape excluding the area where the illumination decoration member 316 of the first illumination mechanism 310 is attached to the illumination base member 302 (see FIG. 54). The gantry 344 is provided with a light diffusing structure at a portion corresponding to the rear side of the special illumination translucent part 346A. The light diffusing structure of the embodiment is formed in a shape in which concavities and convexities are arranged concentrically. (See FIG. 54). The illumination translucent part 346 is capable of transmitting light and covers the front side of the LED 343 provided on the front surface of the second illumination substrate 342. The special illumination translucent part 346A has a front surface formed in a spherical shape, and is configured to be larger than the normal illumination translucent part 346B. The illumination decoration portion 348 is not capable of transmitting light, and is provided so as to border the lower side of the illumination decoration member 316 of the first illumination mechanism 310 and the periphery of the illumination translucent portion 346. The illumination peripheral decoration part 348 of the embodiment is mirror-finished from plating and is configured to reflect light.

  In the illumination device 300, the front surface of the gantry 344 is covered by the illumination translucent part 346 and the illumination peripheral decoration part 348 of the second illumination mechanism 340 except for the lower left region (see FIG. 41 or FIG. 50). And the lower left area | region of the mount frame part 344 in the illuminating device 300 becomes the channel | path installation part 350 in which the channel | path structural member 420 mentioned later is installed.

(Left side normal winning equipment)
As shown in FIGS. 13 and 56 to 77, the left side normal winning device 400 includes a lower decorative member (decorating member) 402 provided on the board main body 42 and having a normal winning opening facing the game area 40a, and a back unit. 50, and is provided in the ball passages 410, 414, and 416, and has a passage member 420 having ball passages 410, 414, and 416 that guide the pachinko balls W taken from the game area 40a through the normal winning opening. And a normal winning sensor (detection means) 401 that detects the pachinko ball W flowing down the ball passages 410, 414, and 416.

  The lower decorative member 402 includes a plate-shaped lower decorative main body 403, a decorative fitting piece 404 formed on the rear surface of the lower decorative main body 403 so as to match the lower decorative through hole 42c, and the front surface of the lower decorative main body 403. And an ordinary winning portion 405 having an ordinary winning opening 406 (see FIG. 56 or 57). The lower decorative member 402 fits the decorative fitting piece 404 into the lower decorative penetrating opening 42 c and abuts the outer peripheral edge of the lower decorative main body 403 extending outward from the decorative fitting piece 404 to the front surface of the panel main body 42. Then, it is attached to the panel main body 42 (see FIG. 5 or FIG. 13). That is, in the lower decorative member 402, the front surface of the lower decorative main body 403 constitutes a part of the game area 40a.

  The normal winning portion 405 is provided in the lower ornament body 403 so as to surround the front side of a ball passage 403a formed through the lower ornament body 403 in the front-rear direction, and defines a normal winning opening 406 that opens upward. A ball intake portion 405a and a ball guide piece 405b that surrounds the left and right side portions and the bottom portion of the ball passage 403a and extends rearward from the rear surface of the lower decorative body 403 (see FIG. 56 or FIG. 56). . The normal winning portion 405 is configured such that the ball guide piece 405b protrudes from the rear surface of the board body 42 through the lower decorative through hole 42c, and the pachinko ball W taken from the normal winning port 406 opened to the game area 40a It is guided to the rear side of the panel main body 42 through the insertion portion 405a and the ball guide piece 405b.

  In the left ordinary winning device 400, a plurality of ordinary winning ports 406 are provided spaced apart vertically and horizontally so as to form a staircase (see FIG. 5 or FIG. 6). In the left side normal winning device 400 of the embodiment, the three normal winning portions 405, 405, 405 are stepped so that the positions of the normal winning ports 406, 406, 406 become lower as they move from the left side toward the center side. Has been placed.

(Ball passage)
The ball passages 410, 414, and 416 are defined inside the passage constituting member 420, and are set to a size that can guide the pachinko balls W one by one (see FIG. 68 or FIG. 76). In the left ordinary winning device 400, one ball passage 410, 414, 416 is provided corresponding to one ordinary winning opening 406, and a plurality of ball passages 410, 414, 416 merge into one. . In other words, three ball passages 410, 414, 416 are defined in the passage component member 420 corresponding to the three normal winning ports 406, 406, 406, and the flow down of these ball passages 410, 414, 416 The terminal ends are collectively released from one place to the outside of the game board 40.

  The passage component member 420 is attached to a passage installation portion 350 provided in the lower left portion of the lighting device 300 installed in the lower side portion 52d of the installation plate portion 52 in the back unit 50 (see FIG. 14 or FIG. 16). It is installed on the rear side of the decorative member 402 (see FIG. 76). The passage constituent member 420 is attached to the rear passage half body 422 disposed on the side of the passage installation portion 350 serving as an attachment portion, and is attached to the front side of the rear passage half body 422. 42 and a front passage half body 428 located on the rear side of the lower decorative member 402 facing the rear side of 42. The passage constituting member 420 is configured such that at least light can be transmitted through portions of the rear passage half 422 and the front passage half 428 that define the ball passages 410, 414, and 416. In the embodiment, the passage member 420 is entirely transparent. It has become.

  The passage component member 420 includes a first ball passage 410 corresponding to the normal winning opening 406 located on the left side, a second ball passage 414 corresponding to the normal winning opening 406 located on the center, and a normal win located on the right side. A third ball passage 416 corresponding to the mouth 406 is defined (see FIG. 68). The first ball passage 410 is connected to the outflow end of the normal winning portion 405 whose upper end is located on the left side, and communicates with the vertical passage portion 411 extending in the vertical direction and the downstream of the vertical passage portion 411, and in the center in the left-right direction. And a lateral passage portion 412 extending toward the portion side. The second ball passage 414 includes only a vertical passage portion 415 that is connected to the outflow end of the normal winning portion 405 whose upper end is located at the center and extends in the vertical direction. The third ball passage 416 is connected to the outflow end of the normal winning portion 405 whose upper end is located on the right side, communicates with the vertical passage portion 417 extending in the vertical direction and the downstream side of the vertical passage portion 417, and left on the left side in the left-right direction. And a lateral passage portion 418 extending toward the direction.

  The passage component member 420 is configured such that a plurality of spherical passages 410, 414, and 416 merge (see FIG. 68), and upstream of the passage discharge port 421 provided at the lower end of the passage component member 420. Ball passages are combined into one. In the passage component member 420, the lateral passage portion 412 of the first spherical passage 410 extends so as to guide the pachinko ball W toward the second spherical passage 414, and the falling end of the lateral passage portion 412 is the second spherical passage 414. It is connected to the. Further, in the passage component 420, the lateral passage portion 418 of the third spherical passage 416 extends so as to guide the pachinko ball W toward the second spherical passage 414, and the falling end of the lateral passage portion 418 is the second spherical passage. 414. In this way, the first spherical passage 410 and the third spherical passage 416 are configured to join the passage constituent member 420 so that the flow-fall ends of the respective lateral passage portions 412 and 418 face each other. In the passage component member 420 of the embodiment, the lower end of the lateral passage portion 412 of the first spherical passage 410 is disposed so as to be opposed to the upper end of the lower end of the lateral passage portion 418 of the third spherical passage 416.

  The rear-side passage half 422 is formed to project forward on the front surface of the passage rear plate portion 423 constituting the rear surface of the ball passages 410, 414, and 416 and to the front surface of the passage rear plate portion 423. And a passage lateral plate portion 424 that constitutes a side surface along the flow direction of the pachinko balls W (see FIGS. 68 to 71). The rear passage half 422 includes a passage support plate portion 425 formed so as to protrude rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the rear surface of the passage rear plate portion 423 (see FIG. 59, FIG. 65 or FIG. 69). ). The passage component member 420 is attached to the gantry 344 of the lighting device 300 with the rear end of the passage support plate 425 of the rear passage half 422 in contact with the front surface of the passage installation portion 350. A passage light-emitting substrate 444 described later is installed between the passage rear plate portion 423 (see FIG. 41, FIG. 50, or FIG. 76). The rear passage half body 422 is formed with a groove opened on the front side to form the first to third ball passages 410, 414, and 416 by the passage rear plate portion 423 and the passage lateral plate portion 424 (FIG. 68). reference). In the rear passage half 422, the portion corresponding to the upper end of each of the ball passages 410, 414, and 416 is formed by connecting between the passage lateral plate portions 424 facing each other, and corresponds to the upper end of the ball passages 410, 414, and 416. An upper guide rib 426 extending obliquely from the upper surface to the rear surface of the groove is provided (see FIG. 62). The rear passage half 422 is provided with a passage discharge port 421 that communicates vertically with a portion corresponding to the lower end of the second sphere passage 414 where the first and third sphere passages 410 and 416 merge (see FIG. 61 or FIG. 71).

  The front-side passage half 428 includes a passage front plate portion 429 that forms the front surface of the ball passages 410, 414, and 416 (see FIGS. 72 to 75), and the front side of the passage lateral plate portion 424 of the rear-side passage half 422. Is covered with the passage front plate 429 and assembled to the rear passage half 422 (see FIGS. 60 to 63). The front passage half 428 is provided with a passage inlet 430 communicating with the upper ends of the ball passages 410, 414, 416 corresponding to the outflow ends of the respective normal winning portions 405. The rear portion of the ball guide piece 405b of the protruding normal winning portion 405 is inserted into the passage inlet 430. Further, the front passage half body 428 has a passage peripheral plate portion 431 formed to extend rearward from the upper outer peripheral edge of the passage front plate portion 429, and the passage peripheral plate portion 431 has a groove in the front-rear direction. A passage light diffusing portion (light diffusing portion) 431a having an extending uneven light diffusing structure is provided (see FIG. 60 or 74). The front passage half 428 is attached to the rear passage half 422 so that the passage peripheral plate portion 431 covers the outer front portion of the passage horizontal plate portion 424 extending to the upper portion of the rear passage half 422, and is transparent. The upper part of the passage component member 420 that can be visually recognized through the board body 42 is decorated with a light diffusion portion 431a of the passage peripheral plate portion 431 (see FIG. 64).

  The front-side passage half 428 includes passage-side ribs 432 that protrude rearwardly from the rear surface of the passage-front plate portion 429 corresponding to the front side of the passage-side plate portion 424 of the rear-side passage half body 422 (FIG. 73). The passage lateral rib 432 blocks the space between the front end of the passage lateral plate 424 and the passage front plate 429. Each passage lateral rib 432 is formed to extend along the flow direction of the pachinko sphere W.

  The front-side passage half 428 is provided at a portion corresponding to each of the ball passages 410, 414, and 416, and has a passage guide rib (guide rib) 433 for guiding the pachinko ball W along the ball passages 410, 414, and 416. (See FIG. 73). The passage guide rib 433 is provided on the rear surface of the passage front plate portion 429 in the front passage half body 428, protrudes from the rear surface to the side of the ball passages 410, 414, and 416 (backward) and extends in the flow direction of the pachinko balls W. It is formed to extend. In each of the ball passages 410, 414, and 416, a plurality of passage guide ribs 433 are provided side by side so as to be separated from each other in a direction intersecting with the flow direction of the pachinko balls W (see FIG. 63). In the embodiment, two passage guide ribs 433 and 433 are provided for each of the ball passages 410, 414, and 416, and these passage guide ribs 433 define the passage direction of the passages of the ball passages 410, 414, and 416. Are formed in a parallel relationship. In the front passage half 428, the protruding dimensions of the passage lateral rib 432 and the passage guide rib 433 from the passage front plate portion 429 are set to be the same (see FIG. 63).

  The passage component member 420 is disposed on the side of the spherical passages 410, 414, and 416 from the surfaces defining the spherical passages 410, 414, and 416 (the rear ends of the passage rear plate portion 423, the passage lateral plate portion 424, and the passage guide rib 433). Buffer ribs 434, 435, 436, 437, and 438 provided so as to protrude (see FIG. 68 or 73). A plurality of buffer ribs 434, 435, and 436 are spaced apart in the flow direction of the pachinko sphere W in the first sphere passage 410 having a longer circulation distance of the pachinko sphere W than the second and third ball passages 414 and 416. It is provided in the passage component member 420. On the other hand, each of the second ball passage 414 and the third ball passage 416 is provided with one buffer rib 437 and 438. When a plurality of buffer ribs 434, 435, 436 are provided in one ball passage 410, the plurality of buffer ribs 434, 435, 436 are alternately shifted in the flow direction of the pachinko spheres W, and They are distributed and installed on opposite surfaces (see FIG. 62 or FIG. 76).

  Specifically, the passage component member 420 corresponding to the first sphere passage 410 is provided on the rear surface of the front passage half body 428 so as to cross the first sphere passage 410, and the first sphere is formed from the passage guide rib 433. A first shock absorber rib 434 protruding toward the passage 410 side (see FIG. 73), and a first spherical passage on the front surface of the rear passage plate portion 423 of the rear passage half body 422 facing the surface on which the first shock absorber rib 434 is provided. 410 and second buffer ribs 435 projecting toward the first ball passage 410 from the front surface of the passage rear plate 423 (see FIG. 68) are shifted in the flow direction of the pachinko balls W alternately. (See FIG. 62 or FIG. 76). The first buffer rib 434 is positioned below the passage inlet 430 communicating with the upper end of the first spherical passage 410 in the front passage half 428 and corresponds to a midway portion of the vertical passage portion 411 of the first spherical passage 410. And traverses the vertical passage portion 411 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 73). The second buffer rib 435 is provided at a position corresponding to the downstream end of the longitudinal passage portion 411 of the first spherical passage 410 in the rear passage half 422, and crosses the longitudinal passage portion 411 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 68). ). As described above, in the first ball passage 410, the second buffer rib 435 is arranged on the downstream side in the distribution direction of the pachinko balls W from the first buffer rib 434.

  The passage constituting member 420 includes a flow permitting surface 436a that is inclined so as to protrude from the wall surface defining the lateral passage portion 412 of the first ball passage 410 toward the downstream side in the flow direction of the pachinko balls W, and a protrusion. A third buffer rib 436 provided with a flow regulating surface 436b that is inclined with respect to the wall surface of the lateral passage portion 412 at a steeper angle than the flow allowing surface 436a from the end toward the wall surface (FIG. 67 or FIG. (See FIG. 73). The third buffer rib 436 is formed in a triangular shape in plan view, and an inner angle formed by the flow restriction surface 436b and the wall surface of the horizontal passage portion 412 is an inner angle formed by the flow permission surface 436a and the wall surface of the horizontal passage portion 412. It is formed to be steeper. Here, the third buffer rib 436 has an inner angle formed by the flow restricting surface 436b and the wall surface of the lateral passage portion 412, whereas the inner angle formed by the flow permission surface 436a and the wall surface of the lateral passage portion 412 is set to an acute angle. Is set to a right angle (Example) or an obtuse angle (see FIG. 67).

  The third buffer rib 436 is provided on the downstream side of the second buffer rib 435 in the lateral passage portion 412 of the first spherical passage 410, and the first, second and third buffer ribs 434, 435, 436 are the first In the ball passage 410, the pachinko balls W are shifted in the flow direction and arranged on alternate surfaces. More specifically, the third buffer rib 436 is disposed in a linearly extending portion of the horizontal passage portion 412 in the central portion in the left-right direction, and overlaps below the vertical passage portion 411 in the horizontal passage portion 412. The second ball passage 416 is arranged so as to be removed from the bent portion such as the vicinity of the junction with the second ball passage 416 (see FIG. 73). The third buffer rib 436 is provided on the rear side of the front passage half 428 and is formed so as to protrude from the passage guide rib 433 toward the first ball passage 410 (see FIG. 67). In the front passage half 428 of the embodiment, a third buffer rib 436 is provided extending from the rear end of the passage guide rib 433.

  Corresponding to the second sphere passage 414, a passage component member 420 is provided on the front side of the rear passage half 422 so as to project across the second sphere passage 414 to the second sphere passage 414 side. A buffer rib 437 is provided (see FIG. 68). The fourth buffer rib 437 is provided so as to extend from the second sphere passage 414 to the joining portion of the first sphere passage 410 to the second sphere passage 414, and only the pachinko sphere W that has flowed into the second sphere passage 414 is provided. Instead, the pachinko sphere W that joins the first sphere passage 410 to the second sphere passage 414 also flows down beyond the fourth buffer rib 437. More specifically, the fourth buffer rib 437 extends from the terminal end of the passage horizontal plate portion 424 constituting the lower surface of the horizontal passage portion 412 of the first ball passage 410 to the upper surface of the horizontal passage portion 418 of the third ball passage 416. It is comprised so that it may extend over the terminal part of the channel | path horizontal board part 424 to comprise. The fourth buffer rib 437 is provided on the downstream side of the third buffer rib 436 provided in the lateral passage portion 412 of the first ball passage 410, and with respect to the third buffer rib 436 provided on the front surface of the first ball passage 410. The fourth buffer rib 437 is provided on the rear surface of the second ball passage 414. Thus, in the passage component member 420, the first to fourth buffer ribs 434, 435, 436, and 437 are alternately arranged on the front and rear surfaces of the ball passages 410 and 414.

  The passage constituting member 420 includes a flow allowance surface 438a that inclines so as to protrude from the wall surface of the lateral passage portion 418 of the third ball passage 416 toward the downstream side in the flow direction of the pachinko ball W, and a wall surface extending from the protruding end. A fifth buffer rib 438 having a flow regulating surface 438b inclined with respect to the wall surface of the lateral passage portion 418 at a steeper angle than the flow allowing surface 438a is provided (see FIG. 68). The fifth buffer rib 438 has a bilaterally symmetrical configuration with the third buffer rib 436 and the second ball passage 414 provided in the first ball passage 410 interposed therebetween, and is formed in a triangular shape in plan view. The inner angle formed by the regulating surface 438b and the wall surface of the lateral passage portion 418 is formed to be steeper than the inner angle formed by the flow permission surface 438a and the wall surface of the lateral passage portion 418 (see FIG. 63). Here, in the fifth buffer rib 438, the inner angle formed by the flow allowing surface 438a and the wall surface of the lateral passage portion 418 is set to an acute angle, whereas the inner angle formed by the flow restricting surface 438b and the wall surface of the horizontal passage portion 418 is set. Is set to a right angle (example) or an obtuse angle. The fifth buffer rib 438 is disposed in a linearly extending portion at the center in the left-right direction of the horizontal passage portion 418 of the third ball passage 416 and overlaps below the vertical passage portion 415 in the horizontal passage portion 418. It arrange | positions by removing from bending parts, such as the confluence | merging part vicinity with the 2nd bulb | ball channel | path 414. The fifth buffer rib 438 is provided on the front surface of the rear passage half 422.

  The passage component member 420 includes a lower portion of the first spherical passage 410 and a second spherical passage 414 that face the passage inlet 430 and a lower portion of the passage outlet 421 (the lower end of the spherical passages 410, 414, and 416). Part) is provided with a sensor holding part 440 for detachably holding the normal winning sensor 401 (see FIG. 59, FIG. 61, FIG. 65, FIG. 69 or FIG. 71). The sensor holding portion 440 includes a sensor passage 423 a that is formed in the rear passage plate 423 of the rear passage half 422 according to the outer shape of the normal winning sensor 401 and a sensor passage 423 a on the rear surface of the rear passage plate 423. A sensor holding piece 441 for holding the side portion of the normal winning sensor 401 which is formed to extend rearward on one side portion and protrudes to the rear side of the sensor passage port 423a, and a sensor passage port 423a on the rear surface of the passage rear plate portion 423. A sensor locking piece 442 that has a locking claw that locks the rear surface of the normal winning sensor 401 that extends rearwardly on the other side and protrudes to the rear side of the sensor through hole 423a (see FIG. 71). The sensor locking piece 442 is configured to be elastically deformable in a direction in which the sensor holding piece 441 is opposed to and away from the sensor holding piece 441 across the sensor through hole 423a, and is engaged with the normal winning sensor 401 inserted into the sensor through hole 423a. The pawl can be engaged and disengaged.

  The sensor holding portions 440 and 440 provided corresponding to the first and second ball passages 410 and 414 correspond to the sensor holding portions 440 and 440 in the gantry 344 and the illumination base member 302 of the lighting device 300. In the sensor insertion opening 352 formed through the front and rear (see FIGS. 42, 45, and 50), the rear portions of the normal winning sensors 401 and 401 held by the sensor holding portions 440 and 440, the sensor holding piece 441, and the sensor engagement A piece 442 is accommodated (see FIG. 76). Further, a sensor opening 80 is formed in the lower side portion 52d of the back unit 50 in correspondence with the sensor insertion port 352 (see FIGS. 8 to 10). The sensor openings 80 and 80 for the normal winning sensor 401 corresponding to the first and second ball passages 410 and 414 are provided inside the board support piece 60a of the left board installation part 60, and the board installation part 60 is provided. The sensor openings 80 and 80 are hidden by the relay board 38 attached to the sensor board. As described above, the relay board 38 can be easily attached to and detached from the board installation part 60 without using a tool. Therefore, if the relay board 38 is removed, the normal winning sensor 401 is attached to the sensor holding part 440 via the sensor opening 80. Can be easily attached and detached.

  The sensor holding part 440 provided at the flow-down terminal part of the spherical passages 410, 414, 416 is provided at the lower part of the back unit 50 so as to be exposed to the rear side (see FIGS. 8 to 10). The normal winning sensor 401 can be inserted into and removed from the sensor holding portion 440 from the rear side. As described above, in the normal use state of the pachinko machine 10, the sensor holding portion located below the passage discharge port 421 where the normal winning sensor 401 is installed is provided to be exposed to the rear side of the rear unit 50. Therefore, the normal winning sensor 401 is easily attached to and detached from the sensor holding portion 440, and maintenance is easy. The normal winning sensor 401 includes a ball passage opening formed through the front portion of the rectangular plate-shaped main body portion in the thickness direction. The ball passage opening is aligned with the ball passages 410, 414, and 416 and is attached to the sensor holding portion 440. Retained. The normal winning sensor 401 detects the pachinko sphere W when the pachinko sphere W passes through the ball passage opening.

  The pachinko ball W that has won the left normal winning opening 406 is guided to the first ball passage 410 via the normal winning portion 405. The pachinko ball W that has flowed into the upper end of the vertical passage portion 411 in the first ball passage 410 from the front side bounces back to the rear surface of the vertical passage portion 411 and moves forward, and on the front surface of the vertical passage portion 411 of the first ball passage 410. The falling speed drops by hitting the first buffer rib 434 provided. The pachinko ball W moves rearward by hitting the first buffer rib 434, but is located on the downstream side of the first buffer rib 434 and is provided on the rear surface of the vertical passage portion 411 of the first ball passage 410. The falling speed drops by hitting the buffer rib 435. Further, the pachinko ball W moves forward by hitting the second buffer rib 435, but is provided on the front side of the lateral passage portion 412 of the first ball passage 410 located on the downstream side of the second buffer rib 435. The falling speed falls by hitting the third buffer rib 436. Here, the third buffering rib 436 has an inclined surface in which the flow allowing surface 436a facing the upstream side in the flow direction gradually protrudes from the upstream side to the downstream side of the lateral passage portion 412 of the first spherical passage 410. Therefore, although it hits the pachinko ball W, the pachinko ball W is not stopped. Then, when the pachinko sphere W merges from the first sphere passage 410 to the second sphere passage 414, the pachinko sphere W hits the fourth buffer rib 437 extending on the rear surface of the second sphere passage 414 and the flow-down speed decreases. In this way, the pachinko ball W that has won the left normal winning port 406 has a large drop between the normal winning port 406 and the normal winning sensor 401, and therefore the flow speed is likely to increase, but the first to fourth buffer ribs 434, 435, 436, and 437 are detected by the normal winning sensor 401 installed under the passage discharge port 421 through the passage discharge port 421 in a state where the flow down speed is sufficiently lowered.

  The pachinko ball W that has won a prize in the center normal winning opening 406 is guided to the second ball passage 414 via the normal winning portion 405. The pachinko ball W that has flowed into the second ball passage 414 collides with the fourth buffer rib 437 extending on the rear surface of the second ball passage 414, and the flow-down speed is reduced. The pachinko ball W that has won the right normal winning opening 406 is guided to the third ball passage 416 via the normal winning portion 405. The pachinko ball W that has flowed into the third ball passage 416 collides with the fifth buffer rib 438 extending on the rear surface of the third ball passage 416, and the flow-down speed is reduced. Here, the fifth buffer rib 438 is an inclined surface in which the flow allowing surface 438a facing the upstream side in the flow direction gradually protrudes from the upstream side to the downstream side of the lateral passage portion 418 of the third ball passage 416. Therefore, although it hits the pachinko ball W, the pachinko ball W is not stopped. The center and right normal winning holes 406, 406 are provided below the left normal winning hole 406, and the difference between the normal winning holes 406, 406 and the normal winning sensor 401 is small, so the fourth and fifth buffer ribs 437, 438 are sufficient. The flow speed can be reduced.

  As described above, the first to third buffer ribs 434, 435, 436 in the first spherical passage 410 are provided on the alternate surfaces of the passage component member 420 by shifting in the flow direction. The pachinko sphere W repelled on the opposite side to the buffer ribs 434 and 435 hits the downstream buffer ribs 435 and 436 provided on the opposite side, so that the pachinko sphere W is formed by these buffer ribs 434, 435 and 436. The flow speed can be reduced appropriately. Therefore, the detection failure of the pachinko ball W by the normal winning sensor 401 can be avoided more reliably. In particular, when a mechanical sensor that detects the pachinko ball W by using a pachinko ball W that reciprocates by the pachinko ball W that passes through the ball passage port is used as the normal winning sensor 401, the pachinko ball W There is a possibility that chattering will occur if the flow speed is high. In the embodiment, since the flow down speed of the pachinko ball W is sufficiently reduced before reaching the normal winning sensor 401 by the buffer ribs 434, 435, 436, 437, 438, a mechanical sensor is used as the normal winning sensor 401. Also, chattering can be avoided and the pachinko sphere W can be accurately detected.

  In the passage component member 420, the lower end of the lateral passage portion 412 of the first spherical passage 410 and the lower end of the lateral passage portion 418 of the third spherical passage 416 are disposed facing each other across the second spherical passage 414. Therefore, there is a possibility that the pachinko sphere W released from the falling end of the lateral passage portion 412 of the first spherical passage 410 may enter the lateral passage portion 418 of the third spherical passage 416. Similarly, there is a possibility that the pachinko sphere W released from the falling end of the horizontal passage portion 418 of the third ball passage 416 may enter the horizontal passage portion 412 of the first ball passage 410. Further, the pachinko sphere W flowing down the second sphere passage 414 is also bounced by the preceding pachinko sphere W, etc., so that the lateral passage portion 412 of the first sphere passage 410 and the lateral passage portion 418 of the third sphere passage 416 from the junction. There is a risk of intrusion. The passage component member 420 is provided with a third buffer rib 436 in the lateral passage portion 412 of the first ball passage 410 and a fifth buffer rib 438 in the lateral passage portion 418 of the third ball passage 416. Since the flow restriction surfaces 436b and 438b facing the downstream side in the flow direction of the buffer ribs 436 and 438 rise at a steep angle from the wall surface of the horizontal passage portions 412 and 418, the horizontal passage portion 412 is formed by the flow restriction surfaces 436b and 438b. , 418, the backflow of the pachinko sphere W can be prevented. That is, it is possible to prevent the pachinko sphere W that has flowed down the ball passages 410, 414, 416 by the third and fifth buffer ribs 436, 438 from entering the other ball passages 410, 414, 416 connected at the junction. Thus, poor flow of the pachinko balls W in the ball passages 410, 414, and 416, erroneous detection of the pachinko balls W by the normal winning sensor 401, and the like can be avoided.

(Luminous structure of the left regular winning device)
Next, the light emitting structure of the left side normal winning device 400 will be described. The left regular winning device 400 is provided between the rear side of the transparent passage constituting member 420 and the installation plate portion 52 as a light emitting structure, and a ball passage defining the LED 445 as a light emitter in the passage constituting member 420. A passage light emitting substrate (light emitting substrate) 444 mounted on the front surface corresponding to 410, 414, and 416 (see FIG. 41 or FIG. 50), and a lower portion that is fitted and attached to a lower decorative through hole 42c provided in the panel body 42 The decorative member 402 includes a passage transmitting portion (transmitting portion) 407 that can transmit light (see FIG. 56 or FIG. 57). The passage transmitting portion 407 is provided on the lower decorative member 402 corresponding to the front side of the LED 445 of the passage light emitting substrate 444 (see FIG. 76).

  The passage light-emitting substrate 444 includes an LED 445 that is biased toward the left passage lateral plate portion 424 in the longitudinal passage portion 411 of the first spherical passage 410, and a right passage in the longitudinal passage portion 411 of the first spherical passage 410. An LED 445 is disposed on the front side below the extension line of the horizontal plate portion 424 and is biased toward the upper passage horizontal plate portion 424 in the horizontal passage portion 412 of the first spherical passage 410. In addition, the passage light emitting substrate 444 is below the extension line of the left passage horizontal plate portion 424 in the vertical passage portion 415 of the second spherical passage 414 and on the upper passage horizontal plate portion in the horizontal passage portion 412 of the first spherical passage 410. The LED 445 biased to the 424 side and the lower side of the right side passage horizontal plate portion 424 in the vertical passage portion 415 of the second ball passage 414 and the upper side of the horizontal passage portion 418 of the third ball passage 416. An LED 445 arranged in a biased manner on the side of the passage horizontal plate 424 is provided on the front surface. The lower decorative member 402 is provided with four passage transmitting portions 407 below the normal winning portion 405 (see FIG. 41 or FIG. 50).

  The passage component member 420 includes a plurality of passage guide ribs 433 and 433 that protrude toward the ball passages 410, 414, and 416 and extend in the flow direction of the pachinko balls W (FIG. 63 or FIG. 73). The passage guide ribs 433 and 433 for guiding the pachinko ball W are provided in parallel and disposed on the front side of the LED 445. As a result, the unevenness caused by the passage guide ribs 433 and 433 that guide the pachinko sphere W in the ball passages 410, 414, and 416 functions as a light diffusion structure. Can emit light.

  As described above, the left-side regular winning device 400 irradiates light forward from the LED 445 of the passage light-emitting substrate 444 disposed on the rear side of the ball passages 410, 414, 416, so that the lower left side through the transparent passage component member 420. The passage transmitting portion 407 of the decorative member 402 emits light (see FIG. 76). Further, the passage light emitting substrate 444 is installed on the rear side of the passage component member 420, and the ball passages 410, 414, and 416 are not hidden by the passage light emitting substrate 444. By illuminating, it can be determined that the pachinko ball W flows down the ball passages 410, 414, 416 through the passage transmitting portion 407 of the lower decorative member 402, so the left side after the pachinko ball W wins from the normal winning opening 406 A player's attention can be drawn to the normal winning device 400. A lower decorative member 402 is disposed on the front side of the passage component member 420. However, since the game board 40 of the embodiment employs a transparent board body 42, the player can enter the lower area of the game board 40. The disposed passage component member 420 is viewed obliquely from above, and the upper side of the passage component member 420 is visible through the transparent board body 42. Here, since the light diffusing portion 431a is provided in the upper part of the outer peripheral surface of the visually visible passage constituting member 420, the passage constituting member 420 can appropriately diffuse the light emitted from the LED 445 and appropriately produce a light emission effect. it can. That is, the passage constituting member 420 itself functions as a decoration, and a light emission effect can be suitably produced around the normal winning opening 406 provided in the lower decoration member 402.

(Right side normal winning equipment)
In the normal winning device (in particular, right-hand normal winning device) 450 positioned on the right side of the special winning port 74a, the normal winning port 452 is integrated with the display frame 100 (fourth frame decoration portion 120D). Provided (see FIG. 18 or FIG. 24). In the embodiment, a basket-type regular winning opening 452 is provided in the fourth frame decoration portion 120D of the display frame 100 (see FIG. 24). In the right normal winning device 450, a pachinko ball W that has won a prize from the game area 40a to the normal winning hole 452 is guided to the rear side of the board body 42 through the display through hole 42a, and a sensor holding part 454 provided in the back unit 50 is provided. It is detected by the normal winning sensor 401 held in (see FIGS. 8 to 10). The sensor holding part 454 of the right normal winning device 450 is provided to be exposed on the rear side of the back unit 50, and the normal winning sensor 401 can be inserted into and removed from the sensor holding part 454 from the rear side of the back unit 50. Is done. The configuration of the sensor holding unit 454 of the right normal winning device 450 is the same as the sensor holding unit 440 of the left normal winning device 400 described above.

(display)
In the back unit 50, a display 460 for displaying the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is installed on a display installation section (installation section) 448 provided on the left front side of the lower side (see FIG. 14 or FIG. 16). When the back panel 50 is attached to the board main body 42, the game board 40 faces the lower left part of the game area 40a through the display through hole (opening) 42d opened in the board main body 42. The display 460 is configured to form a part of the game area 40a (see FIG. 5 or FIG. 6). The display through-hole 42d is formed in the panel main body 42 so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction in a shape matching the outer shape of the display 460, located on the upper left side of the lower-decoration through-hole 42c into which the lower decorative member 402 is fitted. Yes. In the game board 40, the display 460 is inserted from the rear side of the display through hole 42d and supported by the display installation unit 448 so as to close the display through hole 42d. It is arranged on the upper left side of the normal winning opening 406. The display 460 is arranged so that the front surface is aligned with the front surface of the panel main body 42 or slightly shifted back and forth (Example) (see FIG. 147), and the pachinko ball W is exchanged with the panel main body 42. Thus, the pachinko ball W is configured to flow down on the front side. In addition, when the display device 460 is shifted from the front surface of the panel main body 42, the shift amount may be set smaller than the radius of the pachinko ball W. The display 460 includes a display cover portion (cover portion) 462 having a smooth front surface that constitutes the game area 40a, and the rear side of the display cover portion 462 by the display cover portion 462 that constitutes the front surface. The display means 465, 466, 467, 468, and 469 (refer to FIG. 17), which will be described later, disposed in FIG.

  The board main body 42 is provided with a gaming part that protrudes forward from the front surface of the board main body 42 and prevents the pachinko ball W from flowing down above the display through hole 42d (see FIG. 5). In the board main body 42 of the embodiment, the game nail 43, which is one of the game parts, extends in a bowl shape above the display 460 that is lined up at intervals where the pachinko balls W cannot pass and is fitted into the display through hole 42d. A plurality are provided. That is, in the game board 40, the display device 460 constitutes a part of the game area 40a, but the pachinko balls W flow down to the front side of the display device 460 by a plurality of game nails 43 installed on the upper side of the display device 460. It is difficult to do. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the display 460 from becoming difficult to see due to the pachinko ball W.

  The display unit 460 includes a display unit such as a special display unit 465, a round number display unit 466, a normal display unit 467, a special hold display unit 468, and a normal hold display unit 469. (See FIG. 66). These display means 465, 466, 467, 468, 469 are connected to the main control device 32 via the display wiring (wiring) H 8 and one end of the display board 464 a that are connected to a socket 464 a provided on the rear surface of the display board 464. Is electrically connected. Each of the display means 465, 466, 467, 468, and 469 includes at least one LED as a light emitter, and can display a predetermined state by lighting control of each LED by the main control device 32. It has become.

  The special display unit 465 displays a lottery result of special symbols executed in the main controller 32 when a pachinko ball W wins at the start winning ports 70a and 70b of the start winning device 70 in a plurality of display patterns. It is for display. The special display unit 465 of the embodiment is configured by a block-like seven segment in which seven LEDs are arranged in an 8-character shape (see FIG. 17 or 66). The display 460 has a first special display unit 465 for starting symbol variation and displaying the result in response to the winning of the pachinko ball W in the upper starting winning opening 70a, and the pachinko ball in the lower starting winning opening 70b. A second special display unit 465 is provided in parallel with the second special display unit 465 for starting symbol variation and displaying the result in response to W winning. In the display device 460, two special display portions 465 and 465 are arranged side by side on the display substrate 464. In the display 460 of the embodiment, the first special display unit 465 is disposed on the right side, and the second special display unit 465 is disposed on the left side. Each of the special display units 465 and 465 is configured to individually control lighting of the LEDs corresponding to the segments, so that a plurality of display patterns can be expressed by a combination of the lighted LEDs.

  The round number display unit 466 informs the player of the upper limit number of rounds corresponding to the established specific gaming state when the specific gaming state is established based on the special symbol lottery result in the main controller 32 described above. (See FIG. 17 or 66). The pachinko machine 10 of the embodiment has a first specific gaming state in which the upper limit number of rounds is set to 2, a second specific gaming state in which the upper limit number of rounds is set to 15 times, and a third in which the upper limit number of rounds is set to 16 times. It is designed to express a total of three types of specific game states with the specific game state. Accordingly, the round number display unit 466 includes three round number display units respectively corresponding to the three types of specific gaming states. The indicator 460 is individually controlled to be turned on by the main control device 32. When the first specific gaming state is established as a lottery result in the main control device 32, the LED of the first round number display unit 466 is turned on, When the second specific gaming state is established, the LED of the second round number display unit 466 is lit, and when the third specific gaming state is established, the LED of the third round number display unit 466 is lit. ing.

  The normal display unit 467 is a start prize that is executed in the main control device 32 when the pachinko ball W passes through the ball passage gate 798 and a detection signal from the gate sensor 799 is input to the main control device 32. The lottery result indicating whether or not the blade member 71 of the device 70 is open / closed is displayed. The display 460 is provided with two normal display portions 467 and 467 (see FIG. 17 or 66). The display 460 is controlled so that the LEDs of the first normal display unit 467 and the LEDs of the second normal display unit 467 blink alternately over a required blinking time, and then the lottery result in the main controller 32 is displayed. In the case of “with opening / closing operation”, the LED of the first normal display unit 467 is turned on and stopped, and the blade member 71 provided in the start winning device 70 is controlled to open for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times. Further, when the lottery result in the main control device 32 is “no opening / closing operation”, the operation stops with the LED of the second normal display portion 467 turned on, and the opening control of the blade member 71 is not performed.

  The indicator 460 includes two first special hold display portions 468 and 468 for displaying the number of pachinko balls (winning balls) W held in the upper start winning opening 70a of the start winning device 70, and the start winning device 70. Are provided with two second special hold display sections 468 and 468 for displaying the number of pachinko balls (winning balls) W held in the lower start winning opening 70b (see FIG. 17 or 66). Each special hold display section 468 has an LED, and can display up to four hold numbers by individually controlling the lighting or blinking of the LEDs. The display 460 includes two normal holding display portions 469 and 469 for displaying the number of pachinko balls (passing balls) W that have passed through the ball passing gate 798 (see FIG. 17 or 66), respectively. The LEDs corresponding to the normal hold display portions 469 and 469 are individually controlled to be lit or blinked, so that up to four hold numbers can be displayed.

  As a display mode of the number of holdings by the LEDs in the special holding display unit 468 and the normal holding display unit 469, in the embodiment, a combination of the LEDs of the two holding display units 468 and 469 is used. In other words, when the number of holding is 1, the LED of one holding display section 468, 469 is turned on, the LED of the other holding display section 468, 469 is turned off, and when the number of holding is 2, one LED is turned on. Lights up, the other LED is lit, and if the number of hold is 3, one LED blinks, the other LED is lit, if the number of hold is 4, one LED blinks, the other LED blinks Is set to

  The special display unit 465 is provided with a status display unit (not shown) composed of LEDs for displaying the current status of the pachinko machine 10, and the pachinko machine 10 varies depending on the status of the LEDs in the status display unit. It is configured to display whether or not the time shortening function is in operation (during time-shortening state) or whether or not the probability variation function is in operation at power recovery (at power-on). In the embodiment, the first special display portion 465 is provided with a first status display LED (not shown), and the second special display portion 465 is provided with a second status display LED (not shown). Then, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the fluctuation time shortening state, the second state display LED is controlled to be turned on. When the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability fluctuation state at the time of power recovery, the first state display LED is Controlled to light up.

  The “variable time shortening function” is a lottery probability that, after the end of a specific gaming state, (1) in the lottery for the presence / absence of opening / closing operation of the blade member 71 executed by the main controller 32, the condition of “with opening / closing operation” is satisfied. Or (2) change in the opening / closing operation pattern of the blade member 71, or (3) change in blinking time of the LEDs of the first and second normal display portions 467 and 467, or a combination thereof. is there. Further, the “probability changing function” refers to a probability of a lottery in the main control device 32 (a winning probability of a big hit in the special display unit 465) after a specific gaming state ends, from a low probability (normal state) to a high probability ( This is a function to change the probability variation state.

  The display 460 includes the display substrate 464 described above, a display outer portion 470 surrounding the display substrate 464 and constituting the outer peripheral surface of the display 460, and the front and rear of the display outer portion 470. A display partition portion 472 provided on the front side of the display device substrate 464 so as to fit into the opening that penetrates, and a display cover portion 462 that covers the front side of the display device partition portion 472 (see FIG. 66 or FIG. 67). reference). The display device 460 is configured by the display device outer portion 470 and the display device cover portion 462, and the display device outer portion 470 is fixedly installed on the display device installation portion 448 (see FIG. 64). The display 460 is configured such that a display outer portion 470 that protrudes forward from the display installation portion 448 is fitted to the display through-hole 42d from the rear side (see FIG. 147). In addition, a decorative portion for decorating a region around the display 460 that can be visually recognized through the transparent board body 42 is also integrally formed on the display outer portion 470 (see FIG. 14 or FIG. 16).

  The display unit partitioning portion 472 includes display unit openings 473 penetrating forward and backward corresponding to display units 465, 466, 467, 468, and 469 provided on the front surface of the display substrate 464 ( (See FIG. 66 or FIG. 67). The indicator 460 is capable of visually confirming the blinking of the LEDs and the display of the seven segments through the LEDs constituting the display means 465, 466, 467, 468, and 469 and the display means opening 473 located in front of the seven segments. . In addition, the display 460 is configured such that the display outer portion 470 and the display partition 472 cannot transmit light. As described above, in the display 460, the LEDs and the seven segments are individually accommodated in the display means opening 473 of the display partition 472 so that the light between the display means 465, 466, 467, 468, and 469 is clearly displayed. The display of each display means 465, 466, 467, 468, 469 can be made easy to see. The display unit cover 462 is a transparent member capable of transmitting light, and the front surface constituting the game area 40a is formed smoothly. The display 460 is provided with a transparent display auxiliary cover 474 between the display partition 472 and the display cover 462.

(Display unit)
The display 460 is provided not in the panel main body 42 but in the display installation section 448 provided on the back unit 50 side, and includes the display wiring connected to the display board 464 of the display 460. And can be handled independently. The display device installation portion 448 is provided on the left side of the lower side portion 52 d of the back unit 50 in front of the front surface of the installation plate portion 52, and forms a surface extending in parallel with the rear surface of the panel body 42. In the embodiment, the indicator installation portion 448 is formed integrally with the front passage half 428 of the passage member 420 (see FIG. 58 or 72). Here, the front passage half 428 is provided with a display installation portion 448 that extends to the upper left side of the portion defining the ball passages 410, 414, 416 with the rear passage half 422. . In the display installation portion 448, a display wiring passage 448a is opened corresponding to the rear side of the socket 464a provided on the rear surface of the display substrate 464, and the socket 464a is connected to the rear side from the display wiring passage 448a. (See FIG. 65).

  The display wiring H8 connected to the socket 464a of the display substrate 464 passes through the front side of the installation plate portion 52 of the back unit 50, and the lower left corner of the installation plate portion 52 of the back unit 50 (the socket 464a of the display substrate 464). The lower unit 50 is taken out to the rear side of the back unit 50 through the lower wiring opening 86 and is connected to the left relay board 38 attached to the left board installation unit 60. The display wiring H8 is integrally provided above the lower wiring opening 86 on the rear surface of the back unit 50, and is formed with a wiring hook 68 formed in a bowl shape that opens to the left side, the left-side substrate installation portion 60, and the symbol display. The display wiring H8 is arranged behind the back unit 50 by a wiring hook 68 that is integrally provided in the back unit 50 and is formed in a gap shape between the attachment region of the device 13 and opened upward. (See FIG. 9).

  The display 460 is disposed in a display installation portion 448 provided in the back unit 50, and the display wiring H 8 connected to the display board 464 of the display 460 passes through the lower wiring opening 86 of the back unit 50. The rear unit 50 is pulled out to the rear side. That is, when the gaming board 40 attaches the back unit 50 to the rear side of the board main body 42, if the display wiring H8 connected to the display 460 is pulled out to the rear side of the back unit 50, the display wiring H8. Therefore, it is not necessary to be careful of being sandwiched between the board body 42 and the board body 42 and the back unit 50 can be easily attached.

  As described above, the display unit 460 includes a plurality of display units such as the special display unit 465, the round number display unit 466, the normal display unit 467, the special hold display unit 468, and the normal hold display unit 469. Sockets 464a that are collectively installed on the substrate 464 and connected to the display means 465, 466, 467, 468, and 469 are combined into one. Therefore, the display wiring H8 connected to the display means 465, 466, 467, 468, 469 can be handled collectively, and the wiring process can be simplified. In addition, the display wiring H8 is disposed between the left board mounting portion 60 and the mounting area of the symbol display device 13, but is held by the wiring hook 68. When the display device 13 is attached, the display wiring H8 can be prevented from being sandwiched between the symbol display device 13.

  Since the display 460 faces the front side of the panel main body 42 through the display through hole 42d, it is easier to see than the display 460 disposed on the rear side of the panel main body 42. Since the display 460 is located inside the game area 40a, the display unit 13a of the symbol display device 13 inside the game area 40a and the start prize are compared to the case where the display 460 is installed outside the game area 40a. Since the change of the line of sight can be minimized from the portion where the player gazes, such as the mouths 70a and 70b, the player can visually recognize the display 460 without moving the neck. Therefore, the display 460 is easy to see, and the player can accurately grasp the state of the pachinko machine 10.

(Anti-fraud measures)
The game board 40 includes a fraud detection sensor (detection sensor) 360 as fraud prevention means for detecting electromagnetic or electromagnetic waves by a non-contact fraud means (see FIG. 77 or 78). Here, the non-contact type illegal means emits electricity, magnetism, radio waves, infrared rays, sound waves, etc., and is related to a game state variation such as a control device or a sensor, or a pachinko ball W or a start winning device. It refers to those that affect the movement of the 70 blade members 71 and the like without directly touching the movement. For example, as the non-contact type fraud means, there is a magnet that illegally improves the winning probability to the starting winning ports 70a, 70b by retaining the pachinko balls W around the starting winning ports 70a, 70b. In the embodiment, a magnetic sensor is provided on the game board 40 as the fraud detection sensor 360 in order to prevent fraud by the magnet.

  The game board 40 is provided with a pair of fraud detection sensors 360 and 260 sandwiching the start winning ports 70a and 70b on the left and right (see FIG. 7). The right fraud detection sensor 360 is disposed above the right normal winning opening 452, and the left fraud detection sensor 360 is disposed above the lower left normal winning opening 406. Here, each fraud detection sensor 360 is detachably attached to a corresponding sensor holder 362 provided in the back unit 50, and cannot be visually recognized from the front side. In the embodiment, the sensor holder 362 is provided in the lighting device 300 installed in the lower side portion 52 d of the back unit 50.

(Unauthorized detection sensor)
The fraud detection sensor 360 includes a casing formed in an outer shape of a rectangular bar (see FIG. 54 or FIG. 55), and a pair of lead pieces extending along the longitudinal direction of the casing inside the casing. It is a reed switch, Comprising: A part of lead piece arrange | positioned facing is comprised so that contact / separation is possible by magnetism. In the fraud detection sensor 360, lead pieces made of a ferromagnetic material that are separated in a normal state are brought into contact with each other by magnetism by bringing a magnet close thereto, whereby the circuit is closed. The fraud detection sensor 360 is provided with a socket at one end portion in the longitudinal direction, and is electrically connected to the overall control device 37 via a relay board 38 located in the center by a sensor wiring connected to the socket. The fraud detection sensor 360 may be connected to the main control device 32.

(Sensor holder)
The sensor holder 362 is configured to hold the fraud detection sensor 360 in a posture in which the longitudinal direction extends in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 77 or FIG. 78), and has a posture in which the longitudinal direction is orthogonal to the rear surface of the panel body 42. Lead pieces extend in the front-rear direction inside the casing. Since the left and right fraud detection sensors 360 have the same configuration and the left and right sensor holders 362 have the same configuration, only one will be described below. The sensor holder 362 is provided in a part surrounding the special illumination translucent part 346A in the illumination decoration part 348, and a front holder (holding part) 364 that holds the front part of the fraud detection sensor 360 (see FIG. 55), illumination A rear holder (engaging piece) 368 that is provided on the base member 302 and holds the rear portion of the fraud detection sensor 360 that protrudes through a holder passage 366 that is formed through the illumination base member 302 and the gantry 344 (FIG. 42). , See FIG. 51 or FIG. 55).

  The front holder 364 is formed in the illumination peripheral portion 348 in a bag hole shape that is closed at the front and opened at the rear, and has a posture in which the fraud detection sensor 360 inserted at the front side extends in the longitudinal direction. It is configured to hold (see FIG. 77 or FIG. 78). The right front holder 364 is provided on the lower right side of the portion surrounding the special illumination translucent portion 346A in the illumination peripheral portion 348, and the left front holder 364 is provided in the special illumination transparent portion 348. It is provided on the lower left side of the portion surrounding the light portion 346A (see FIG. 14 or FIG. 16). The front holder 364 and the holder opening 366 are formed so as to be aligned with the short cross section of the casing of the fraud detection sensor 360, and these openings are aligned in the front-rear relationship. The fraud detection sensor 360 inserted from the rear side through the holder opening 366 is held at the front by the front holder 364 and is regulated in the vertical and horizontal directions. Further, the front holder 364 has a front end close to the rear surface of the panel body 42, and a front end of the fraud detection sensor 360 held by the sensor holder 362 is held near the rear surface of the panel body 42 (FIG. 77 or (See FIG. 78).

  The rear holder 368 is provided at the lower edge of a holder opening 366 formed through the illumination base member 302 (see FIG. 42 or FIG. 50). The rear holder 368 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the illumination base member 302 and includes an engagement claw that is hooked on the rear end portion of the fraud detection sensor 360 at the rear end. The rear holder 368 is configured to be elastically deformable in the vertical direction, and the engagement claw engages with the rear end portion of the fraud detection sensor 360, thereby restricting the rearward movement of the fraud detection sensor 360 and moving downward (illegal The fraud detection sensor 360 is allowed to be inserted and removed by bending toward the side retracted from the detection sensor 360.

  The back unit 50 includes access openings (access ports) 81 and 81 formed so as to open in portions corresponding to the sensor holders 362 and 362 in the installation plate portion 52 (see FIGS. 8 to 10). ). That is, the back unit 50 has an access opening 81 positioned so as to overlap the opening opened to the rear of the front holder 364 and the rear holder 368, and the engagement with the fraud detection sensor 360 of the rear holder 368 through the access opening 81. Releasing and insertion / removal of the fraud detection sensor 360 with respect to the front holder 364 are allowed. The right access opening 81 is provided between the central board installation part 60 and the right board installation part 60, and the left access opening 81 is provided between the central board installation part 60 and the left board installation part 60. Is provided. The right access opening 81 partially overlaps the front side of the right relay board 38 attached to the right board installation part 60, but the left access opening 81 is a left relay attached to the left board installation part 60. It is detached from the front side of the board 38 and is exposed behind the game board 40.

  The fraud detection sensor 360 held by the sensor holder 362 is configured such that the rear end portion projects from the access opening 81 to the rear of the back unit 50 (see FIG. 77). The fraud detection sensor 360 has a sensor wiring (not shown) connected to a socket provided at a rear end protruding rearward from the front holder 364 (holder opening 366 of the illumination base member 302). Then, the sensor wiring is connected to the central relay board 38. The rear holder 368 is also configured to protrude from the access opening 81 to the rear of the back unit 50.

  The detectable ranges of the left and right fraud detection sensors 360 and 360 are set so as to extend to the upper and lower start winning ports 70a and 70b of the start winning device 70 and the special winning port 74a of the special winning device 74, respectively. Further, the detectable range of the fraud detection sensor 360 on the right side extends to the normal winning award port 452 on the right side, and the detection range of the fraud detection sensor 360 on the left side extends to the three normal winning award ports 406, 406, 406 arranged on the left side. Is set to The right and left fraud detection sensors 360, 360 are electrically connected to the overall control device 37. When the fraud detection sensors 360, 360 detect magnetism, the lamp, the speaker 33, and the like are controlled under the control of the overall control device 37. The used abnormality notification is configured to be performed.

  The start winning ports 70a and 70b of the start winning device 70, which triggers the start of the symbol variation game by the display 460, are parts that are easily targeted by an unauthorized player who intends to perform an illegal act using a magnet. is there. As this fraudulent act, the pachinko ball W is attracted by a magnet close to the glass window 14a of the front frame 14, and the pachinko ball is directly put into the upper start winning port 70a or the opened lower start winning port 70b. Actions for winning W, or gathering pachinko balls W with magnets on a predetermined guide path formed by game nails 43 planted in the game area 40a, and clogging them deliberately, toward the start winning ports 70a, 70b An action of causing the pachinko sphere W to flow down with high probability.

  The gaming board 40 is provided with fraud detection sensors 360, 360 on the left and right sides of the start winning ports 70a, 70b on the rear side of the board main body 42 (see FIG. 7), and magnetic detection by the fraud detection sensors 360, 360 is performed. The possible range extends to an area where the pachinko ball W is intentionally blocked in the vicinity of the upper and lower start winning openings 70a and 70b, the special winning opening 74a and the normal winning openings 406 and 452 in the game area 40a. Therefore, when the magnet is brought close to the glass window 14a facing the front side in the vicinity of the upper and lower start winning openings 70a and 70b, the special winning opening 74a and the normal winning openings 406 and 452, the magnetism of the magnets is detected by the fraud detection sensors 360 and 360. It is possible to detect that fraudulent activity is being carried out by detecting at. When the fraud detection sensor 360 detects magnetism, an abnormality notification is performed under the control of the overall control device 37, and fraud can be prevented. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is set not only to act to increase the induction probability of the pachinko ball W to the start winning ports 70a and 70b illegally but also to the special winning port 74a. When the special prize opening 74a is opened at the time of the occurrence of "big hit", the act of illegally winning the pachinko ball W using a magnet, and the pachinko ball W directly winning the left and right normal prize winning holes 406, 452 using the magnet By doing so, it is possible to detect any act such as illegally earning a prize ball. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 according to the embodiment can detect fraudulent acts that directly target the upper and lower start winning ports 70a and 70b, the special winning ports 74a, and the normal winning ports 406 and 452.

  Thus, the game board 40 can access the rear holder 368 holding the fraud detection sensor 360 and the fraud detection sensor 360 via the access opening 81 from the rear side of the back unit 50. The fraud detection sensor 360 can be attached and detached without removing it from the panel main body 42. Further, since the sensor holder 362 holds the rear end portion of the fraud detection sensor 360 so as to protrude rearward from the access opening 81, the fraud detection sensor 360 can be easily attached and detached from the rear side of the back unit 50. Further, the sensor holder 362 is configured such that the rear holder 368 that prevents the fraud detection sensor 360 from coming out rearward is projected rearward from the access opening 81, so that the rear holder 50 is rearward from the rear unit 50. 368 is easy to operate. Therefore, the fraud detection sensor 360 can be easily attached and removed, and the maintainability of the fraud detection sensor 360 is extremely excellent. Moreover, since the sensor holder 362 holds the socket provided at the rear end of the fraud detection sensor 360 so as to protrude from the access opening 81, it is easy to connect the sensor wiring to the socket, and the sensor wiring Easy to handle.

(About the first movable effect device)
Next, the first movable effect device (movable effect device) 500 will be described below. The first movable effect device 500 performs a movable effect when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and includes a movable device 502 including a pair of movable members 501 and 501 that reciprocate in the left-right direction, and the movable device 502. It basically includes a movable member (support member) 503 that reciprocates in the vertical direction on the front side and a movable member device 505 that includes an operating body 504. 11 and 16, the first movable effect device 500 is disposed on the front surface of the upper side portion 52a of the installation plate portion 52 in the back unit 50, and is provided with an edge on which the game board installation portion 94 is provided. And the upper edge of the display opening 53.

(About movable body device)
The movable body device 502 is located on the rear side in the first movable effect device 500, and is installed in an upper space 506 between the upper side portion 52a of the back unit 50 and the rear surface of the panel body 42 (FIG. 6). reference). As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, the movable body device 502 includes a first case body (case body) 507, a pair of movable bodies 501 and 501 disposed in the first case body 507, A movable body relay board (relay board) 509 to which a first movable body motor (motor, second driving means) 508 for moving the movable bodies 501 and 501 and a wiring 501a derived from the movable body 501 are relay-connected. And a base sheet metal (base body) 510 disposed on the front side of the first case body 507, and a first movable body decoration member 730 that covers the first case body 507 from the front side. The

(About the first case)
As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the first case body 507 is formed in a rectangular plate shape that is long in the left-right direction, and is attached to the upper side portion 52a of the back unit 50. The first case body 507 is formed on the front side of the first case body 507, and includes a pair of movable body accommodating portions 511 and 511 that accommodate the movable bodies 501 and 501, and the rear side of the first case body 507. And a substrate housing portion 512 for housing the movable body relay substrate 509.

  The pair of movable body accommodating portions 511 and 511 are formed to be separated from each other on the left and right sides of a central portion in the left-right direction of the first case body 507 (hereinafter referred to as a case body central portion). Each movable body accommodating portion 511 is formed so as to open forward from a movable body facing surface portion 513 facing forward and a front wall portion 514 projecting forward from an edge of the movable body facing surface portion 513. 501 is attached to the front side of the movable body facing surface portion 513 so as to be capable of reciprocating in the left-right direction (direction intersecting the moving direction of the movable member 503). Between the left and right movable body facing surface portions 513 and 513, a rack facing surface portion 515 facing the front and connected to the both movable body facing surface portions 513 and 513 is located above the substrate housing portion 512. A first movable body long groove portion (long groove portion) 516 that opens in the front-rear direction is formed on each movable body facing surface portion 513 so as to extend in the left-right direction (the direction in which both the movable bodies 501 and 501 are separated). Further, on the rear surface of the movable body facing surface portion 513, fitting concave portions 517 and 517 extending in the left-right direction corresponding to the respective first movable body long groove portions 516 are provided. A rack portion insertion hole 518 that opens in the left-right direction is formed in the front wall portion 514 on the center side of the case body in each movable body accommodating portion 511. In addition, a front wall portion through-hole portion (through-hole portion) 519 that is open in the vertical direction is formed in the lower front wall portion 514 of each movable body housing portion 511, and the outer side of each movable body housing portion 511 is also outside. A front wall boss receiving portion 514a is recessed in the front wall portion 514 (side away from the case body central portion).

  The substrate accommodating portion 512 is opened rearward from a substrate facing surface portion 520 that is located in front of the movable body facing surface portion 513 and faces forward, and a rear wall portion 521 that protrudes rearward from an edge portion of the substrate facing surface portion 520. Formed. The substrate facing surface portion 520 is formed in a rectangular shape below the rack portion facing surface portion 515 between the movable body facing surface portions 513 and 513, and the front surface of the substrate facing surface portion 520 is connected to the front end portion of the front wall portion 514. Located on the same plane. A substrate facing surface portion screw hole 520a that is open in the front-rear direction is formed in the substrate facing surface portion 520, and substrate facing surface portion positioning protrusions 520b and 520b that protrude rearward are spaced apart from each other on the rear surface of the substrate facing surface portion 520. Two are formed. The left and right rear wall portions 521 are each formed with a rear wall portion through-hole portion (through-hole portion) 522 that opens in the left-right direction, and the upper rear wall portion 521 has a rear portion that opens in the vertical direction. A wall insertion hole 523 is formed. Further, a rear wall screw hole 521a that opens in the front-rear direction is formed in the lower rear wall 521 so as to protrude downward, and a cable insertion portion 524 that opens in the vertical direction is provided behind the rear wall 521. The end is recessed in a rectangular shape. Substrate positioning ribs 525 extending in the left-right direction are formed on the lower rear wall portion 521 so as to protrude slightly upward and away from the substrate facing surface portion 520.

  Here, in the first case body 507 of the embodiment, the left and right movable body accommodating portions 511 and 511 are provided on the front side of the first case body 507, while the substrate accommodating portion 512 is the both movable body accommodating portions 511 and 511. The first case body 507 is formed on the rear side. That is, since the movable body accommodating portions 511 and 511 and the substrate accommodating portion 512 are formed without overlapping the first case body 507 in the front-rear direction, the front-rear dimension of the first case body 507 can be made compact. Therefore, the movable body device 502 can be installed in a narrow upper space 506 between the panel main body 42 and the upper side portion 52a of the back unit 50, and the degree of freedom of installation can be improved. In addition, since the substrate housing portion 512 is provided using the space between the both movable body housing portions 511 and 511, the first case body 507 is prevented from being bulky in the direction in which the movable body housing portions 511 and 511 are arranged. Thus, the first case body 507 can be made compact.

  The first case body 507 is formed such that a pair of guide portion facing surface portions 526 and 526 sandwich the substrate housing portion 512 from the left and right. Each guide portion facing surface portion 526 is located behind the substrate facing surface portion 520, and the edge of the guide portion facing surface portion 526 on the case body center side is connected to the rear end portion of the rear wall portion 521. Yes. In addition, a guide portion wall portion 527 that protrudes forward is formed on the lower edge portion and the outer edge portion of the guide portion facing surface portion 526. A first movable body guide portion (guide portion) 528 that opens forward is defined by the guide portion facing surface portion 526, the rear wall portion 521, and the guide portion wall portion 527.

  Here, the guide portion wall portion 527 is not formed on the upper edge portion of the guide portion facing surface portion 526, and the internal space of the first movable body guide portion 528 has a front wall portion through-hole portion 519. And communicates with the internal space of the movable body accommodating portion 511. A guide portion screw hole 526a is formed on the rear surface of the guide portion facing surface portion 526 in the vicinity of the rear wall portion 521 and opens rearward. A pair of guide portion installation screw holes 526b and 526b are formed. The first case body 507 is screwed into the guide portion installation screw holes 526b through the through holes provided in the upper side portion 52a of the back unit 50, whereby the first case body 507 ( The movable body device 502) is screwed to the upper side portion 52a.

  The first case body 507 includes a rack portion facing surface portion 515 and a rack portion front wall portion 534 that protrudes forward from the upper and lower edges of the rack portion facing surface portion 515 and opens to the front. A rack portion 530 (to be described later) is slidably received in the rack portion storage portion 529. The rack portion accommodating portion 529 extends in the left-right direction and communicates with the internal spaces of the left and right movable body accommodating portions 511 and 511 via the rack portion insertion holes 518 and 518 provided on the left and right sides of the rack portion accommodating portion 529. is doing. The upper rack portion front wall portion 534 is formed with an arcuate wall portion 531 protruding upward at the center portion in the left-right direction. In addition, two rack portion hooks 532 and 532 that protrude forward and are elastically deformable are formed on the upper rack portion front wall portion 534 with the arcuate wall portion 531 interposed therebetween. The upper surface of the lower rack portion front wall portion 534 constitutes a rack portion sliding surface 533 on which the rack portion 530 can slide. Further, a pair of rack portion accommodating portion screw holes 534a and 534a that are opened forward are formed on the left and right end portions of the lower rack portion front wall portion 534.

  Side facing surface portions 535 and 536 formed on the same surface as the substrate facing surface portion 520 are respectively provided on the left and right end portions of the first case body 507. On the front side of the left side facing surface portion 535 (hereinafter, referred to as the left side facing surface portion 535), a left side facing surface portion boss receiving portion 535a is recessed in the vicinity of the first movable body guide portion 528, and A left side facing surface portion boss portion 535c having a left side facing surface portion screw hole 535b opened rearward is formed to protrude forward. In addition, a plurality of left side facing surface portion positioning protrusions 535d protruding rearward are formed on the rear surface of the left side facing surface portion 535. Further, a left side rear wall portion 537 is formed so as to protrude rearward from the lower edge portion of the left side facing surface portion 535, and a left side rear wall screw hole 537a opened in the front-rear direction on the lower surface of the left side rear wall portion 537. Is formed.

  A right side facing surface boss receiving portion 536a is recessed in front of the right side facing surface portion 536 (hereinafter referred to as right side facing surface portion 536). Further, a right side rear wall portion 538 is formed to protrude rearward from the lower edge portion of the right side facing surface portion 536, and a right side rear wall screw hole 538a is opened in the front-rear direction on the lower surface of the right side rear wall portion 538. Is formed. The upper edge portion of the right-side facing surface portion 536 is connected to the front end portion of the front wall portion 514, and a side wiring guide path 539 extending in the left-right direction is provided on the rear side of the right-side facing surface portion 536. A wall 514 and a right rear wall 538 are defined. Further, a side wiring hook 540 that is separated from the rear surface of the right side facing surface part 536 and extends to the side wiring guide path 539 side is formed on the lower front wall part 514 in the right movable body housing part 511. ing.

(About movable body)
83 and 84, the movable body 501 includes a movable body base 541 that is movably disposed in the movable body housing portion 511, and a movable body design that is disposed on the front side of the movable body base 541. It is basically composed of a portion 542 and a movable body light emitting device (light emitting device) 543 disposed between the movable body base 541 and the movable body design portion 542.

  The movable body base 541 is a substantially rectangular thin plate member, and two movable body base through-hole portions 541a and 541a that are open in the front-rear direction are formed diagonally. Also, two movable body base positioning holes 541b and 541b that open in the front-rear direction are provided in the vicinity of the lower edge of the movable body base 541 so as to be separated from each other in the left-right direction. Further, a movable body base rib 541c that protrudes forward is formed on the periphery of the movable body base 541, and a base mounting portion 544 that extends in the left-right direction protrudes rearward on the rear surface of the movable body base 541. Is formed. The base mounting portion 544 is set to have a length in the left-right direction shorter than that of the first movable body long groove portion 516, and the vertical dimension of the base body mounting portion 544 is the vertical direction of the first movable body long groove portion 516. When the movable body base 541 is disposed on the movable body facing surface portion 513, the base body mounting portion 544 is configured to face the first movable body long groove portion 516. The base attachment portion 544 includes a pair of base attachment portion screw holes 544a and 544a that are provided at the left and right ends and open rearward, and a plurality (four in the embodiment) of base attachment protrusions 544b that protrude rearward. I have. As shown in FIG. 84, the base attachment protrusions 544b are spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance and are displaced from each other vertically.

  A sliding member 545 that is substantially the same length as the base mounting portion 544 and extends in the left-right direction is mounted on the base mounting portion 544. The vertical dimension of the sliding member 545 is set larger than the vertical dimension of the first movable body long groove 516 and smaller than the vertical dimension of the fitting recess 517, and the sliding member 545 is configured to slidably fit into the fitting recess 517. Further, the thickness dimension of the sliding member 545 in the front-rear direction is set to be smaller than the depth from the rear surface of the movable body facing surface portion 513 in the fitting recess 517, and the sliding member 545 is fitted into the fitting recess 517. At this time, the rear surface of the sliding member 545 is configured not to protrude rearward from the rear surface of the movable body facing surface portion 513 (see FIG. 85). That is, the sliding member 545 can be prevented from projecting rearward from the fitting recess 517 and the first case body 507 can be prevented from becoming bulky in the front-rear direction, and the size of the first case body 507 in the front-rear direction can be kept compact. The sliding member 545 includes a pair of sliding member through holes 545a and 545a that are formed in the left and right ends and open in the front-rear direction, and a plurality of sliding member positioning holes 545b that open in the front-rear direction. . The sliding member positioning hole 545b is provided correspondingly to the base mounting portion protrusion 544b arranged in the base mounting portion 544 so as to be shifted in the vertical direction. It is not getting.

  The sliding member 545 is configured such that each base mounting portion projection 544b is fitted into the corresponding sliding member positioning hole 545b with the base mounting portion 544 facing the first movable body long groove portion 516 from the front side. Yes. Then, the sliding member through hole 545a is aligned with the base body attaching portion screw hole 544a, and the screw is inserted into the base body attaching portion screw hole 544a through the sliding member through hole 545a, so that the sliding member 545 is fitted. It is screwed to the base mounting portion 544 in a state of being fitted in the mating recess 517. At this time, the upper and lower edges of the first movable body long groove 516 are sandwiched between the sliding member 545 and the rear surface of the movable body base 541, and the movable body base 541 (movable body 501) cannot be detached from the movable body storage section 511. It becomes.

  Each movable body base 541 has a movable body connecting piece extending from the inner side portion (that is, the right side of the left movable body base 541 and the left side of the right movable body base 541) toward the center of the case body. 546 is formed. With the movable body base 541 attached to the movable body accommodating portion 511, the open end side of the movable body coupling piece 546 extends into the rack portion accommodating portion 529 through the rack portion insertion hole 518. . On the front side of the open end portion of the movable body connecting piece 546, a connecting concave portion 547 opened toward the central portion of the case body is formed, and a connecting protrusion 547a protruding forward is formed in the connecting concave portion 547. (See the enlarged view of FIG. 83).

  The movable body light-emitting device 543 disposed on the front side of the movable body base 541 is mounted on the front surface of the light-emitting substrate 548 and the movable body light-emitting substrate 548 formed in a shape that substantially matches the outer shape of the movable body base 541. The movable body light emitting element 549 is turned on at a predetermined timing, and the movable body design portion 542 is caused to emit light. The movable body light-emitting substrate 548 has movable body substrate recesses 548a and 548a formed at corners corresponding to the movable body base through-hole portion 541a of the movable body base 541, and movable body positioning holes 548b, A pair of 548b is formed so as to be separated from each other on the left and right. In addition, a movable body light emitting connector portion 548c is provided on the front surface of the movable body light emitting substrate 548 so as to be biased toward the inside (the right side for the left movable body light emitting substrate 548 and the left side for the right movable body light emitting substrate 548). A wiring 501a is connected to the connector portion 548c.

  The movable body design portion 542 includes a design surface portion 550 formed in a shape that substantially matches the outer shape of the movable body base 541 and the movable body light emitting substrate 548, and a design portion wall that protrudes rearward from the peripheral edge portion of the design surface portion 550. It is formed in a box shape that opens backward from the portion 551. The design surface portion 550 is light-transmitting and has a pattern imitating an eyeball on the front surface. The left and right movable bodies 501 and 501 move in the left-right direction so that the eyeball moves. Is. On the rear surface of the design surface portion 550, two design surface portion boss portions 550a and 550a arranged in a diagonal line are projected rearward, and two design surface portion protrusions 550b and 550b are spaced apart from each other on the lower side of the design surface portion 550. Projecting backward. Then, the design surface portion protrusion 550b inserted through the movable body substrate positioning hole 548b is fitted into the movable body substrate positioning hole 541b, and each design surface portion boss portion 550a is moved to the movable body substrate through hole 541a via the movable body substrate recess 548a. The design surface portion 550 is screwed to the movable body base 541 by screwing a screw into the design surface boss portion 550a through the through hole portion 541a. At this time, the peripheral edge portion of the movable body light emitting substrate 548 is sandwiched and fixed by the rear end portion of the design portion wall portion 551 and the front end portion of the movable body base rib 541c.

  The inner design portion wall portion 551 of the movable body design portion 542 (that is, the right design portion wall portion 551 in the left movable body design portion 542 and the left design portion wall portion 551 in the right movable body design portion 542). Is formed with a design portion wall portion opening 551a that opens in the left-right direction, and the wiring 501a of the movable body light emitting device 543 is drawn out through the design portion wall portion opening 551a. The design portion wall portion 551 in which the design portion wall portion opening 551a is formed is provided with a wiring locking portion 551b, and the wiring 501a drawn through the design wall wall portion opening 551a is formed in the wiring locking portion 551b. Locked. As shown in FIG. 86, the wiring 501a locked to the wiring locking portion 551b is drawn out to the first movable body guide portion 528 via the front wall portion through-hole portion 519, and further to the rear wall portion through-hole portion. It is pulled out to the rear side of the substrate facing surface portion 520 through 522.

  A rack portion 530 that connects the left and right movable bodies 501 and 501 is slidably disposed in the rack portion accommodating portion 529. The rack portion 530 is provided on each of the left and right sides of the rack main body 552, the rectangular rack main body 552 extending in the left-right direction, the rack tooth portion 553 configured with a plurality of teeth protruding upward in the left-right direction, respectively. Rack portion connecting pieces 554, 554. The rack body 552 is slidably placed on the rack part sliding surface 533 in the rack part accommodating part 529. In addition, a rectangular plate-shaped rack portion detection piece 555 is formed on the left side portion of the rack body 552 so as to protrude forward. Further, the rack body 552 is formed with a gear escape recess 556 that is recessed downward from the upper edge. Each rack portion connecting piece 554 is formed in a shape that can face the connecting recess 547 of the movable body base 541, and the rack portion connecting hole 554a into which the connecting protrusion 547a provided in the connecting recess 547 can be inserted is provided in the front-rear direction. Opened and formed on each rack portion connecting piece 554. Then, the movable body bases 541 and 541 (movable bodies 501 and 501) are coupled to the left and right sides of the rack body 552 by inserting the coupling protrusions 547a into the rack portion coupling holes 554a from the rear.

  The front opening of the rack portion accommodating portion 529 is closed by a motor mounting board 557. As shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the motor mounting board 557 is a rectangular thin plate member to which the first movable body motor 508 is mounted on the front surface, and is a hook opened in the front-rear direction at the left and right corners on the upper side. Engagement holes 558 and 558 are formed corresponding to the rack hooks 532 and 532. The motor mounting board 557 is formed with motor mounting board through holes 557a and 557a that open in the front-rear direction at the lower left and right corners, corresponding to the rack part housing part screw holes 534a and 534a. Then, a rack hook 532 corresponding to the hook engaging hole 558 is inserted and engaged, and the rack portion accommodating portion screw hole 534a is inserted through the motor mounting board through hole 557a aligned with the rack portion accommodating portion screw hole 534a. Then, the motor mounting board 557 is screwed to the first case body 507 in a state where the front opening of the rack portion housing portion 529 is closed.

  The motor mounting board 557 is formed with two motor mounting board screw holes 557b and 557b that open in the front-rear direction, and a circular motor mounting board insertion hole 557c that opens in the front-rear direction. Further, on the left side of the front surface of the motor mounting board 557, a movable body original position sensor installation portion 559 is defined by a plurality of motor mounting board ribs 557d protruding forward. A plurality of sensor installation protrusions 559a protruding forward and a sensor installation screw hole 559b opening forward are provided in the movable body original position sensor installation portion 559. Furthermore, a long groove 560 (see FIG. 88) for the detected piece that extends in the left-right direction from the movable body original position sensor installation portion 559 to the left edge of the motor attachment substrate 557 is opened in the front-rear direction. In addition, a detection piece protection portion 561 is formed to protrude forward so as to cover the detection piece long groove 560 from the front side. Then, with the motor mounting substrate 557 attached to the first case body 507, the rack portion detected piece 555 is inserted into the detected piece long groove 560 from the rear side, and the rack is detected via the detected piece long groove 560. The part detection piece 555 is allowed to slide in the left-right direction.

  The first movable body motor 508 is driven and controlled by the overall control device 37, and the first movable body motor drive shaft 508a of the first movable body motor 508 is rotated forward and backward. The first movable body motor 508 includes a pair of first movable body motor mounting pieces 508b and 508b that protrude outward, and each first movable body motor mounting piece 508b has a first movable body motor through hole. 508c is formed to open in the front-rear direction. Then, the first movable body motor drive shaft 508a is inserted into the motor mounting board through hole 557a from the front side, and the first movable body motor through hole 508c is aligned with the motor mounting board screw hole 557b, thereby moving the first movable body motor driving shaft 508a. The first movable body motor 508 is screwed to the motor mounting board 557 by screwing a screw into the motor mounting board screw hole 557b through the body motor through hole 508c. Also, a first movable body drive gear (drive gear) 562 is connected to the tip of the first movable body motor drive shaft 508a inserted through the motor mounting board insertion hole 557c. The first movable body drive gear 562 includes a drive gear coupling boss 562a protruding rearward, and the first drive gear coupling hole 562b passing through the rotation center of the first movable body drive gear 562 is driven. The gear connecting boss 562a is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction. The first movable body drive gear 562 is connected to the first drive gear coupling hole 562b by inserting the first movable body motor drive shaft 508a from the front side.

  In a state where the motor mounting substrate 557 is attached to the first case body 507, the first movable body drive gear 562 faces the lower side of the arcuate wall portion 531 in the rack portion accommodating portion 529, and the first movable body drive is performed. The gear 562 is configured to mesh with the rack tooth portion 553 of the rack portion 530 from above. When the first movable body motor 508 is driven and the first movable body motor drive shaft 508a rotates in one direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 89), the first movable body drive gear 562 moves in one direction. The rack portion 530 engaged with the gear 562 is configured to slide to the left. Thus, the left and right movable bodies 501 and 501 are configured to move to the left in synchronization. When the first movable body drive gear 562 rotates the first movable body motor drive shaft 508a in the other direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 90), the first movable body drive gear 562 moves in the other direction. It rotates and the rack part 530 is comprised so that it may slide to the right. As a result, the left and right movable bodies 501 and 501 move to the right in synchronization.

  The drive gear coupling boss 562a faces the gear escape recess 556 so that it does not interfere with the drive gear coupling boss 562a when the rack 530 slides. Further, the first movable body motor 508 is provided with a first movable body motor connector portion 508d protruding obliquely downward, and a wiring 508e is connected to the first movable body motor connector portion 508d. . As shown in FIG. 86, the wiring 508e connected to the first movable body motor connector portion 508d is inserted through the rear wall insertion hole 523 and pulled out to the rear side of the substrate facing surface portion 520. Yes.

  The movable body original position sensor installation unit 559 is provided with a movable body original position detection device 563 that detects the original position of the movable body 501. The movable body original position detecting device 563 includes a movable body original position mounting board 564 and a movable body original position sensor 565 provided on the rear surface of the movable body original position mounting board 564. The movable body original position mounting board 564 has a plurality of movable body original position board positioning holes 564a that open in the front-rear direction, corresponding to the sensor installation protrusions 559a, and a movable body original position board 564 corresponding to the sensor installation screw holes 559b. A position substrate through hole 564b is formed to open in the front-rear direction. Then, a sensor installation protrusion 559a corresponding to the movable body original position substrate positioning hole 564a is fitted, and the sensor installation screw hole 559b is inserted into the sensor installation screw hole 559b through the movable body original position substrate through hole 564b aligned with the sensor installation screw hole 559b. The movable body original position mounting board 564 is screwed to the movable body original position sensor installation portion 559 by screwing the screws. Further, a movable body original position connector portion 564c is provided on the front surface of the movable body original position mounting substrate 564, and a wiring 564d is connected to the movable body original position connector portion 564c. As shown in FIG. 86, the wiring 564d connected to the movable body in-situ connector 564c is inserted through the rear wall insertion hole 523 and pulled out to the rear side of the substrate facing surface 520.

  The movable body original position sensor 565 is formed in a U shape with a movable body original position detecting recess 565a provided at the upper and lower center positions, and the movable body original position mounting substrate 564 is attached to the movable body original position sensor installation portion 559. The movable body original position detecting recess 565a is configured to face the front side of the long groove 560 for the detected piece. And the rack part to-be-detected piece 555 which protrudes ahead via the to-be-detected piece long groove 560 is comprised so that the movable body original position detection recessed part 565a may pass. The movable body original position sensor 565 detects the original positions of the movable bodies 501 and 501 when the rack portion detected piece 555 passes through the movable body original position detecting recess 565a. 86, the original positions of the movable bodies 501 and 501 are set to positions where the distances between the movable bodies 501 and the first movable body drive gear 562 (case body central portion) are equal, as shown in FIG. At the original positions of the bodies 501, 501, the left and right eyeballs face forward.

(About the relay board for movable bodies)
The movable body relay substrate 509 is set in a shape that matches the substrate facing surface portion 520 and is disposed in contact with the rear surface of the substrate facing surface portion 520. In the movable body relay substrate 509, movable body substrate positioning holes 509a and 509a corresponding to the substrate facing surface portion positioning projections 520b are formed in the upper left and right corners so as to open in the front-rear direction, respectively, and both movable Between the body substrate positioning holes 509a and 509a, a movable body substrate through hole 509b corresponding to the substrate facing surface screw hole 520a is formed to open in the front-rear direction. Then, the lower end portion of the movable body relay substrate 509 faces between the substrate positioning rib 525 provided in the substrate housing portion 512 and the rear surface of the substrate facing surface portion 520, and the substrate facing corresponding to each movable body substrate positioning hole 509a. The surface portion positioning projection 520b is inserted. Further, by screwing a screw into the substrate facing surface portion screw hole 520a through the movable body substrate through hole 509b aligned with the substrate facing surface portion screw hole 520a, the movable body relay substrate 509 is moved to the rear surface of the substrate facing surface portion 520. Screwed on. As shown in FIG. 85, the movable body relay substrate 509 attached to the substrate facing surface portion 520 is accommodated in the substrate accommodating portion 512, and the rear surface of the movable body relay substrate 509 is the rear end of the rear wall portion 521. It is located in front of the part. Thus, the movable body relay substrate 509 can be prevented from interfering, and the dimensions of the movable body device 502 in the front-rear direction can be kept compact.

  On the rear surface of the movable body relay board 509, a pair of movable body wiring connector portions (connector portions) 509 c and 509 c, a flat cable connector portion 509 d, and a movable body external connection connector portion are separated in the left-right direction. 509e. As shown in FIG. 86, the left movable body wiring connector portion 509c has a wiring 501a of the left movable body 501 drawn out to the rear side of the substrate facing surface portion 520 through the left rear wall through hole 522. Are to be connected. On the other hand, the right movable body wiring connector portion 509c is connected to the wiring 501a of the right movable body 501 drawn out to the rear side of the substrate facing surface portion 520 through the right rear wall through-hole portion 522. It has become. Further, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, a flat cable (wiring) 566 in which a plurality of wirings are bundled in a plane is connected to the flat cable connector portion 509d. The flat cable 566 connected to the flat cable connector portion 509d is drawn out below the first case body 507 via the cable insertion portion 524.

  A wiring pressing member 567 is disposed at the rear of the first case body 507 at the center lower portion in the left-right direction. The wiring pressing member 567 is a member that is long in the left-right direction, and is formed with a pair of pressing member through holes 567a, 567a that are open in the front-rear direction. Then, both pressing member passage holes 567a and 657a are aligned with the corresponding guide portion screw holes 526a and 526a of the corresponding first movable body guide portion 528, and screws are inserted into the guide portion screw holes 526a through the holding member passage holes 567a. The wiring pressing member 567 is screwed to the rear side of the first case body 507 by screwing. At the left and right ends of the wiring pressing member 567, wiring pressing pieces 567b and 567b extending away from the rear surface of the guide portion facing surface portion 526 are formed.

  Furthermore, the wiring pressing member 567 is formed with a cable pressing plate portion 567c having a shape matching the opening of the cable insertion portion 524 so as to protrude forward (see FIG. 79). When the wiring pressing member 567 is attached to the first case body 507, the cable pressing plate portion 567c faces the cable insertion portion 524, and the front end portion of the cable pressing plate portion 567c is the cable insertion portion 524. It is designed to be slightly separated from the edge. That is, when the wiring pressing member 567 is attached to the first case body 507, the flat cable 566 is sandwiched between the edge portions of the cable pressing plate portion 567c and the cable insertion portion 524, and as shown in FIG. The cable 566 is pressed down. As shown in FIG. 85, the wirings 508e and 564d connected to the first movable body motor 508 and the movable body original position detecting device 563 are locked to the left side (right side in FIG. 85) wiring pressing piece 567b. The first case body 507 is drawn to the left side along the rear surface. In addition, the wiring 509f connected to the movable body external connection connector 509e of the movable body relay board 509 is also locked to the left wiring pressing piece 567b, and leftward along the rear surface of the first case body 507. It is routed and connected to the relay board 38 provided on the rear side of the back unit 50.

(About relay board for movable motor)
A movable motor relay board 568 is disposed on the rear surface of the left side facing surface portion 535. The movable body motor relay substrate 568 is formed in a shape matching the left side facing surface portion 535 and attached with the front surface of the movable body motor relay substrate 568 in contact with the rear surface of the left side facing surface portion 535. The movable body motor relay board 568 is formed with a plurality of movable body motor board positioning holes 568a corresponding to the left-side facing surface portion positioning projections 535d and corresponding to the left-side facing surface portion screw holes 535b. A movable body motor substrate through hole 568b is formed to open in the front-rear direction. Then, the left-side facing surface portion positioning projection 535d is fitted into the movable body motor substrate positioning hole 568a, and the left-side facing surface portion screw hole is inserted through the movable body motor substrate through-hole 568b aligned with the left-side facing surface portion screw hole 535b. By screwing a screw into 535b, the movable body motor relay board 568 is screwed to the rear surface of the left side facing surface portion 535. The movable body motor relay board 568 is provided with a movable body motor connector section 568c and a movable body original position sensor connector section 568d. The wiring 508e of the first movable body motor 508 and the movable body original position are respectively provided. The wiring 564d of the detection device 563 is connected (see FIG. 85). Further, the movable body motor relay board 568 is provided with a movable body motor external connection connector portion 568e, and the wiring 568f connected to the movable body motor external connection connector portion 568e is connected to the movable body external connection connector portion 568e. Together with the wiring 509f connected to 509e, it is connected to the relay board 38 of the back unit 50.

(About base sheet metal)
The base sheet metal 510 is made of a conductive metal material, and is configured to support the load of the entire movable body device 502. Further, as will be described later, support case members 569 and 569 of the movable member device 505 are attached to the base metal plate 510 so as to support the load of the movable member device 505. That is, the base metal plate 510 supports the entire load of the first movable effect device 500 and has high rigidity and strength. 93 and 94, the base sheet metal 510 is formed to be long in the left-right direction, and the dimensions of the left and right long sides thereof are longer than the upper edge of the display opening 53 of the back unit 50, It is set to be slightly smaller than the horizontal dimension of the upper side portion 52 a in the installation plate portion 52. A base metal plate rectangular recess 570 is formed in the base metal plate 510 by cutting out the central portion side in the left-right direction into a rectangular shape from the upper edge, and the base metal plate 510 is disposed on the front side of the first case body 507. At this time, the left and right movable bodies 501 and 501 are configured to face the base sheet metal rectangular recess 570. The base sheet metal 510 is formed with base sheet metal support surface parts 740 and 740 on both sides outside the base sheet metal rectangular recess 570. As shown in FIG. 85, these base metal plate support surface portions 740 and 740 protrude outward from the left and right side portions of the first case body 507 in a state where the base metal plate 510 is attached to the first case body 507. (See FIG. 85).

  The base sheet metal 510 is formed with a pair of base sheet metal through holes 510a and 510a that are located below the base sheet metal rectangular recess 570 and open in the front-rear direction. A base sheet metal relief 510b is recessed in the part. The base metal plate escape portion 510 b is positioned on the front side of the cable insertion portion 524 when the base metal plate 510 is disposed on the first case body 507. The left base sheet metal through hole 510a corresponds to the left side facing surface boss receiving part 535a of the first case body 507, and the right base sheet metal through hole 510a is the right side facing surface part of the first case body 507. It corresponds to the boss receiving portion 536a. A base sheet metal fitting hole 510c that opens in the front-rear direction is formed in the left base sheet metal support surface part 740, corresponding to the left side facing surface part boss part 535c. Each base sheet metal support surface portion 740 is formed with a base sheet metal through hole 510d opened in the front-rear direction, and a plurality of base sheet metal positioning holes 510e having a smaller diameter than the base sheet metal through hole 510d are opened in the front-rear direction. Is formed. Furthermore, each base sheet metal support surface portion 740 is formed with a base sheet metal screw hole 510f that opens in the front-rear direction, and a first rotation shaft (rotation shaft) 571 and a front surface of the base sheet metal support surface portion 740 are provided. A second rotation shaft (second rotation shaft) 572 located on the inner side above the first rotation shaft 571 is provided so as to protrude forward. A left ground screw hole 573 is formed in the left base sheet metal support surface portion 740 so as to be close to the left edge and open in the front-rear direction. Further, a right ground screw hole 574 is formed in the right base sheet metal support surface portion 740 so as to be close to the upper edge portion and open in the front-rear direction.

  Here, the base sheet metal 510 is configured such that the left and right longitudinal sides extend along the upper edge of the display opening 53 in a state where the movable body device 502 is attached to the upper side 52 a of the back unit 50. When the base sheet metal 510 is attached to the upper side part 52a of the back unit 50, as shown in FIG. 8, the rear surface of the left base sheet metal support surface part 740 faces the left ground opening 87, and the left ground screw hole 573. Is exposed to the rear surface of the rear unit 50 through the left-side ground opening 87. Similarly, the base sheet metal 510 is configured such that the rear surface of the right base sheet metal support surface portion 740 faces the right ground opening 88 and the right ground screw hole 574 is exposed to the rear surface of the back unit 50 through the right ground opening 88. Has been.

(About the first movable body decorative member)
As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, the first movable body decoration member 730 is disposed on the front side of the first case body 507 and constitutes the design surface of the movable body device 502. On the front surface of the movable body decoration member 730 for 1 is decorated to imitate the character's face. The first movable body decorative member 730 is formed with a pair of upper decorative member boss portions 730a and 730a that protrude rearward from the upper portion of the rear surface. The left upper decorative member boss portion 730a corresponds to the left front wall boss receiving portion 514a in the first case body 507, and the right upper decorative member boss portion 730a is also the right side in the first case body 507. Corresponding to the front wall boss receiving portion 514a. In addition, a pair of lower decorative member boss portions 730b and 730b which are located below the upper decorative member boss portions 730a and 730a and project rearward are formed on the rear surface of the first movable body decorative member 730 so as to be separated from each other in the left and right directions. Has been. The left lower decorative member boss portion 730 b corresponds to the left base metal plate through hole 510 a and the left side facing surface boss receiving portion 535 a in the base metal plate 510, and the right lower decorative member boss portion 730 b corresponds to the right side in the base metal plate 510. Corresponding to the base sheet metal through hole 510a and the right side facing surface boss receiving portion 536a.

  The rear end portions of the upper decorative member boss portions 730a are fitted into the corresponding front wall boss receiving portions 514a, and the rear end portions of the left and right lower decorative member boss portions 730b and 730b are respectively connected to the corresponding bases. The sheet metal through holes 510a and 510a are inserted into the left side facing surface boss receiving portion 535a and the right side facing surface boss receiving portion 536a. Furthermore, the first movable body decorative member 730 is screwed into the first case body 507 by screwing screws into the corresponding boss portions 511a and 511b through the through holes provided in the boss receiving portions 535a and 536a. Stopped. At this time, the lower decorative member boss portion 730b is inserted through the base sheet metal through hole 510a, so that the base sheet metal 510 is positioned with respect to the first movable body decorative member 730, and the first case body 507 and the first case body 507 are arranged. The movable body decorative member 730 for use is sandwiched.

  The first movable body decoration member 730 is formed with a pair of movable body window portions 575 and 575 that are open in the front-rear direction, and the first movable body decoration member 730 is formed as a first case body 507. The left and right movable bodies 501 and 501 are configured to face the corresponding movable body window portions 575 and 575 (see FIG. 6). The first movable body decorative member 730 is formed with a decorative member guide portion 576 that defines a cable guide path 576a that opens in the front-rear direction at the center lower portion in the left-right direction. The decorative member guide portion 576 faces the base sheet metal escape portion 510b in a state where the first movable body decorative member 730 is disposed on the first case body 507, and the rear opening of the cable guide path 576a is the first case. The body 507 is positioned in front of the cable insertion portion 524. Then, the flat cable 566 drawn out below the first case body 507 via the cable insertion portion 524 is drawn out to the front side of the first movable body decoration member 730 via the cable guide path 576a. (Refer to the two-dot chain line in FIG. 95).

(About movable member device)
Next, the movable member device 505 will be described. The movable member device 505 is disposed on the front surface of the upper side portion 52a of the back unit 50 so as to cover the movable body device 502 from the front side. As shown in FIGS. 97, 98, and 99, the movable member device 505 is disposed on the rear side of the movable member (support member) 503 that can be reciprocated in the vertical direction, and the movable member 503. An actuating body 504 that can reciprocate in the vertical direction in synchronization with 503, a guide mechanism 577 that couples the movable member 503 and the actuating body 504 so as to be relatively movable, and holds both the movable member 503 and the actuating body 504, and both members 503. , 504 is basically composed of a pair of support drive mechanisms 578, 578.

(About movable members)
As shown in FIG. 100, the movable member 503 is a game effect member in which English characters arranged side by side are attached to the front surface, and is configured to be long in the left-right direction. The movable member 503 extends from the first position (see FIG. 5) between the upper edge of the display opening 53 and the upper peripheral plate portion 54 of the back unit 50 to the center side of the display unit 13a of the symbol display device 13. To the second position (see FIG. 6). In the first position, the movable member 503 is positioned on the front side of the movable bodies 501 and 501, and the movable bodies 501 and 501 are not visible from the front. On the other hand, in the second position, the movable member 503 is positioned below the movable bodies 501 and 501, and the movable bodies 501 and 501 can be visually recognized from the front through the window 100 a of the display frame body 100. The horizontal dimension of the movable member 503 is set slightly shorter than the horizontal dimension of the upper side portion 52a of the back unit 50. As shown in FIG. 7, when the movable member 503 is in the first position, The left and right side portions protrude outward (side) from the window 100a of the display frame 100. As shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, the movable member 503 includes a movable member main body 579 formed in a box shape that opens rearward, and a rear surface of the movable member 503 disposed on the rear side of the movable member main body 579. It is basically composed of a base substrate 580 to be configured and a plurality of movable member light emitting devices (light emitting devices) 581 accommodated inside the movable member main body 579.

(About movable member body)
As shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, the movable member main body 579 is provided at two overlapping portions 582 and 582 provided at both end portions separated in the left-right direction (longitudinal direction), and at the center portion in the left-right direction. It has an exposed portion 583 that protrudes forward from the overlapping portions 582 and 582, and has a three-dimensional shape that protrudes forward from the left and right sides to the center. The left and right overlapping portions 582 and 582 are partially located between the panel main body 42 and the installation plate portion 52 (back unit 50) at the first position of the movable member 503. As shown in FIG. The part located in the back of the board main body 42 in the overlapping parts 582 and 582 is configured to be visible from the front through the transparent board main body 42 and the display frame body 100. The left overlapping portion 582 (hereinafter referred to as the left overlapping portion 582) includes a left front plate portion 584 that faces forward, and a left overlapping wall portion 585 that extends rearward from the upper and lower sides of the left front plate portion 584 and the left edge portion. It is formed in a box shape opened rearward and rightward, and a front plate accommodating portion (accommodating portion) 586 is defined inside. Most of the left front plate portion 584 is opened in the front-rear direction by two front plate through-holes 587 formed so as to form an outline of English letters. A plurality of front plate boss portions 584a and front plate positioning projections 584b are formed on the rear surface of the left front plate portion 584 so as to protrude rearward.

  A front plate rib 588 is formed on the rear surface of the left front plate portion 584 so as to surround each front plate through hole 587 so as to be slightly spaced from the opening edge. A front plate decorative member (decorative member) 589 having light transmittance is disposed on the inner side. The front plate decoration member 589 has a shape that substantially matches the inner shape of the front plate rib 588, and is arranged in alignment with the front plate rib 588. The front surface of the front plate decoration member 589 is provided with a required decoration, and the front surface of the front plate decoration member 589 is visually recognized from the front through the front plate through hole 587 in a state where the front plate rib 588 is installed. To get.

  The right overlapping portion 582 (hereinafter, referred to as the right overlapping portion 582) has basically the same configuration as the left overlapping portion 582, and includes a right front plate portion 590 that faces forward, and upper and lower and right sides of the right front plate portion 590. It is formed in a box shape opened rearward and leftward from a right overlapping wall portion 591 extending rearward from the edge portion, and a front plate accommodating portion 586 is defined inside the right overlapping portion 582. Most of the right front plate portion 590 is opened in the front-rear direction by a single front plate through-hole 587 formed so as to have an English character outline. A plurality of front plate boss portions 584a and front plate positioning projections 584b are formed on the rear surface of the right front plate portion 590 so as to protrude rearward. A front plate rib 588 is formed on the rear surface of the right front plate portion 590 so as to protrude rearward, and a front plate decoration member 589 is disposed inside the front plate rib 588.

  The exposed portion 583 faces the window 100a of the display frame 100 at both the first position and the second position of the movable member 503, and can be viewed from the front through the window 100a. The exposed portion 583 is formed in a box shape opened rearward from the middle front plate portion 592 facing forward and the exposed portion wall portion 593 extending rearward from the peripheral edge portion of the middle front plate portion 592, A plate accommodating portion 586 is defined. Most of the middle front plate portion 592 is opened in the front-rear direction by a plurality of (in the embodiment, five) front plate through-holes 587 formed so as to form an English character outline. In addition, a plurality of front plate boss portions 584a and front plate positioning protrusions 584b are formed on the rear surface of the middle front plate portion 592 so as to protrude rearward, and a plurality of front plate board screw holes 592a are opened rearward. Is formed. Like the left and right front plate portions 584 and 590, front plate ribs 588 are formed on the rear surface of the middle front plate portion 592 so as to correspond to the respective front plate through holes 587. The front panel decoration member 589 is installed in a aligned state. The front plate decoration member 589 is arranged on the front plate rib 588 so that the front surface can be viewed from the front through the front plate through hole 587.

  As shown in FIGS. 103 and 104, the movable member light emitting device 581 includes a light emitting plate 594 disposed corresponding to each front plate decoration member 589 and a movable member disposed on the rear surface of the light emitting plate 594. A light emitting substrate 595 and a plurality of movable member light emitting elements (light emitters) 596 disposed on the front surface of the movable member light emitting substrate 595 are arranged. Is made to emit light. The light emitting plate 594 is a plate-like member having a light diffusing structure. As described later, the light emitting plate 594 diffuses the light of the movable member light emitting element 596 incident from the side end surface of the light emitting plate 594, and thereby the light emitting plate 594. Is configured to emit light.

  Each light emitting plate 594 is formed in a shape that substantially matches the outer shape of the corresponding front plate decoration member 589. Further, the light emitting plate 594 is formed with a light emitting plate insertion portion 594a corresponding to the front plate boss portion 584a that is open in the front-rear direction. Further, each light emitting plate 594 is formed with a light emitting plate positioning hole 594b corresponding to the front plate positioning protrusion 584b, which is open in the front-rear direction. Then, the front plate boss portion 584a corresponding to each light emitting plate insertion portion 594a is inserted, and the front plate positioning protrusion 584b corresponding to the light emitting plate positioning hole 594b is inserted, so that the light emitting plate 594 has a front plate decoration on the front surface. The member 589 is positioned in the front plate accommodating portion 586 in contact with the rear surface. When the light emitting plate 594 is installed in the front plate accommodating portion 586, the side portions 585, 591 of the movable member main body 579 are formed between the adjacent light emitting plates 594, 594 or the lower side end surface of each light emitting plate 594. An elongated space (hereinafter, referred to as a light emitter housing space 597) is defined between 593 and 593 (see FIGS. 105 and 106).

  The movable member light emitting substrate 595 is disposed in each front plate accommodating portion 586 so as to cover the light emitting plate 594 from behind. A movable member light emitting substrate 595 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the left movable member light emitting substrate 595) disposed in the front plate housing portion 586 of the left overlapping portion 582 is formed in substantially the same shape as the left front plate portion 584. . The left movable member light-emitting substrate 595 has a plurality of movable member substrate insertion portions 595a that are open in the front-rear direction and through which the front plate boss portion 584a can be inserted, and a movable that is open in the front-rear direction and through which the front plate positioning protrusion 584b can be inserted. A member substrate positioning hole 595b is formed. Then, the front plate boss portion 584a corresponding to each movable member substrate insertion portion 595a is inserted and the front plate positioning protrusion 584b is inserted into each movable member substrate positioning hole 595b, whereby the left movable member light emitting substrate 595 is overlapped on the left side. Positioned within the front plate receiving portion 586 of the portion 582. In this state, the front surface of the left movable member light emitting substrate 595 is in contact with the rear surfaces of the two front plate decoration members 589 and 589. As shown in FIG. 104, the left movable member light-emitting board 595 is formed with a left board projection 598 that projects rightward from the right side, and a left board connector (connector) is formed in front of the left board projection 598. Part) 598a is provided.

  The movable member light-emitting substrate 595 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the right movable member light-emitting substrate 595) disposed in the front plate housing portion 586 of the right overlapping portion 582 has the same configuration as the left movable member light-emitting substrate 595. The right front plate portion 590 is formed in substantially the same shape. In the right movable member light emitting substrate 595, a plurality of movable member substrate insertion portions 595a corresponding to the front plate boss portion 584a and a plurality of movable member substrate positioning holes 595b corresponding to the front plate positioning protrusions 584b are formed. Then, the front plate boss portion 584a corresponding to each movable member substrate insertion portion 595a is inserted, and the front plate positioning protrusion 584b is inserted into each movable member substrate positioning hole 595b, so that the right movable member light emitting substrate 595 is overlapped to the right. Positioned within the front plate receiving portion 586 of the portion 582. In a state where the right movable member light emitting substrate 595 is installed in the right overlapping portion 582, the front surface of the right movable member light emitting substrate 595 is in contact with the rear surface of the front plate decoration member 589. As shown in FIG. 104, the right movable member light emitting substrate 595 is formed with a right substrate protrusion 599 that protrudes leftward from the left side, and a right substrate connector (connector) on the front surface of the right substrate protrusion 599. Part) 599a is provided.

  Three movable member light emitting substrates 595, 595, and 595 (hereinafter may be referred to as a middle movable member light emitting substrate 595) are disposed in the front plate housing portion 586 of the exposed portion 583. Each middle movable member light emitting substrate 595 is formed in a shape that substantially matches the inner peripheral surface shape of the exposed portion wall portion 593, and the three middle movable member light emitting substrates 595 are disposed in the front plate accommodating portion 586 of the exposed portion 583. In this state, substantially the entire rear surface of the middle front plate portion 592 is filled with the middle movable member light emitting substrate 595. Each middle movable member light emitting substrate 595 is formed with a plurality of movable member substrate insertion portions 595a corresponding to the front plate boss portion 584a and a plurality of movable member substrate positioning holes 595b corresponding to the front plate positioning protrusions 584b. . Further, a middle substrate through hole 595c corresponding to the front plate board screw hole 592a is formed in the middle movable member light emitting board 595 so as to open in the front-rear direction.

  Then, the front plate boss portion 584a corresponding to each movable member substrate insertion portion 595a is inserted, and the front plate positioning protrusion 584b is inserted into each movable member substrate positioning hole 595b, so that the middle movable member light emitting substrate 595 is exposed portion 583. The front plate accommodating portion 586 is positioned. Furthermore, each middle movable member light emitting substrate 595 is screwed into the exposed portion 583 by screwing a screw into the front plate substrate screw hole 592a through the middle substrate through hole 595c aligned with the front plate substrate screw hole 592a. Stopped. In a state where each middle movable member light emitting substrate 595 is attached to the exposed portion 583, the front surface of the middle movable member light emitting substrate 595 is in contact with the rear surface of the front plate decoration member 589. A plurality of middle substrate connector portions (connector portions) 600 are provided on the rear surface of each middle movable member light emitting substrate 595 so as to protrude rearward, and the middle middle movable member light emitting substrate 595 has a middle substrate cable connector on the rear surface. A portion (connector portion) 601 is provided to protrude rearward. Note that the left and right middle movable member light emitting substrates 595 and 595 are electrically connected to the middle middle movable member light emitting substrate 595 via wiring (not shown).

  The movable member light emitting element 596 disposed on the front surface of the movable member light emitting substrate 595 is controlled to emit light by the overall control device 37 and emits light when the movable member 503 is movable. Each movable member light emitting element 596 is provided so as to protrude from the front surface of the movable member light emitting substrate 595. In addition, the movable member light emitting elements 596 are linearly arranged along the edge of each light emitting plate 594 when the movable member light emitting substrate 595 is installed in each front plate accommodating portion 586. That is, in a state where the movable member light emitting substrate 595 is installed in the front plate housing portion, each movable member light emitting element 596 is housed in the light emitter housing space 597 as shown in FIGS. It is arranged along the end face. Each movable member light emitting element 596 emits light in parallel to the front surface of the movable member light emitting substrate 595 toward the side end surface of the light emitting plate 594. As described above, in the embodiment, the movable member light emitting element 596 is configured to irradiate the side end surface of the light emitting plate 594 with light so that the entire light emitting plate 594 emits light, so that the front plate decoration member 589 is illuminated. Compared with a configuration in which the decorative member 589 is directly illuminated by the movable member light emitting element 596, the number of the light emitting elements 596 can be reduced and the cost can be reduced.

(About the base board)
As shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the base substrate 580 is a plate-like member extending in the left-right direction (longitudinal direction), and includes base side portions 602, 602 constituting left and right side portions, and both bases. A base substrate connecting wall (wall) that is provided between the side portions 602 and 602 and connects the base protruding portion 603 protruding forward from the base side portions 602 and 602 and the base side portions 602 and 602 and the base protruding portion 603. Part) 604,604. The outer shapes of the base side portion 602 and the base protruding portion 603 are formed so as to substantially match the inner peripheral surface shape of each wall portion 585, 591, 593 of the movable member main body 579.

  In addition, a plurality of base substrate boss receiving portions 580a corresponding to the front plate boss portion 584a are provided in front of each base side portion 602 and the base protruding portion 603, and the base substrate positioning corresponding to the front plate positioning protrusion 584b is provided. A plurality of holes 580b are formed. Then, the rear end portion of the front plate boss portion 584a protruding rearward through the light emitting plate insertion portion 594a and the movable member substrate insertion portion 595a is fitted to the base substrate boss receiving portion 580a, and the light emitting plate positioning hole 594b and the movable plate positioning hole 594b are movable. The base substrate 580 is positioned with respect to the movable member main body 579 by fitting the front plate positioning protrusion 584b protruding backward through the member substrate positioning hole 595b into the base substrate positioning hole 580b. Further, the base substrate 580 is screwed to the movable member main body 579 by screwing a screw into the front plate boss portion 584a through the through hole of the base substrate boss receiving portion 580a.

  In the state where the base substrate 580 is attached to the movable member main body 579, as shown in FIGS. 99 and 110, the left and right base side portions 602 and 602 have front plate accommodating portions 586 and 586 of corresponding overlapping portions 582 and 582, respectively. 586 is housed in a fitted state. The base side portions 602 and 602 block the rear openings of the overlapping portions 582 and 582, and the base side portions 602 and 602 constitute rear surfaces of the overlapping portions 582 and 582. Similarly, the base protruding portion 603 is accommodated in the front plate accommodating portion 586 of the exposed portion 583 in a fitted state, and the base protruding portion 603 blocks the rear opening of the exposed portion 583 to form the rear surface of the exposed portion 583. It is supposed to be. In addition, the base side portion 602 is configured such that the front surface is in contact with the rear surface of the movable member light emitting substrate 595 in a state where the base substrate 580 is attached to the movable member main body 579. That is, the movable member light emitting substrate 595 disposed in the overlapping portion 582 is sandwiched between the front surface of the base side portion 602 and the front plate portions 584 and 590 and screwed into the front plate housing portion 586. Retained without. Here, the rear surface of the base protruding portion 603 is positioned in front of the rear surface of the base side portion 602, and the rear surface of the base substrate 580 has a shape in which the central portion side in the left-right direction is recessed forward. The recessed portion functions as an actuating body accommodating recess (accommodating recess) 605 that accommodates the actuating body 504 when the movable member 503 is in the first position (see FIG. 99).

  On the rear surface of each base side portion 602, a plurality of connecting base portion boss portions 602a projecting rearward are formed, and the connecting base portion 606 is connected to the base side portion 602 via the connecting base portion boss portions 602a. Installed on the back. The connection base portion 606 connects an arm member 607 and a movable member 503, which will be described later, in a freely rotatable manner. The connection base portion base 608 and the connection base portion base 608 forward from the peripheral edge and the rear surface thereof. It is comprised from the connection stand part wall part 609 extended. A plurality of connection base part boss receiving parts 609a are formed on the connection base part wall part 609 corresponding to the connection base part boss part 602a. Then, each connection base boss 602a is fitted to the corresponding connection base boss receiving part 609a, and the connection base part boss 602a is screwed to the connection base part boss receiving part 609a through the through hole. Is screwed to the rear surface of the base side portion 602.

  A first guide groove (guide groove) 610 and a second guide groove (guide groove) 611 located below the first guide groove 610 are opened in the front-rear direction on the connection base body 608, respectively. Is formed. The first guide groove 610 extends linearly in the left-right direction (extending direction of the movable member 503), and both ends of the first guide groove 610 are arcs having a central angle of approximately 180 ° (semicircle). It is formed into a shape. Further, as shown in FIG. 108, the first guide groove 610 is surrounded by a connection base part wall 609, and the first guide groove 610 is surrounded by the connection base part wall 609 on the front side of the connection base part base 608. A connecting portion sliding space 612 is defined.

  The second guide groove 611 extends so as to incline downward toward the central portion of the movable member 503, and is located on the outer side of the second guide groove 611 (on the side away from the central portion of the movable member 503). Has an arc shape with a central angle of approximately 180 °. Further, the inner end of the second guide groove 611 (the side close to the central portion of the movable member 503) has an arc shape with a central angle larger than 180 °, and the inner end of the second guide groove 611 The upper edge part protrudes slightly upwards. Similar to the first guide groove 610, the second guide groove 611 is surrounded by the connection base part wall part 609, and the second guide groove 611 is surrounded by the connection base part wall part 609 on the front side of the connection base part base 608. A connecting portion sliding space 613 is defined.

  The base protruding portion 603 is formed with a plurality of base connector openings (connector openings) 614 corresponding to the middle board connector section 600 opened in the front-rear direction, and also corresponds to the middle board cable connector section 601. A cable connector opening (connector opening) 615 is formed to open in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIG. 107, when the base board 580 is attached to the movable member main body 579, each middle board connector section 600 faces the corresponding base connector opening 614, and the middle board cable connector section 601 is It is configured to face the cable connector opening 615. Here, a flat cable 566 led out from the movable body device 502 is connected to the middle board cable connector 601 facing the cable connector opening 615, and the middle middle movable member light emitting board 595 is connected to the middle board cable connector 601. The movable body relay board 509 is connected via the flat cable 566. That is, the movable member light emitting device 581 of the movable member device 505 is relay-connected to the movable body device 502 via the flat cable 566.

  As described above, the movable member 503 according to the embodiment includes the base connector opening on the rear surface (rear surface of the exposed portion 583) of the base protruding portion 603 protruding forward from the rear surface of the base side portion 602 (rear surface of the overlapping portion 582). By providing the cable connector opening 615 and the cable connector opening 615, the middle board connector 600 and the middle board cable connector 601 are less likely to protrude rearward from the rear surface of the base side 602. This prevents the connector portions 600 and 601 and the flat cable 566 (wiring) from interfering with each other, and makes it difficult for disconnection or the like to occur when the movable member 503 is movable. Note that two base wiring hooks 616 and 616 are formed on the rear surface of the base protruding portion 603 on the lower sides of the left and right sides.

  On the rear surface of the base protrusion 603, a mounting protrusion 617 protrudes rearward at a position close to the upper side of the cable connector opening 615. The mounting projection 617 extends in the left-right direction, and is formed with pressing portion screw holes 617a, 617a opened rearward at both ends thereof. A cable pressing member 618 is attached to the attachment protrusion 617 from behind with the flat cable 566 sandwiched therebetween. The cable pressing member 618 includes a pressing plate portion 619 extending in the left-right direction, and protruding wall portions 620 that are provided at both ends of the pressing plate portion 619 and project forward. At both ends of the pressing plate portion 619, pressing plate portion through holes 619a and 619a corresponding to the pressing portion screw holes 617a are formed, and through the pressing plate portion through holes 619a aligned with the respective pressing portion screw holes 617a. Then, the cable pressing member 618 is screwed to the attachment protrusion 617 by screwing the screw into the pressing portion screw hole 617a.

  In the cable pressing member 618, a cable insertion space 621 that opens in the vertical direction is formed between the left and right protruding wall portions 620 (see FIG. 109), and the flat cable 566 is inserted into the cable insertion space 621. ing. Here, in a state where the cable pressing member 618 is attached to the attachment protrusion 617, the front surface of the pressing plate portion 619 and the rear surface of the attachment protrusion 617 are close to each other, and the flat cable 566 inserted into the cable insertion space 621 is the pressing plate. The portion 619 and the mounting projection 617 are held at a required pressure. Thereby, the flat cable 566 is firmly pressed, and the flat cable 566 does not interfere with the movement of the movable member 503. Note that a plurality of sub-base boss portions 603a for attaching a sub-base substrate 626, which will be described later, are formed on the rear surface of the base protrusion portion 603 so as to protrude rearward.

  The base substrate connection wall 604 is formed with a connection wall connector opening (second connector opening) 622 that opens in the left-right direction (longitudinal direction of the movable member 503). When the base substrate 580 is attached to the movable member main body 579, the left substrate connector portion 598a faces the left connecting wall connector opening 622, and the right substrate connector portion faces the right connecting wall connector opening 622. 599a (see FIG. 107).

  As shown in FIG. 107, the wiring 598b connected to the left board connector portion 598a facing the left connecting wall connector opening 622 is locked to the left side (right side in FIG. 107) base wiring hook 616. The middle board connector portion 600 facing the base connector opening 614 of the base protrusion 603 is connected. That is, the left movable member light emitting substrate 595 is electrically connected to the middle movable member light emitting substrate 595. Further, the wiring 599b connected to the right board connector portion 599a facing the connection wall connector opening 622 on the right side (left side in FIG. 107) is locked to the base wiring hook 616 on the right side, and then the base protruding portion 603. The right movable member light emitting substrate 595 is electrically connected to the middle movable member light emitting substrate 595, and is connected to the middle substrate connector portion 600 facing the base connector opening 614. Thus, in this embodiment, the connecting wall connector opening is connected to the base substrate connecting wall 604 that connects the rear surface of the base side portion 602 (the rear surface of the overlapping portion 582) and the rear surface of the base protruding portion 603 (the rear surface of the exposed portion 583). Since 622 is provided, the left board connector portion 598a (right board connector portion 599a) and the wiring connected to the connector portion are less likely to protrude rearward from the rear surface of the base side portion 602. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the connector portions 598a and 599a and the wirings 598b and 599b from interfering with each other, thereby preventing the occurrence of disconnection or the like. In addition, the wiring 598b (wiring 599b) connected to the left board connector 598a (right board connector 599a) can be routed on the rear surface of the base protrusion 603 (the rear surface of the exposed portion 583) without obstruction. .

  A sub-base substrate 626 is disposed on the rear surface of the base protrusion 603. The sub-base substrate 626 basically includes a rectangular plate-shaped sub-base main body 623 and a sub-base wall portion 624 that protrudes forward from the peripheral edge of the sub-base main body 623. Sub-base body boss receiving portions 623a are formed at the four corners of the sub-base body 623 corresponding to the sub-base boss portions 603a of the base protrusion 603, respectively. Then, each sub-base body boss receiving portion 623a is fitted to the corresponding sub-base body boss receiving portion 603a, and a screw is screwed into the sub-base boss receiving portion 603a through the through hole of the sub-base body boss receiving portion 623a. As a result, the sub base substrate 626 is screwed to the base protrusion 603.

  The sub-base body 623 is formed with a rectangular cable sub-base opening 625 that opens in the front-rear direction. When the sub-base board 626 is attached to the base protrusion 603, the cable pressing member 618 and the cable connector An opening 615 faces the cable sub-base opening 625 (see FIG. 107). The sub-base body 623 is formed with a cable guide inclined portion 627 that is inclined forward from above to below the cable sub-base opening 625. The lower end edge of the cable guide inclined portion 627 It faces the upper edge of the sub-base opening 625 for use. The cable guide inclined portion 627 guides the flat cable 566 pressed and held by the cable pressing member 618 upward and rearward. In this manner, the flat cable 566 is pressed by the cable pressing member 618, and the flat cable 566 is guided upward by the cable guide inclined portion 627, so that the flat cable 566 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the base protruding portion 603 to obstruct. Can be prevented.

  A sub-base escape portion 628 that opens in the front-rear direction corresponding to the base connector opening 614 is recessed in the left side portion of the sub-base substrate 626. As shown in FIG. 107, when the sub base substrate 626 is attached to the base protrusion 603, the base connector opening 614 faces the sub base escape portion 628 and protrudes rearward from the base connector opening 614. The sub-base board 626 is configured not to interfere with the connector portion 600. A sub-base wiring hook 629 is formed on the left-side sub-base wall 624 so as to protrude leftward above the sub-base escape portion 628.

  A sub-base restriction groove (regulation groove) 630 that extends in the vertical direction and opens rearward is formed in a substantially central position in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the sub-base body 623, and the sub-base restriction groove 630 is provided. A connection guide part (guide part) 631 which will be described later faces. The sub-base body 623 has a pair of shaft positioning protrusions 623b and 623b protruding rearwardly above the sub-base regulating groove 630 and a pair of shafts between the shaft positioning protrusions 623b and 623b. Screw holes 623c and 623c for use are formed.

  Further, a shaft holding recess 632 that opens rearward and downward is formed between the shaft screw holes 623c and 623c. The shaft holding recess 632 is provided with a shaft pressing portion 633 from the rear. The shaft pressing portion 633 is a rectangular plate member that is long in the left-right direction, and the pressing portion positioning holes 633a and 633a corresponding to the shaft positioning protrusions 623b of the sub-base body 623 have left and right ends of the shaft pressing portion 633. And open in the front-rear direction. The shaft pressing portion 633 is formed with a pair of pressing portion through holes 633b and 633b corresponding to the shaft screw holes 623c of the sub-base body 623 in the front-rear direction. Then, the shaft positioning protrusion 623b is inserted into the pressing portion positioning hole 633a, and the screw is inserted into the shaft screw hole 623c through the pressing portion through hole 633b aligned with the shaft screw hole 623c. The portion 633 is screwed to the sub-base substrate 580 with the shaft holding recess 632 covered from behind. Further, the sub-base body 623 is formed with a shaft receiving hole 634 that opens upward in the lower portion of the sub-base regulating groove 630. The shaft receiving hole 634 is located directly below the shaft holding recess 632.

(About the actuator)
The operating body 504 is provided on the rear side of the movable member 503 and is configured to be movable up and down synchronously and relatively to the movable member 503. As shown in FIGS. 111, 112, and 127, the operating body 504 includes an operating body main body 635 extending in the left-right direction and an operating body light emitting device 636 disposed on the rear side of the operating body main body 635. Basically composed. The working body main body 635 is set to have a length extending in the left-right direction shorter than that of the movable member 503, and has a shape that gradually protrudes forward from both left and right ends toward the center. When the movable member 503 is in the first position, the operating body 504 is configured such that the protruding portion of the operating body main body 635 faces the operating body housing recess 605. As described above, in the embodiment, the working body 504 is housed in the working body housing recess 605, so that the working body 504 is restrained from being bulky behind the movable member 503, and the entire movable member device 505 is moved in the front-rear direction. The thickness can be made compact. At the lower part of the working body main body 635, a plurality of small working body decorations 637 and a pair of large working body decorations 638, 638 provided on the left and right sides so as to sandwich the small working body decorations 637 are provided protruding downward. It has been. In addition, the small operating body decoration portion 637 and the large operating body decoration portion 638 have shapes resembling fangs.

  A pair of actuating body connecting pieces 639 and 639 are formed on the upper edge of the actuating body main body 635 so as to be spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions, and are opened to the working body connecting piece 639 in the front-rear direction. Guide grooves (guide grooves) 640 and 640 are formed. The third guide groove 640 linearly extends in the left-right direction (the direction in which the pair of arm members 607 and 607 are separated), and the left and right ends have an arc shape with a central angle of approximately 180 ° (semicircle). There is no. In addition, a working body wiring hook 641 that protrudes to the right is formed on the right side of the left working body connection piece 639. Further, a pair of guide boss portions 635a and 635a are formed on the upper portion of the operating body main body 635 so as to protrude between the operating body connecting piece portions 639 and 639. On the rear surface of the working body main body 635, a plurality of working body substrate positioning projections 635b are formed to protrude rearward, and a working body substrate screw hole 635c that is opened rearward is formed.

  The operating body light emitting device 636 includes two large light emitting devices 642 and 642 corresponding to the large operating body decoration portions 638 and 638 and one small light emitting device 643 corresponding to the small operation body decoration portion 637. ing. Each of the large-sized light-emitting device 642 and the small-sized light-emitting device 643 includes an operating body light-emitting substrate 644 and a plurality of operating body light-emitting elements 645 disposed on the front surface of the operating body light-emitting substrate 644. When the body light emitting element 645 is turned on, the large-sized working body decoration unit 638 and the small working body decoration unit 637 emit light. Each actuator light emitting substrate 644 is formed with an actuator substrate through hole 644a that opens in the front-rear direction corresponding to the actuator substrate screw hole 635c, and in the front-rear direction corresponding to the actuator substrate positioning protrusion 635b. An actuating body substrate positioning hole 644b is formed to be open to the outside. Then, the operating body substrate positioning hole 644b is fitted with the operating body substrate positioning projection 635b, and the operating body substrate through hole 644a aligned with the operating body substrate screw hole 635c is screwed into the operating body light emitting substrate. 644 is screwed to the actuator body 635. Two actuating element light emitting elements 645 are disposed on the actuating element light emitting substrate 644 of each large light emitting device 642 so as to be spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction. In addition, on the operating body light emitting substrate 644 of the small light emitting device 643, one operating body light emitting element 645 is provided for each small operating body decoration portion 637.

  The light emitting device 644 of each large light emitting device 642 is provided with a large substrate connector portion 644c on the front surface, and the working light emitting substrate 644 of the small light emitting device 643 has two small substrate connectors on the rear surface. A portion 644d and a small external connector portion 644e are provided. Then, as shown in FIG. 128, the wiring 646 connected to each large board connector 644c is connected to the small board connector 644d, and the working light emitting board 644 of the large light emitting device 642 is used for the small board. The light emitting device 643 is electrically connected to the operating body light emitting substrate 644. Further, as shown in FIGS. 99 and 110, the wiring 647 connected to the external connector for small size 644e is pulled out to the movable member 503 side after being locked to the working body wiring hook 641. Then, it is engaged with the sub-base wiring hook 629 and connected to the middle board connector portion 600 facing rearward through the sub-base escape portion 628 and the base connector opening 614. That is, the actuation body light emitting device 636 is electrically connected to the movable member light emitting device 581.

(Guide mechanism)
The guide mechanism 577 connects the movable member 503 and the actuating body 504 so as to be relatively movable in the front-rear relationship. The guide mechanism 577 includes a connecting guide shaft (guide shaft) 648 provided on the rear side of the movable member 503, It is comprised from the connection guide part (guide part) 631 provided in the front side of 504. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the connection guide shaft 648 is a round bar made of a metal material, and extends in the vertical direction (moving direction of the operating body 504) in the sub base regulating groove 630 of the sub base substrate 626. To be present. The extension length of the connecting guide shaft 648 is set slightly shorter than the separation distance between the upper surface of the shaft holding recess 632 and the lower surface of the shaft receiving hole 634. Then, the lower end portion of the connection guide shaft 648 is inserted into the shaft receiving hole portion 634, and the upper end portion of the connection guide shaft 648 faces the shaft holding recess 632, so that the connection guide shaft 648 is connected to the shaft receiving hole portion 634 and the shaft. It is set between the holding recesses 632. With the coupling guide shaft 648 set in the shaft receiving hole 634 and the shaft holding recess 632, the shaft pressing portion 633 is attached to the sub-base substrate 626, so that the upper end portion of the coupling guide shaft 648 is the front surface of the shaft pressing portion 633. Further, the connection guide shaft 648 cannot be removed from the sub-base substrate 626 by being sandwiched by the shaft holding recess 632.

  111 and 112, the connection guide portion 631 is provided on a guide portion main body 649 slidably connected to the connection guide shaft 648 and on the rear side of the guide portion main body 649, and is connected to the operating body 504. It is basically composed of a fitting installation portion 650 to be attached. The fitting installation part 650 is a cylindrical body that opens rearward, and a pair of guide boss receiving parts 650 a and 650 a corresponding to the guide part boss part 635 a of the operating body 504 are formed inside the fitting installation part 650. Has been. Then, the guide boss portions 635a corresponding to the respective guide boss receiving portions 650a are fitted, and screws are inserted into the guide boss portions 635a, so that the connection guide portion 631 becomes the operating body main body 635 (the operating body 504). ).

  The guide portion main body 649 includes a pair of main body plate portions 651 and 651 that are separated from each other in the front-rear direction, and left and right main body wall portions 652 and 652 that connect the main body plate portions 651 and 651. In addition, a guide insertion hole (insertion hole) 653 that penetrates in the vertical direction (moving direction of the operating body 504) and through which the connection guide shaft 648 is inserted is defined by the main body wall portion 652 (see FIG. 125). That is, the operating body 504 is connected to the movable member 503 so as to be relatively movable by inserting the connecting guide shaft 648 through the guide insertion hole 653. Here, as shown in FIG. 125, the left and right main body wall portions 652 and 652 are formed in a “<” shape that approaches the center position in the vertical direction, and the guide portion main body 649 is substantially shaped. The central part has a narrowed cross-sectional shape. As a result, the guide insertion hole 653 includes a narrow diameter portion 654 positioned substantially at the center in the vertical direction, and an upper and lower widened portion 655 connected to the narrow diameter portion 654.

  The opening cross section of the small diameter portion 654 is set according to the outer diameter of the connection guide shaft 648. Here, setting the opening cross section of the small diameter portion 654 in accordance with the outer diameter of the connection guide shaft 648 allows the connection guide portion 631 to slide in the vertical direction along the connection guide shaft 648 and also connects the connection guide. The opening size and the opening shape of the narrow-diameter portion 654 are set so that the portion 631 can hardly move in the front-rear and left-right directions with respect to the connection guide shaft 648. On the other hand, the opening cross section of the expanding portion 655 is configured to expand in the left-right direction (the direction in which the pair of arm members 607 and 607 are separated) as the distance from the narrow diameter portion 654 increases. In this way, by configuring the guide insertion hole 653 with the narrow diameter portion 654 and the widening portion 655, the connection guide portion 631 slides up and down along the connection guide shaft 648 without blurring in the front-rear and left-right directions. At the same time, it is possible to turn the narrow diameter portion 654 as a turning center (see FIGS. 126 and 131).

  In a state where the connection guide shaft 648 is inserted into the guide insertion hole 653, the guide portion main body 649 faces the sub base restriction groove 630 and slides in the sub base restriction groove 630. Here, the width dimension in the left-right direction of the main body plate portion 651 is set to be smaller than that of the sub-base regulating groove 630, and the connection guide portion 631 is allowed to rotate within a predetermined rotation angle. On the other hand, when the connection guide part 631 is rotated to a predetermined rotation angle, as shown in FIG. The rotation is restricted.

(Support drive mechanism)
Next, the support drive mechanisms 578 and 578 will be described below. A pair of support driving mechanisms 578 and 578 are provided so as to sandwich the movable member 503 and the operating body 504 from the left and right, hold the movable member 503 and the operating body 504, and move both members 503 and 504 in the vertical direction. . Since the configurations of both support drive mechanisms 578 and 578 are basically symmetrical, in the following description, the left support drive mechanism 578 will be mainly described, and a detailed description of the right support drive mechanism 578 will not be given. This is performed only for portions that are different from the left support drive mechanism 578. As shown in FIGS. 107 and 116, the support drive mechanism 578 is pivotally supported by the support case member 569 and the base metal plate 510, and is rotatably connected to the movable member 503 and the operating body 504. The arm member 607 is pivotally supported by the base metal plate 510 so that the posture can be changed, and the drive arm 656 is rotatably connected to the arm member 607, and the movable member motor (drive which changes the posture of the drive arm 656) 1, first driving means, motor) 657.

(About support case members)
As shown in FIGS. 129 and 130, the support case member 569 includes a rear support case body 658 and a front support case body 659 disposed on the front side of the rear support case body 658. The rear support case body 658 includes a rear installation surface portion 660 that contacts the front surface of the base sheet metal support surface portion 740, and a rear support case wall portion 661 extending forward from the edge of the rear installation surface portion 660. It is formed in a box shape that opens. The rear installation surface portion 660 is formed with a sheet metal case through-hole 660a that opens in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the upper and lower edges, and the first rotation shaft 571 and the second rotation shaft 572 respectively correspond to the first rotation shaft 571 and the second rotation shaft 572. A rotation shaft through hole 660b and a second rotation shaft through hole 660c are formed to open in the front-rear direction. A plurality of sheet metal case positioning protrusions 660 d protruding rearward are formed on the rear surface of the rear installation surface portion 660. Further, the rear installation surface portion 660 is formed with a cylindrical drive gear housing portion 662 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface and opens forward. Furthermore, a left ground case through-hole 660e corresponding to the left ground screw hole 573 is formed in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the left edge of the rear installation surface portion 660. As shown in FIG. 124, with respect to the right support drive mechanism 578, a right ground case through hole 660f corresponding to the right ground screw hole 574 is provided in the front-rear direction at the upper left corner of the rear installation surface portion 660. Open and formed.

  Then, the first rotation shaft 571 and the second rotation shaft 572 are inserted through the first rotation shaft through hole 660b and the second rotation shaft through hole 660c, respectively, and the sheet metal case positioning protrusion 660d is inserted into the first rotation shaft through hole 660b. The rear support case body 658 (support) is inserted into the corresponding base sheet metal positioning hole 510e and screwed into the base sheet metal screw hole 510f through the sheet metal case through hole 660a aligned with the base sheet metal screw hole 510f. The case member 569) is screwed to the base sheet metal support surface portion 740 (base sheet metal 510). At this time, as shown in FIG. 85, the drive gear housing portion 662 is configured to protrude rearward of the base sheet metal support surface portion 740 via the base sheet metal through hole 510d. The left ground case through hole 660e (right ground case through hole 660f) is configured to be aligned with the left ground screw hole 573 (right ground screw hole 574) of the base metal plate 510.

  A rear case mounting piece 663 is formed at the lower portion of the rear support case body 658 so as to extend downward, and a support case mounting through hole 663a is formed in the rear case mounting piece 663 so as to open in the front-rear direction. ing. The support case mounting through hole 663 a corresponds to a screw hole formed in the left side portion 52 c of the back unit 50. Further, the support case mounting through hole 663 a in the right support drive mechanism 578 corresponds to a screw hole formed in the right side portion 52 b of the back unit 50. The upper rear support case wall portion 661 is formed with a rear case protruding wall 664 extending upward from the front end portion. The rear case protruding wall 664 protrudes forward and opens to the rear. A portion 664a is formed. Then, the rear support case body 658 (support case member 569) is screwed to the installation plate portion 52 of the back unit 50 through the support case attachment through hole 663a and the support case boss portion 664a. When the rear support case body 658 is attached to the installation plate portion 52, the left ground case through hole 660 e is aligned with the left ground opening 87 together with the left ground screw hole 573 of the base metal plate 510. In the right support drive mechanism 578, the right ground case through hole 660 f is aligned with the right ground opening 88 together with the right ground screw hole 574 of the base metal plate 510. The third ground relay line ER3 is grounded through the left ground opening 87 to the left ground case through hole 660f aligned with the left ground screw hole 573. Similarly, the fourth ground relay line ER4 is grounded through the right ground opening 88 to the right ground case through hole 660f aligned with the right ground screw hole 574.

  A rear support case screw hole 660g opened forward is formed on the inner surface of the rear case protruding wall 664 and the lower rear support case wall portion 661. In addition, a pair of columnar elastic body locking portions 665 and 665 protruding forward are formed at the lower front portion of the rear installation surface portion 660 so as to be slightly separated from each other in the left-right direction. Further, a pair of motor case bosses 660h and 660h protruding forward are spaced apart from each other so as to sandwich the drive gear housing portion 662 in the vicinity of the left edge of the rear installation surface portion 660. An in-situ sensor case installation portion 666 is formed adjacent to the motor case boss portion 660h. 116 and 117, the home position sensor case installation portion 666 includes a pair of sensor holding pieces 666a and 666a that protrude from the front surface of the rear installation surface portion 660 and are spaced apart from each other. A movable member original position detecting device 667, which will be described later, is installed between 666a and 666a. Further, in the front surface of the rear installation surface portion 660, in the vicinity of the second rotation shaft through hole 660c, the center portion of the second rotation shaft through hole 660c (that is, the second rotation shaft 572) is the center. An arc-shaped regulating rib (locking means) 668 is formed so as to protrude forward. The restriction rib 668 is located on the inner side (movable member 503 side) and lower side than the second rotation shaft through hole 660c.

  The front support case body 659 is a front case decoration plate 669 that covers the front side of the rear support case body 658, and a front portion that extends forward from the edge of the front case decoration plate 669 (the side far from the movable member 503). And a support case wall portion 670. A front support case through-hole 669a corresponding to the rear support case screw hole 660g of the rear support case body 658 is formed in the front case decoration plate 669 so as to open in the front-rear direction. Then, the front support case body 659 is screwed to the rear support case body 658 by screwing screws into the rear support case screw holes 660g through the front support case through holes 669a aligned with the respective rear support case screw holes 660g. .

  On the rear surface of the front case decorative plate 669, a cylindrical first bearing 669b corresponding to the first rotation shaft 571 and a cylindrical second bearing 669c corresponding to the second rotation shaft 572 are respectively provided rearward. Protrusively formed. With the front support case body 659 attached to the rear support case body 658, the front end portion of the first rotation shaft 571 is engaged with the first bearing 669b, and the front end portion of the second rotation shaft 572 is the second bearing. The front support case body 659 is positioned by being fitted to the 669c. Further, the front support case wall 670 is formed with an original position sensor protection part 671 protruding outward (side away from the movable member 503), and is opened rearward at the rear part of the original position sensor protection part 671. A sensor housing portion 671a is formed.

  A movable member original position detecting device 667 for detecting the original position of the movable member 503 is installed in the original position sensor case installing section 666. The movable member original position detecting device 667 includes a movable member original position substrate 667a and a movable member original position sensor 667b disposed on the movable member original position substrate 667a. The movable member original position substrate 667a is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and the rear end portion of the movable member original position substrate 667a is inserted into the rear support case by inserting the rear end portion between the two sensor holding pieces 666a and 666a. It is held by the body 658. Further, the movable member in-situ substrate 667a has the front end case housed in the sensor housing portion 671a with the front support case body 659 attached to the rear support case body 658, and the movable member in-situ substrate board 667a The side is held. The movable member original position sensor 667b is formed in a U-shape by forming a concave detection portion 667c in the same manner as the movable body original position sensor 565, and the movable member original position sensor 667 is attached to the rear support case body 658. In the installed state, the concave detector 667c faces the second rotation shaft through hole 660c.

  The movable member motor 657 is driven and controlled by the overall control device 37 to operate the movable member 503 and the operating body 504. The left and right movable member motors 657 and 657 are independently controlled, and both the movable member motors 657 and 657 are driven synchronously or asynchronously. There is. Note that the movable member motors 657 and 657 are asynchronously driven by changing the rotational speed of each of the movable member motors 657 or by driving only one movable member motor 657. This means that the members 607 and 607 are rocked apart. The movable member motor 657 is also driven independently of the first movable body motor 508.

  The movable member motor 657 includes a pair of movable member motor attachment pieces 657a and 657a corresponding to the motor case boss portion 660h, and the rear surface of each movable member motor attachment piece 657a is provided on the corresponding motor case boss portion 660h. When the screw is screwed into the motor case boss 660h through the through-hole provided in the movable member motor mounting piece 657a while being in contact with the front surface, the movable member motor 657 is attached to the rear support case body 658. Screwed. As shown in FIG. 123, the movable member motor 657 is attached to the rear support case body 658 so that the rear surface thereof is separated from the rear installation surface portion 660 by the protruding height of the motor case boss portion 660h. . A movable member motor drive gear (drive gear) 672 is connected to the drive shaft of the movable member motor 657. When the movable member motor 657 is attached to the rear support case body 658, the movable member motor drive gear 672 is positioned between the rear surface of the movable member motor 657 and the rear installation surface portion 660, and the movable member motor drive is performed. The rear end portion side of the gear 672 faces the drive gear housing portion 662.

(About arm members)
Next, the arm member 607 will be described. The pair of left and right arm members 607 and 607 are connected to the left and right side portions (first and second guide grooves 610 and 611) of the movable member 503 and the left and right side portions (third guide groove 640) of the operating body 504. Both the members 503 and 504 are rotatably supported, and the arm member 607 is swung with respect to the game board 40, whereby the movable member 503 and the operating body 504 are reciprocated in the vertical direction. The arm member 607 rotates in one direction (clockwise in FIG. 116) to move the movable member 503 downward from the first position to the second position, and in the other direction (reverse in FIG. 117). By rotating in the clockwise direction, the movable member 503 is configured to move upward from the second position to the first position. As shown in FIG. 113, each arm member 607 includes a support shaft portion 673 that is rotatably supported by a first rotation shaft 571 and a first connection portion that is connected to a connection base portion 606 of the movable member 503. (Connecting portion) 674 and a second connecting portion (second connecting portion) 675, and a third connecting portion (connecting portion) 677 connected to the third guide groove 640 of the operating body 504. The base sheet metal 510 is supported. The arm member 607 includes a main arm portion 678 extending from the support shaft portion 673 to the first connection portion 674, an auxiliary arm portion 679 extending from the first connection portion 674 to the second connection portion 675, and the first connection portion 674. And an extending arm portion 680 that reaches the third connection portion 677.

  As shown in FIG. 113, the main arm portion 678 includes a main arm main body 681 and a main arm cover 682 disposed on the front side of the main arm main body 681. The main arm main body 681 basically includes a long main arm main body plate portion 683 and a main arm wall portion 684 that extends forward from the peripheral edge of the main arm main body plate portion 683. The main arm main body 681 is provided with a pair of main arm screw holes 681 a that are open forward and are spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the main arm main body 681. A main arm wall 684 is not provided at the edge of the main arm main body plate 683 on the open end side, and an opening 685 for extension is formed at that portion. Further, the main arm main body plate portion 683 is formed with a rotation connecting portion 686 to which the driving arm 656 is connected. The rotation connecting portion 686 is a position displaced in the main arm portion 678 from the midpoint of the line segment connecting the support shaft portion 673 and the first connecting portion 674 (see reference numeral M in FIG. 114) to the first connecting portion 674 side. Is provided. The rotation connecting portion 686 includes a connection recess (connection groove) 687 formed by recessing the upper main arm wall portion 684 downward in an arc shape, and a rotation connection provided in the connection recess 687 in the front-rear direction. And a shaft (first connecting shaft, connecting shaft) 688 (see FIG. 115 showing the right arm member 607). The main arm main body plate 683 is provided with a main arm rear shaft recess 689 that opens forward on the front surface facing the connection recess 687, and the main arm rear shaft recess 689 is provided behind the rotation connection shaft 688. The end is inserted.

  A support shaft portion 673 is provided on the open end side (the end portion side away from the movable member 503) of the main arm main body plate portion 683 so as to protrude forward from the front surface. The support shaft portion 673 is a cylindrical body in which a support shaft hole 673a penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed, and the first rotation shaft 571 is inserted into the support shaft hole 673a. The opening size of the support shaft hole 673a is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the first rotation shaft 571. By inserting the first rotation shaft 571 into the support shaft hole 673a, the first rotation shaft The support shaft portion 673 is supported by the shaft 571 without rattling. The front end portion of the support shaft portion 673 is formed so as to protrude forward from the main arm wall portion 684.

  The main arm main body 681 is provided with a main arm connecting wall 690 that connects a main arm wall portion 684 that is spaced apart in the lateral direction of the main arm main body 681. The main arm main body 681 is connected to the main arm connecting wall 690. A locking hole 690a is formed to open in the longitudinal direction. The support shaft portion 673 is provided with an urging member 691 having two elastic urging pieces 691a and 691a extending in opposite directions. One elastic biasing piece 691a is inserted into the locking hole 690a of the main arm connecting wall 690. Also, as shown in FIG. 116, the other elastic biasing piece 691a extends outward from the main arm main body 681 through the extension opening 685, and is locked between the elastic body locking portions 665 and 665. Is done. In a state where both elastic urging pieces 691a and 691a are locked, the elastic urging piece 691a locked in the locking hole 690a is in a direction to swing the main arm portion 678 (arm member 607) in the other direction. An elastic force is applied. That is, the arm member 607 is always urged by the urging member 691 in the direction of rotating in the other direction (the direction in which the movable member 503 is moved upward).

  In the main arm cover 682, a pair of main arm through holes 682a and 682a corresponding to the main arm screw holes 681a are formed to open in the front-rear direction. The main arm cover 682 is screwed to the front side of the main arm main body plate portion 683 by screwing a screw into the main arm screw hole 681a through the main arm through hole 682a aligned with the main arm screw hole 681a. A spindle through hole 682b that opens in the front-rear direction is formed at the outer end of the main arm cover 682 (on the side away from the movable member 503). The front end portion of the support shaft portion 673 faces the support shaft through hole 682b in a state where the main arm cover 682 is attached to the main arm main body plate portion 683. A main arm front shaft fitting hole 692 is formed on the rear surface of the main arm cover 682 so as to correspond to the main arm rear shaft recess 689 so as to open in the front-rear direction. The front end portion of the rotation connecting shaft 688 is fitted into the main arm front shaft fitting hole 692 in a state of being attached to the portion 683. It should be noted that the front end portion of the rotation connecting shaft 688 fitted in the main arm front shaft fitting hole 692 is prevented from coming off.

  The first connection portion 674 is slidably connected to the first guide groove 610 and connects the arm member 607 and the movable member 503. The first connecting portion 674 includes a connecting portion main body 693 formed integrally with the main arm portion 678 and the extending arm portion 680, and a locking board 694 disposed on the front side of the connecting portion main body 693. ing. The connection portion main body 693 is a circular member that connects the main arm portion 678 and the extension arm portion 680, and the diameter of the connection portion main body 693 is perpendicular to the extending direction of the first guide groove 610 (up and down Direction) is set larger than the opening dimension. The connection portion main body 693 is provided with a connection protrusion 695 that protrudes forward from the center thereof. The locking plate 694 is a disk-like member having substantially the same area as the connection portion main body 693, and the diameter of the locking plate 694 is set larger than the opening dimension in the vertical direction of the first guide groove 610. A locking boss portion 696 (see FIG. 118) protruding rearward is formed on the rear surface of the locking plate 694. The locking boss portion 696 is set such that the protruding amount from the rear surface of the locking plate 694 is slightly larger than the thickness of the connection base portion base 608 of the connection base portion 606. Further, the outer diameter of the locking boss 696 is set slightly smaller than the opening dimension in the vertical direction of the first guide groove 610 so that the first guide groove 610 can be inserted therethrough. Further, the locking boss portion 696 has a cross-sectional shape that substantially matches the arc shape of the end portion of the first guide groove 610, and approximately half of the side surface of the locking boss portion 696 fits into the end portion of the first guide groove 610. It is configured to match.

  The locking plate 694 and the locking boss portion 696 are formed with a connecting portion fitting hole 697 penetrating the central portion of both members in the front-rear direction. The opening size of the connection portion fitting hole 697 is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the connection protrusion 695, and the connection protrusion 695 is inserted into the connection portion fitting hole 697 from the front side. A stop plate 694 is rotatably attached to the connection portion main body 693. That is, the connection protrusion 695 is inserted from the rear into the connection portion fitting hole 697 of the locking plate 694 facing the first connection portion sliding space 612 via the first guide groove 610, and the connection portion The locking plate 694 is attached to the connection portion main body 693 by preventing the connection protrusion 695 facing the front side of the locking plate 694 through the fitting hole 697 (see FIG. 119). In a state where the locking plate 694 is attached to the connection portion main body 693, the rear end portion of the locking boss portion 696 comes into contact with the front surface of the connection portion main body 693, and the locking plate 694 is locked to the connection portion main body 693. The portion 696 is spaced forward by the amount of protrusion. Then, the edge portion of the first guide groove 610 is sandwiched between the locking plate 694 and the connection portion main body 693, so that the first connection portion 674 is slidably connected to the first guide groove 610.

  Here, when the movable member 503 is in the first position, the first connection portion 674 has an end portion (one end portion) on the outer side (support shaft portion 673 side) of the first guide groove 610 as shown in FIG. When the movable member 503 is in the second position, it is configured to contact the inner end (the other end of the operating body 504) of the first guide groove 610 as shown in FIG. ing. That is, the first guide groove 610 defines the amount of movement of the movable member 503 by contacting the first connection portion 674 at both ends. Further, when the movable member 503 moves from the first position to the second position, the locking boss portion 696 moves from the outside to the inside along the first guide groove 610 (see FIG. 121). . That is, the first connecting portion 674 slides the first guide groove 610 to the right (to the left in the first connecting portion 674 on the right side) when the movable member 503 moves from the first position to the second position. To do. On the other hand, when the movable member 503 moves from the second position to the first position, the locking boss portion 696 moves from the inside to the outside along the first guide groove 610. In other words, the first connecting portion 674 slides left in the first guide groove 610 (rightward in the first connecting portion 674 on the right side) when the movable member 503 moves from the second position to the first position. To do.

  The auxiliary arm portion 679 is formed to extend downward from a portion of the main arm portion 678 adjacent to the first connection portion 674 and extends in an arc shape with the support shaft portion 673 as a center. A second connection portion 675 is provided at the end of the auxiliary arm portion 679 on the open end side. The second connecting portion 675 is slidably connected to the second guide groove 611 and connects the arm member 607 and the rotating member. That is, the second connection portion 675 is connected to the movable member 503 below the first connection portion 674 (a place different from the first connection portion 674), and the first and second connection portions of each arm member 607. By connecting 674 and 675 to the movable member 503 at two locations, the movable member 503 that is long and heavy in the left-right direction is stably held as in the embodiment. The second connection portion 675 has basically the same configuration as the first connection portion 674, and therefore, the same reference numerals as those of the first connection portion 674 are attached to the respective members, and detailed description thereof is omitted. As shown in FIG. 119, the second connection portion 675 has a connection protrusion 695 inserted into the second guide groove 611 from the front, and a fitting for the connection portion of the locking plate 694 located in the second connection portion sliding space 613. The second connection portion 675 is inserted into the hole 697 and attached to the connection protrusion 695 facing the front side of the locking plate 694 through the connection portion fitting hole 697, so that the second connection portion 675 is connected to the second guide groove. 611 is slidably connected.

  Here, when the movable member 503 is in the first position, the second connection portion 675 is provided at the end portion (one end portion) inside the second guide groove 611 (on the operating body 504 side) as shown in FIG. When the movable member 503 is in the second position, it is configured to contact the outer end (the other end portion) of the second guide groove 611 (the support shaft portion 673 side) as shown in FIG. ing. That is, the second guide groove 611 defines the amount of movement of the movable member 503 in the same manner as the first guide groove 610 by having both end portions in contact with the second connection portion 675. Further, when the movable member 503 moves from the first position to the second position, the locking boss portion 696 moves from the inside to the outside along the second guide groove 611. That is, when the movable member 503 moves from the first position to the second position, the second connection portion 675 is obliquely upper left along the second guide groove 611 (in the second connection portion 675 on the right side, is obliquely upper right) ). On the other hand, when the movable member 503 moves from the second position to the first position, the locking boss portion 696 moves along the second guide groove 611 from the outside to the inside. That is, when the movable member 503 moves from the second position to the first position, the second connection portion 675 moves the second guide groove 611 obliquely to the lower right (in the right second connection portion 675, to the lower left). Slide. Therefore, the sliding direction of the second connection portion 675 when the movable member 503 is moved is opposite to that of the first connection portion 674.

  Here, as described above, the inner end portion of the second guide groove 611 has an arc shape with a central angle of 180 ° or more, and the locking boss portion 696 of the second connection portion 675 and the inner end portion thereof. Is larger than the outer end of the second guide groove 611. That is, the locking boss portion 696 has more than half of the side surface in contact with the inner end portion of the second guide groove 611, and the second connection portion 675 is slightly engaged with the inner end portion of the second guide groove 611. Held. However, the engagement between the second connection portion 675 and the inner end portion of the second guide groove 611 is the engagement between the second connection portion 675 and the outer end portion of the second guide groove 611 or the first connection portion 674. Is slightly stronger than the engagement between the first guide groove 610 and both ends of the first guide groove 610, and does not become an obstacle when the movable member 503 moves from the first position to the second position.

  The extension arm portion 680 is formed to linearly extend from the first connection portion 674 to the operating body 504 side (side away from the support shaft portion 673). The extending arm portion 680 is inclined toward the second connecting portion 675 with respect to the main arm portion 678, and the main arm portion 678 and the extending arm portion 680 have a “<” shape. A third connection portion 677 is provided on the open end portion side of the extension arm portion 680 (on the side opposite to the support shaft portion 673 across the first connection portion 674 in the arm member 607). The third connection portion 677 is slidably connected to the third guide groove 640 and connects the arm member 607 and the operating body 504. In other words, the operating body 504 is connected to the arm member 607 at a location farther from the support shaft portion 673 than the first connection portion 674 and the second connection portion 675. Therefore, the displacement amount of the operating body 504 when the arm member 607 is swung is larger than that of the movable member 503, and the operating body 504 moves relative to the movable member 503. Note that the third connection portion 677 has basically the same configuration as the first and second connection portions 674 and 675, so that the same reference numerals as those of the first connection portion 674 are assigned to the respective members, and description thereof is omitted. The third connection portion 677 inserts the connection protrusion 695 of the connection portion main body 693 into the connection portion fitting hole 697 of the locking plate 694 through which the locking boss portion 696 is inserted from the front side into the third guide groove 640, and the connection The connection protrusion 695 facing the front opening of the part fitting hole 697 is prevented from coming off, thereby being connected to the third guide groove 640. Then, as the arm member 607 swings, the third connection portion 677 is configured to slide in the left-right direction along the extending direction of the third guide groove 640.

(About the drive arm)
The drive arms 656 and 656 are disposed on the support case member 569 so that the posture can be changed, and the arm members 607 and 607 are suspended and held, and the arm members 607 and 607 are swung by changing the posture by themselves. It is. Each drive arm 656 changes its posture between a first posture corresponding to the first position of the movable member 503 as shown in FIG. 116 and a second posture corresponding to the second position of the movable member 503 as shown in FIG. It is configured to That is, the drive arm 656 changes the posture from the first posture to the second posture, thereby rotating the arm member 607 in one direction, and changing the posture from the second posture to the first posture, thereby changing the arm member 607. It is designed to rotate in the other direction.

  The drive arm 656 is connected to the first link portion 698 connected to the arm member 607 (main arm portion 678), and to the second link shaft 698 and the second link shaft 572. The link unit 699 is basically configured. As shown in FIG. 113, the first link portion 698 is a plate-like body having a required length, and first link connection holes 698a and 698a that open in the front-rear direction are formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction. . The first link portion 698 has a main arm portion 678 (an arm member) by attaching the main arm cover 682 to the main arm main body plate portion 683 in a state where the rotation connection shaft 688 is inserted into the first link connection hole 698a. 607) is rotatably coupled. Further, the link portion connecting shaft (second connecting shaft) 700 is inserted into the other first link connecting hole 698a.

  The second link portion 699 includes a second link body 701 having a required length, a drive arm driven gear (driven gear) 702 that meshes with a movable member motor drive gear 672 of the movable member motor 657, and the drive arm. And a drive arm contact portion (contact portion) 703 formed on the driven gear 702. The second link main body 701 is formed with a second link connecting hole 701a that opens in the front-rear direction at one end, and the link portion connecting shaft 700 inserted through the first link connecting hole 698a is inserted through the second link connecting hole 701a. By preventing the link connecting shaft 700 from coming off, the second link portion 699 is connected to the first link portion 698 so as to be rotatable from the rear side. On the other end side of the second link main body 701, a rotation shaft support portion 704 is formed so as to protrude from the front surface of the second link main body 701, and a second arm shaft support hole that opens to the rotation shaft support portion 704 in the front-rear direction. 704a is formed. The opening dimension of the second arm shaft support hole 704a is set slightly larger than the outer diameter of the second rotation shaft 572 of the base metal plate 510, and the second rotation shaft 572 is inserted into the second arm shaft support hole 704a. By being inserted, the second link portion 699 is pivotally supported by the second rotation shaft 572. Here, when the second link portion 699 rotates in one direction (clockwise in FIG. 116), the drive arm 656 changes its posture from the first posture to the second posture, and the second link portion 699 moves to the other position. By rotating in a direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 117), the drive arm 656 changes its posture from the second posture to the first posture. The second link main body 701 is formed with a fan-shaped drive arm original position detected piece 701b protruding in the short direction of the second link main body 701.

  The drive arm driven gear 702 is a semicircular gear having the rotation shaft support portion 704 as the center of rotation, and is integrally formed with the second link body 701. The teeth of the drive arm driven gear 702 are formed on the peripheral edge of the arc portion. The drive arm driven gear 702 is formed so as to protrude from the rear surface of the second link main body 701 in the short direction of the second link main body 701. 116, the drive arm driven gear 702 is installed on the support case member 569 so that the tooth portion faces the side opposite to the regulating rib 668 (the movable member motor 657 side). In a state where the second link portion 699 is pivotally supported by the second rotation shaft 572, a part of the tooth portion of the drive arm driven gear 702 faces between the rear surface of the movable member motor 657 and the rear installation surface portion 660. The movable member motor drive gear 672 is meshed with the movable member motor drive gear 672. The drive arm driven gear 702 is integrally formed with a drive arm abutting portion 703 so as to protrude forward from a linear end edge connecting both end portions of the tooth portion. The drive arm abutting portion 703 includes a lower limit position abutting portion 703 a located on the link portion connecting shaft 700 side across the rotation shaft support portion 704 and an upper limit position abutting located on the opposite side of the link portion connecting shaft 700. Part 703b.

(When the drive arm is in the first position)
Next, the case where the drive arm 656 is in the first posture will be described. As shown in FIG. 116, when the drive arm 656 is in the first posture, the link connecting shaft 700 is positioned above the rotating shaft support portion 704, and the rotation connecting shaft 688 is sandwiched between the rotation shaft support portions 704. It is configured to be located on the opposite side. That is, when the drive arm 656 is in the first posture, the link connecting shaft 700 is positioned on the left side of the rotating shaft support 704 (right side in the right driving arm 656), and the rotating connecting shaft 688 is the rotating shaft. It is located on the right side of the support portion 704 (left side in the right drive arm 656). Further, the rotation connecting shaft 688 is located at substantially the same height as the regulating rib 668, and the first link portion 698 and the second link portion 699 are partially overlapped on the link portion connecting shaft 700 side. Further, the upper limit position abutting portion 703b abuts on the end face of the regulating rib 668 on the outside (the side away from the movable member 503), and the second link portion 699 is prevented from rotating in the other direction. . That is, the restriction rib 668 changes the posture of the drive arm 656 in the direction in which the arm member 607 rotates in the other direction when the drive arm 656 is in the first posture and contacts the upper limit position contact portion 703b. Blocking. Further, the drive arm original position detected piece 701b faces the concave detecting portion 667c of the movable member original position sensor 667b, and the movable member original position detecting device 667 detects the original position (first position) of the movable member 503.

  Further, when the drive arm 656 is in the first posture, the arm member 607 is inclined upward as the main arm portion 678 moves from the support shaft portion 673 toward the first connection portion 674 and the extending arm portion 680 is substantially horizontal. It is a posture. In this state, the first connection portion 674 and the third connection portion 677 are positioned above the support shaft portion 673, and the second connection portion 675 is positioned at substantially the same height as the support shaft portion 673. When the drive arm 656 is in the first posture, the first connection portion 674 abuts on the outer end of the first guide groove 610 and the second connection portion 675 is in contact with the second guide groove 611 as described above. It is in contact with the inner end. That is, the first connecting portion 674 and the second connecting portion 675 abut on the opposite left and right ends of the corresponding guide grooves 610 and 611, so that the movable member 503 is moved upward (first from the second position). The first position is held in a state in which movement in the direction of movement to the position is restricted. Further, when the drive arm 656 is in the first posture, the link portion connecting shaft 700 is located outside the rotation shaft support portion 704, so that the movable member 503 is provided to the second link portion 699 via the arm member 607. The load due to its own weight is configured to be applied in a direction in which the second link portion 699 is rotated in the other direction. When the drive arm 656 is in the first posture, the second link portion 699 is restricted from turning in the other direction by the restriction rib 668. Therefore, the second link portion 699 is turned by the load of the movable member 503. Has been stopped.

(When the drive arm is in the 2nd position)
Next, the case where the drive arm 656 is in the second posture will be described. As shown in FIG. 117, when the drive arm 656 is in the second posture, the link portion connecting shaft 700 is configured to be located on the inner side (on the operating body 504 side) than the rotation shaft support portion 704. Further, the rotation connecting shaft 688 is positioned at substantially the same height as the support shaft portion 673, and the first link portion 698 and the second link portion 699 are bent by approximately 90 °. Further, the lower limit position abutting portion 703a abuts on the inner end surface (the working body 504 side) of the regulating rib 668, and the second link portion 699 is prevented from rotating in one direction. That is, when the drive arm 656 is in the second posture, the restriction rib 668 prevents the posture of the drive arm 656 from changing in the direction in which the arm member 607 rotates in one direction. When the drive arm 656 is in the second posture, the drive arm original position detected piece 701b is separated from the concave detection portion 667c of the movable member original position sensor 667b.

  When the drive arm 656 is in the second posture, the arm member 607 has the main arm portion 678 in a substantially horizontal posture, and the extending arm portion 680 is changed from the first connection portion 674 to the third connection portion 677. The posture is inclined downward as it goes. In this state, the first connection portion 674 is positioned at substantially the same height as the support shaft portion 673, and the second connection portion 675 and the third connection portion 677 are positioned below the support shaft portion 673. When the drive arm 656 is in the second posture, the first connection portion 674 abuts on the inner end of the first guide groove 610 and the second connection portion 675 is outside the second guide groove 611 as described above. Abuts against the end of That is, the first connecting portion 674 and the second connecting portion 675 abut on the opposite left and right ends of the corresponding guide grooves 610 and 611, so that the movable member 503 is moved downward (from the first position to the second position). The second position is held in a state where movement in the direction of movement to the position is restricted. Furthermore, when the drive arm 656 is in the second posture, as shown in FIG. 117, the link connecting shaft 700 is positioned inside the rotation shaft support 704, so that the second link 699 is interposed via the arm member 607. The load due to the weight of the movable member 503 applied to the second link portion 699 is configured to be applied in a direction in which the second link portion 699 is rotated in one direction. As described above, when the drive arm 656 is in the second posture, the rotation of the second link portion 699 in one direction is restricted by the restriction rib 668, so the second link portion 699 is caused by the load of the movable member 503. Is configured to be prevented from rotating.

(About the movable effect of the first movable effect device)
Next, the movable effect of the first movable effect device 500 will be described below. In the first movable effect device 500, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a complex movable effect is performed by the three members of the movable body 501, the movable member 503, and the operating body 504.

(About movable performance of movable member device)
First, the movable effect of the movable member device 505 will be described. In a state before the movable member device 505 performs the movable effect, the drive arms 656 and 656 are in the first posture, the movable member 503 is located at the first position, and the operating body 504 overlaps the rear of the movable member 503. Are accommodated in the working body accommodating recess 605.

  First, a case where the left and right movable member motors 657 and 657 are driven in synchronization to move the movable member 503 and the operating body 504 in parallel up and down will be described. When the predetermined condition is established, the overall control device 37 sends control signals to the left and right movable member motors 657 and 657, and both the movable member motors 657 and 657 are driven in synchronization. Then, the movable member motor drive gear 672 rotates, and the drive arm driven gear 702 engaged with the movable member motor drive gear 672 is rotated. Then, the second link portion 699 rotates in one direction (in FIG. 124, the left second link portion 699 is clockwise and the right second link portion 699 is counterclockwise), and the drive arm 656 is rotated. Start posture change. That is, the rotation connecting shaft 688 that is a connecting portion between the drive arm 656 and the arm member 607 is lowered, and the arm member 607 is rotated in one direction against the elastic force of the biasing member 691.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 121, the first connection portion 674 of the arm member 607 slides in the horizontal direction inward from the outer end portion toward the inner end portion along the first guide groove 610, and the arm member 607. The second connection portion 675 slides obliquely upward from the inner end portion toward the outer end portion of the second guide groove 611. Thereby, the movable member 503 moves downward with the horizontal posture. As described above, in the embodiment, the first and second connection portions 674 and 675 of the arm member 607 are connected to the movable member 503, and the movable member 503 is supported by the both arm members 607 at four locations. Therefore, as in the embodiment, even the long and heavy movable member 503 can be stably supported, and the movable member 503 can be reliably moved without being blurred.

  Here, in the embodiment, the rotation connecting portion 686 that is the connecting portion between the arm member 607 and the drive arm 656 is first from the midpoint of the line connecting the support shaft portion 673 and the first connecting portion 674 of the arm member 607. It is biased toward the one connecting portion 674 side (see FIG. 114). Therefore, compared with the case where the rotation connecting portion 686 is provided on the support shaft portion 673 side from the midpoint of the line connecting the support shaft portion 673 and the first connection portion 674, the force required to swing the arm member 607 is increased. Can be made smaller. Accordingly, the movable member motor 657 having a relatively small output can be used, and the manufacturing cost and the running cost can be suppressed. Since the drive arm 656 is configured such that the first link portion 698 is connected inside the connection recess 687 of the arm member 607, compared to the case where the drive arm 656 is connected to the front surface or the rear surface side of the arm member 607, The arm member 607 and the drive arm 656 can be connected with good balance. Therefore, the arm member 607 can be stably swung by the drive arm 656, and the smooth movement of the movable member 503 can be realized.

  As each arm member 607 rotates in one direction, the third connecting portion 677 moves the third guide groove 640 in the horizontal direction. Furthermore, the connection guide part 631 provided in the operation body 504 slides downward along the connection guide shaft 648, so that the operation body 504 moves downward in a horizontal posture. That is, in the movable member device 505, the operating body 504 moves downward in synchronization with the movable member 503, so that both members can perform a movable presentation with a sense of unity, and the entertainment of the game is enhanced.

  Here, the third connection portion 677 that connects the arm member 607 and the operating body 504 is separated from the support shaft portion 673 from the first and second connection portions 674 and 675, and the third connection portion 677 is moved when the arm member 607 is swung. The displacement amount of the three connecting portions 677 is large. Therefore, since the moving amount of the operating body 504 is larger than that of the movable member 503, as shown in FIG. 121, the operating body 504 protrudes from the lower end portion of the movable member 503 as the movable member 503 moves downward. The operating body 504 moves relatively downward with respect to the movable member 503. That is, since the operating body 504 is gradually exposed from the state hidden behind the movable member 503 and can be viewed from the player side, the movable body 504 can perform a movable effect with a high effect. In addition, since the connection guide portion 631 is guided along the connection guide shaft 648, the operating body 504 can be reliably moved. Further, since the narrow diameter portion 654 of the connection guide portion 631 has a cross-sectional shape slightly larger than the outer diameter of the connection guide shaft 648, the movement of the operating body 504 in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operating body 504 from moving back and forth and moving while rattling, and to move the operating body 504 stably. The operating body 504 is provided with a third guide groove 640 extending in the left-right direction, and the third connecting portion 677 slides in the third guide groove 640 so that the operating body 504 can be moved stably. Thus, the operating body 504 can be moved to the position.

  Here, the movable member 503 according to the embodiment is provided with a base connector opening 614 and a cable connector opening 615 on the rear surface of the base protrusion 603, and the middle board connector 600 and the middle board cable connector 601. The flat cable 566 and the wirings 647, 599b, and 598b do not get in the way. Therefore, when the operating body 504 moves with respect to the movable member 503, the connector portions 600, 601 and the flat cable 566 are less likely to interfere with the operating body 504, and the disconnection or the movement of the operating body 504 occurs. Suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the movable member 503 according to the embodiment is in the first position, and the left and right overlapping portions 582 and 582 are located between the panel body 42 and the upper side portion 52 a of the back unit 50. The structure is long in the left-right direction. By moving the long movable member 503 downward in this way, it is possible to provide a powerful movable effect to the player. Moreover, since the movable member 503 has a three-dimensional shape in which the exposed portion 583 facing the front side through the window 100a of the display frame 100 projects forward, it is possible to perform a more powerful movable effect. Further, when the movable member 503 moves downward, the left and right overlapping portions 582 and 582 move in the left space 781 and the right space 751, respectively. Also in this case, since the left and right overlapping portions 582 and 582 can be visually recognized through the transparent board main body 42, the player can check the entire movable member 503 and can enjoy a powerful movable effect. Moreover, since the display frame 100 is configured to be transparent, the left and right overlapping portions 582 and 582 are more easily visible. Further, since the left and right overlapping portions 582 and 582 gradually face the window 100a of the display frame 100 as the movable member 503 moves downward, the player can move the entire movable member 503 including the overlapping portions 582 and 582. Directly visible.

  By the way, when the movable member 503 and the actuating body 504 are movable, the overall control device 37 sends control signals to the movable member light emitting device 581 and the actuating body light emitting device 636 provided to each of the light emitting devices 581 and 636. Is made to emit light. That is, with respect to the movable member 503, the movable member light emitting element 596 of the movable member light emitting device 581 emits light and irradiates the side end surface of the light emitting plate 594 with light. The entire light emitting plate 594 is brightened by the light emitted from the movable member light emitting element 596, and the front plate decoration member 589 emits light. Thereby, the English character visually recognized through the front plate through-hole 587 of the movable member 503 is in a light-emitting state, and the movable member 503 at the time of movement can be made more conspicuous. Similarly, when the operating body light emitting element 645 of the operating body light emitting device 636 is turned on, the large operating body decoration portion 638 and the small operating body decoration portion 637 emit light, and the effect effect of the operating body 504 moving downward is enhanced. It is done.

  When the second link portion 699 further rotates and the drive arm 656 changes its posture to the second posture, the overall control device 37 sends a stop signal to the left and right movable member motors 657 and 657 at the same time. The driving of the member motors 657 and 657 is stopped. Then, the rotation of each movable member motor drive gear 672 is stopped, and the rotation of the drive arm driven gear 702 is stopped. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 122, the arm member 607 stops rotating with the main arm portion 678 being substantially horizontal, and stops the movable member 503 at the second position. At this time, the first connection portion 674 of each arm member 607 is connected to the inner end portion of the first guide groove 610 (the left first connection portion 674 is the right end portion of the first guide groove 610 and the right first connection portion 674). Is in contact with the left end portion of the first guide groove 610, and the second connection portion 675 is an outer end portion of the second guide groove 611 (the left second connection portion 675 is the left end portion of the second guide groove 611, The right second connection portion 675 is in contact with the right end portion of the second guide groove 611. That is, the movable member 503 can be reliably stopped at the second position by the first and second connection portions 674 and 675 coming into contact with the end portions of the first and second guide grooves 610 and 611, respectively. It becomes.

  Here, in the embodiment, when the drive arm 656 changes its posture to the second posture, the lower limit position contact portion 703a of the drive arm driven gear 702 contacts the restriction rib 668. Therefore, the posture change of the drive motor is prevented, and even the heavy movable member 503 as in the embodiment can be reliably stopped at the second position. That is, in the embodiment, in addition to the configuration in which the first and second connection portions 674 and 675 are in contact with the end portions of the first and second guide grooves 610 and 611, the restriction rib 668 prevents the change in the posture of the drive arm 656. By adopting such a configuration, the movable member 503 can be reliably stopped at the second position. Moreover, the load due to the weight of the movable member 503 is applied in the direction of rotating the second link portion 699 in one direction via the arm member 607, but the restriction rib 668 abuts on the lower limit position abutting portion 703a. Thus, the load from the movable member 503 can be supported by the regulation rib 668. Therefore, even after the movable member 503 arrives at the second position, the movable member 503 can be stably held at the second position. Furthermore, since the regulation rib 668 is configured to prevent a change in the posture of the drive arm 656 connected to the arm member 607 between the support shaft part 673 and the first connection part 674, the regulation rib 668 rotates the arm member 607. The load applied to the regulation rib 668 and the drive arm 656 can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the movement is directly blocked. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the restriction rib 668 and the drive arm 656 from being damaged, and it is not necessary to provide a very strong restriction rib 668, so that an increase in product cost can be prevented.

  In the embodiment, the drive arm contact portion 703 is provided on the drive arm driven gear 702 of the second link portion 699 that is directly driven by the movable member motor 657, and the restriction rib 668 is in contact with the drive arm driven gear 702. . Therefore, even if the movable member motor 657 does not stop even though the movable member 503 arrives at the first position, the load applied by the movable member motor 657 can be received by the restriction rib 668. That is, when the regulating rib 668 contacts the drive arm driven gear 702, the load by the movable member motor 657 is not transmitted to the first link portion 698 and the arm member 607, and these members are deformed or damaged. Can be prevented.

  Here, when the movable member 503 arrives at the second position, as shown in FIG. 6, the actuating body 504 is positioned below the movable member 503, and the large actuating element decoration portion 638 and the lower end portion of the movable member 503 are arranged. The small operating body decoration 637 protrudes. Moreover, since the movable member 503 is positioned below, the left and right movable bodies 501 can be viewed from the front via the display frame 100. That is, when the movable member 503 moves from the first position to the second position, the movable body 501 and the operating body 504 are exposed, and an unexpected game effect can be provided to the player.

  Next, a case where the movable member 503 moves from the second position to the first position will be described. The overall control device 37 sends control signals to the left and right movable member motors 657 to drive both movable member motors 657 in the opposite directions in synchronization. Then, each drive arm driven gear 702 rotates and the second link portion 699 rotates in the other direction (in FIG. 114, the left second link portion 699 is counterclockwise, and the right second link portion 699 is clockwise. The driving arm 656 changes its posture from the second posture to the first posture. As a result, the arm member 607 rotates in the other direction, and the movable member 503 moves upward in a parallel posture. At this time, the first connecting portion 674 slides the first guide groove 610 outward from the inner end. On the other hand, the second connection portion 675 slides in the second guide groove 611 inward from the outer end portion. As described above, even when the movable member 503 moves upward, each arm member 607 supports the movable member 503 at two locations, so that the movable member 503 can be stably moved as in the embodiment.

  The operating body 504 moves upward relative to the movable member 503 and gradually hides behind the movable member 503. Also in this case, the third connecting portion 677 slides in the third guide groove 640 and the connecting guide portion 631 is guided upward along the connecting guide shaft 648, so that the operating body 504 is moved back and forth and left and right. It is possible to move upward stably without shaking in the direction.

  When the drive arm 656 returns to the first posture, the drive arm original position detected piece 701b provided on the drive arm driven gear 702 faces the concave detection portion 667c of the movable member original position sensor 667b, and the movable member original position is obtained. The detection device 667 detects the original position of the movable member 503. When the overall control device 37 receives this detection signal, the overall control device 37 simultaneously stops driving the left and right movable member motors 657. As a result, as shown in FIG. 120, the arm member 607 stops rotating in a posture in which the main arm portion 678 is inclined upward as the main arm portion 678 is separated from the support shaft portion 673, and the movable member 503 stops at the first position. . At this time, the first connection portion 674 of each arm member 607 is connected to the outer end portion of the first guide groove 610 (the first connection portion 674 on the left side is the left end portion of the first guide groove 610 and the first connection portion 674 on the right side). Is in contact with the right end portion of the first guide groove 610, and the second connection portion 675 is an inner end portion of the second guide groove 611 (the second connection portion 675 on the left side is the right end portion of the second guide groove 611, The right second connection portion 675 is in contact with the left end portion of the second guide groove 611.

  As described above, even when the movable member 503 arrives at the first position, the first and second connection portions 674 and 675 are in contact with the end portions of the first and second guide grooves 610 and 611, respectively. The member 503 is reliably stopped at the first position. Moreover, the inner end portion of the second guide groove 611 has an arc shape with a central angle of 180 ° or more, and the locking boss portion 696 has an end portion on the inner side of the second guide groove 611 having more than half of the side surface. Abut. That is, the locking boss portion 696 is engaged with the inner end portion of the second guide groove 611, and the second connection portion 675 is engaged with the inner end portion of the second guide groove 611 with a slight force. It will be in the state. Thereby, it becomes resistance at the time of separating the 2nd connection part 675 from the inner edge part of the 2nd guide groove 611, and it becomes possible to maintain the movable member 503 in a 1st position reliably.

  Further, when the drive arm 656 returns to the first posture, the restriction rib 668 contacts the upper limit position contact portion 703b of the drive arm driven gear 702 and prevents the second link portion 699 from rotating in the other direction. Is done. That is, when the movable member 503 arrives at the first position, the restriction rib 668 abuts against the drive arm 656 in the first posture to prevent the posture change of the drive arm 656, so that the movable member 503 is in the first position. It will stop even more reliably. Here, in the drive arm 656 in the first posture, the link connecting shaft 700 is opposite to the rotating connecting shaft 688 across the rotating shaft supporting portion 704 (for the left driving arm 656, the link connecting shaft 700 rotates. For the left and right drive arms 656 of the moving shaft support 704, the link connecting shaft 700 is to the right of the rotating shaft support 704), and the link connecting shaft 700 is positioned above the rotating shaft support 704. To do. Therefore, the load due to the weight of the movable member 503 is applied in the direction in which the second link portion 699 is rotated in the other direction. Since the drive arm 656 in the first posture is prevented from rotating in the other direction by the second link portion 699 by the restriction rib 668, the movable member 503 is prevented from moving downward due to its own weight. .

  Next, a case where the left and right movable member motors 657 are driven asynchronously to rotate the operating body 504 will be described. For example, when the left and right movable member motors 657 are driven asynchronously and the rotation amounts of the left and right arm members 607 are made different, as shown in FIG. 131, the left and right third connection portions 677 and 677 Shifting in the vertical direction, the operating body 504 rotates around the connection guide portion 631 (see FIG. 126). That is, by configuring the guide insertion hole 653 from the narrow diameter portion 654 and the expanded portions 655 and 655, the connection guide portion 631 can be rotated with respect to the connection guide shaft 648 around the small diameter portion 654. . Accordingly, not only can the actuating body 504 be simply translated, but also a movement such as turning can be added, and a novel movable effect can be performed. In addition, since the opening cross section of the small diameter portion 654 is set in accordance with the outer shape of the connection guide shaft 648, the movement of the connection guide portion 631 in the front-rear and left-right directions is restricted, and the operating body 504 is stably rotated. It can be moved.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 126, the connection guide portion 631 faces the sub-base restriction groove 630 of the movable member 503, and when the operating body 504 rotates at a predetermined angle, the connection guide portion 631 becomes the sub-base restriction. The groove 630 is in contact with the side wall portion. That is, the side wall portion of the sub-base regulating groove 630 abuts on the connection guide portion 631, so that the operating body 504 is prevented from rotating excessively, and a large load is not applied to the operating body 504 and the arm member 607. obtain. In addition, when the movable member motor 657 is driven asynchronously, the left and right first and second connection portions 674 and 675 are also shifted vertically, so that the movable member 503 has left and right first and second connection portions. 674 and 675 are inclined according to the amount of vertical displacement.

(About movable effects of movable devices)
Next, the movable effect of the movable body device 502 will be described. The movable effect of the movable device is such that the movable member 503 of the movable member device 505 moves downward from the first position so that the movable body 501 can be viewed from the front via the display frame body 100. Done. Further, at the time of non-production, as shown in FIG. 86, both movable bodies 501 and 501 are positioned so that the distances from the first movable body drive gear 562 are equal. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the overall control device 37 sends a control signal to the first movable body motor 508. Then, the first movable body motor 508 is driven to rotate the first movable body motor drive shaft 508a at a predetermined rotational speed. For example, as shown in FIG. 89, when the first movable body drive gear 562 rotates in the clockwise direction, the rack portion 530 slides the rack portion accommodating portion 529 leftward. At this time, the lower portion of the rack body 552 slides on the rack sliding surface, and the rack portion 530 smoothly slides the rack portion accommodating portion 529 leftward. Further, since the drive gear coupling boss portion 562a of the first movable body drive gear 562 faces the gear escape recess 556 of the rack portion 530, the drive gear coupling boss portion 562a does not interfere with the rack portion 530. Absent.

  When the rack portion 530 slides, the rack portion detected piece 555 facing the movable body original position detecting recess 565a slides to the left on the long groove 560 for the detected piece of the motor mounting board 557, and the rack portion detected piece 555 is moved to the movable body. Detach from the original position detection recess 565a. Also, as the rack portion 530 slides, the left and right movable bodies 501, 501 connected to the rack portion 530 via the movable body connecting piece 546 start moving to the left in synchronization. As described above, the movement of the movable bodies 501 and 501 to the left in synchronization causes the eye pattern on the design surface portion 550 of the movable body 501 to move to the left. It can be visually recognized through the window 575 for the movable body of the member 730, and can provide an effect with an impact on the player. The sliding member 545 fitted in the fitting recess 517 of the first case body 507 slides to the left along the fitting recess 517 to guide the movable body 501, so that the movable body 501 is left It becomes possible to move toward the direction stably.

  As described above, in the first movable effect device 500 according to the embodiment, in addition to the movable effect by the movable member 503 and the actuating body 504, the movable effect by the movable bodies 501 and 501 is further performed. It can provide a production and can produce a high production effect. In addition, the movable bodies 501 and 501 perform a movable effect of moving in the left-right direction, whereas the movable member 503 and the operating body 504 move in the vertical direction orthogonal to the moving direction of the movable bodies 501 and 501. It is possible to perform a variable moving effect by a plurality of members, and to enhance the interest of the game.

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 86 and 85, the wiring 501 a connected to the movable body light emitting device 543 inside the movable body 501 is first through the front wall portion through-hole portion 519 of the first case body 507. The first movable body guide 528 is guided to the first movable body guide 528. Then, the wiring 501a guided through the first movable body guide portion 528 is drawn out to the rear side of the substrate facing surface portion 520 through the rear wall portion through-hole portion 522, and the corresponding movable body of the movable body relay substrate 509 corresponds. It is connected to the wiring connector portion 509c. That is, since the wiring 501a of the movable body 501 can be guided to the relay board 509 for the movable body via the movable body 501 guide portion provided in the front surface of the first case body 507, the wiring is moved along with the movement of the movable body 501. It can suppress that 501a protrudes ahead from the case body 507 for 1st. Therefore, the wiring 501a of the movable body 501 can be prevented from being caught by another member, and the wiring 501a can be prevented from being disconnected. In addition, since the wiring 501a of the movable body 501 is connected to the movable body relay substrate 509 provided on the surface of the first case body 507 opposite to the movable body 501, the wiring 501a is connected to the movable body 501. It becomes difficult to interfere. Furthermore, the wiring 508e and 564d of the first movable body motor 508 and the movable body original position detecting device 563 are connected to the first case through the rear wall insertion hole provided in the rear wall 521 of the first case body 507. The body 507 is pulled out to the rear side of the substrate facing surface portion 520. Accordingly, the wirings 508e and 564d of the first movable body motor 508 and the movable body original position detecting device 563 are prevented from interfering with the movable body 501, and a malfunction occurs in the movement of the movable body 501, or the wirings 508e and 564d Can be prevented from breaking.

  When the sliding member 545 arrives at the left end of the fitting recess 517, the overall control device 37 reverses the first movable body motor 508. Then, as shown in FIG. 90, the first movable body drive gear 562 rotates counterclockwise, the rack portion 530 slides to the right, and the left and right movable bodies 501 and 501 move to the right. start. That is, the left and right movable bodies 501 and 501 can change the moving direction at the same time, thereby allowing the two movable bodies 501 and 501 to move with a sense of unity. In addition, it is possible to produce an effect as if the left and right eyeballs look around through the movable body window portions 575 and 575 of the first movable body decoration member 730, and a powerful effect can be provided. When the movable body 501 moves to the right and the rack portion detected piece 555 reaches the movable body original position detecting recess 565a, the movable body original position detection device 563 detects the original position of the movable body 501. The original position detection signal is sent to the overall control device 37, which sends a stop signal to the first movable body motor 508, and the first movable body motor 508 stops driving. Thereby, the movable effect by the movable body apparatus 502 is complete | finished. The overall control device 37 may continue the movement of the movable body 501 without stopping the first movable body motor 508 even after receiving the first original position detection signal. In this case, the first movable body motor 508 is stopped after the movable body 501 reciprocates a plurality of times in the left and right directions.

(About the second movable effect device)
Next, the second movable effect device (movable effect device) 750 will be described. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the second movable effect device 750 performs a movable effect and a light emission effect. As shown in FIGS. 5 and 16, the right side portion 52 b of the back unit 50 and the rear surface of the panel body 42 Is disposed in the right space 751 defined between the two. As shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the second movable effect device 750 includes a right part installation member (installation member) 752 disposed on the right side part 52b (game board 40) of the back unit 50, and the right part installation. It is basically composed of a right rotating body (light-emitting movable body) 753 rotatably disposed on the member 752 and a right rotating body motor (driving means) 754 that rotates the right rotating body 753. Has been.

(Right part installation material)
As shown in FIGS. 134 and 135, the right portion installation member 752 is disposed on the rear side installation case body 755 attached to the right side portion 52 b of the back unit 50 and on the front side of the rear side installation case body 755. It is comprised from the front side installation case body 756. FIG. A plurality of rear installation case boss portions 755a projecting rearward are formed on the rear surface of the rear installation case body 755, and the rear installation case body 755 is connected to the back unit 50 via the right installation portion boss receiving portion 755a. Is screwed to the right side portion 52b. Further, a plurality of rear case body boss receiving portions 755b are provided in the front surface of the rear installation case body 755.

  On the rear surface of the rear installation case body 755, a right motor installation portion 757 on which a right rotating body motor 754 is installed is formed to project forward, and the front and rear of the right motor installation portion 757 are front and rear. A right drive shaft through hole 757a that is open in the direction is formed. Further, on the front surface of the right motor installation portion 757, a pair of right portion installation portion screw holes 757b and 757b are formed open in the front-rear direction so as to sandwich the right drive shaft through hole 757a. In addition, a plurality of rear installation case body wiring hooks 758 are formed on the rear surface of the rear installation case body 755, and a lower wiring insertion portion 759 that is open in the vertical direction is formed on the lower rear surface of the rear installation case body 755. Is formed. The rear installation case body 755 is formed with a cylindrical right bearing portion 760 that is open in the front-rear direction and protrudes in the front-rear direction. A pair of right cylindrical bearing bodies 762 and 762 for receiving a right support shaft rod 761 (described later) are fitted into the front and rear openings of the right bearing portion 760. Further, a rotation restricting protrusion 763 is formed on the front surface of the rear installation case body 755 so as to be located on the right side of the right bearing portion 760 and to protrude forward. Further, an arcuate guide portion (guide portion) 764 that opens in the front-rear direction is formed on the rear-side installation case body 755 so as to protrude forward (toward the right-side rotating body 753) from the front surface of the rear-side installation case body 755. Has been. The arcuate guide portion 764 is formed so as to be partially connected to the lower portion of the right bearing portion 760, and extends in an arc shape with the right bearing portion 760 as the center.

  The front installation case body 756 has a design surface of the right installation member 752 with a required decoration on the front surface. On the rear surface of the front installation case body 756, a plurality of front case body boss portions 756a corresponding to the rear installation case body boss receiving portions 755b are formed to protrude rearward. Then, the rear end portion of the front case body boss portion 756a is fitted to the rear case body boss receiving portion 755b, and a screw is attached to the front case body boss portion 756a through the through hole of the rear case body boss receiving portion 755b. Is screwed to the front side of the rear side installation case body 755. A first front case body opening 765 and a second front case body opening 766 that are open in the front-rear direction are formed in the front installation case body 756 in a vertical relationship. Then, with the front installation case body 756 attached to the rear installation case body 755, the arcuate guide portion 764, the right bearing portion 760, and the rotation restricting projection 763 are moved forward via the first front case body opening 765. It is configured to face. Further, when the front installation case body 756 is attached to the rear installation case body 755, as shown in FIG. 136, the arcuate guide portion 764 protrudes forward through the first front case body opening 765. ing. In addition, a right part installation part screw hole 757b and a right part drive shaft through hole 757a face the second front case body opening 766.

  The right rotating body motor 754 is driven and controlled by the overall control device 37 so that the right driving shaft 754a is rotated in the forward and reverse directions. The right rotating body motor 754 includes a pair of right rotating body motor mounting pieces 754b and 754b that protrude outward from the motor body, and is open to the right rotating body motor mounting pieces 754b in the front-rear direction. A right side rotating body motor through hole 754c is formed. Then, the right drive shaft 754a is inserted through the right drive shaft through hole 757a from the rear, the right rotating body motor 754 is installed in the right motor installation section 757, and the right rotating body motor through hole 754c is installed. By screwing a screw into the right part installation part screw hole 757b, the right part rotating body motor 754 is screwed to the right part motor installation part 757. In a state where the right part rotating body motor 754 is attached to the right part motor installation part 757, the right part drive shaft 754a projects forward through the second front case body opening 766. A right drive gear (drive gear) 767 is connected to the right drive shaft 754 a of the right rotating body motor 754, and the right drive gear 767 is connected to the front installation case via the second front case body opening 766. It faces the front side of the body 756.

(About the right rotating body)
As shown in FIGS. 137 and 138, the right rotating body 753 includes a right rotating body main body 768 that is rotatably disposed on the right installation member 752, and the right rotating body main body 768. It is basically composed of a right decorative body 769 disposed on the front side and a plurality of right light emitting devices (light emitting devices) 770 disposed on the right decorative body 769. The right rotating body main body 768 has a plurality of right main body boss receiving portions 768a that are open to the front and are recessed in the front. In addition, a right portion main body through hole 768b that opens in the front-rear direction is formed on the upper side of the right portion rotating body main body portion 768, and a pair of right portion main bodies is sandwiched between the right portion main body through hole 768b. The part boss parts 768c and 768c are formed to project rearward from the rear surface of the right part rotating body main body part 768. On the left side of the right rotating body main body 768, a right rotating body main body notch 771 that opens in the front-rear direction and the left is formed. On the rear surface of the right rotating body main body 768, a right main body wiring passage 772 communicating with the right rotating body main body notch 771 is provided. The right body wiring passage 772 is defined between a wall that forms the left side of the right rotating body main body 768 and a passage wall 772a that is provided inwardly (rightward) from the wall. Thus, it extends in the vertical direction along the left side of the right rotating body main body 768. Also, a right body wiring hook 773 extending from the passage wall 772a to the right body wiring passage 772 side (left side) is formed on the rear surface of the right rotating body body 768.

  A right driven gear (driven gear) 774 that meshes with the right drive gear 767 is provided on the rear surface of the right rotating body main body 768. The right driven gear 774 includes a right driven gear main body 774a formed in a fan shape and a tooth portion formed at an arc-shaped edge of the right driven gear main body 774a. The right driven gear main body 774a is formed with a pair of right driven gear boss receiving portions 774b and 774b corresponding to the right main body boss portion 768c. Then, the right end driven gear boss receiving portion 774b is fitted to the rear end portion of the right main portion boss portion 768c, and a screw is screwed into the right driven gear boss receiving portion 774b, whereby the right driven gear 774 is inserted. Is screwed to the rear surface of the right rotating body main body 768.

  In a state where the right driven gear 774 is attached to the right rotating body main body 768, as shown in FIG. 139, the right driven gear main body 774a is separated from the rear surface of the right rotating body main body 768, and the right driven gear. A wiring space 775 is defined between the main body 774a and the rear surface of the right rotating body main body 768. The wiring space 775 communicates with the upper portion of the right main body wiring passage 772. Further, a cylindrical right driven gear fitting protrusion 774c is formed on the front surface of the right driven gear 774, and the right driven gear penetrating through the right driven gear fitting protrusion 774c and the right driven gear 774 is formed. A gear shaft hole 774d is formed to open in the front-rear direction. The right driven gear fitting protrusion 774c is fitted into the right main body through-hole 768b in a state where the right driven gear 774 is attached to the right rotating body main body 768, and the right driven gear 774 is positioned. It has come to be.

  The right driven gear 774 has a long guide hole (guide holding portion) 776 that opens in the front-rear direction at a position close to the right driven gear shaft hole 774d (position biased toward the support shaft). Is formed. When the right driven gear 774 is attached to the right rotating body main body 768, the guide opening 776 has a front opening communicating with the wiring space 775. The right driven gear shaft hole 774d is fitted with a front end portion of a right support shaft (support shaft) 761 that forms a rotation axis of the right rotation body 753, and the right support shaft rod 761 has a right driven gear. It is fixed to 774 so as to protrude rearward (see FIG. 133). Then, the right support shaft 761 is inserted into the right bearing portion 760 from the front side through the right cylindrical bearing members 762 and 762 provided at the front and rear openings of the right bearing portion 760 of the rear installation case body 755. The right-side rotating body main body 768 (right-side rotating body 753) rotates around the rear-side installation case body 755 (right-side installation member 752) by preventing the rear end portion of the right-side support shaft 761 from coming off. Mounted freely.

  When the right rotating body main body 768 is attached to the right portion installation member 752, as shown in FIGS. 140 and 141, the tooth portion of the right driven gear 774 is configured to mesh with the right drive gear 767. The In addition, the rotation restricting protrusion 763 is configured to be positioned close to the right side of the right driven gear 774 in a state where the right rotating body main body 768 is attached to the right setting member 752. The rotation restricting projection 763 abuts on the right driven gear 774 to define the rotation range of the right rotating body main body 768. Further, as shown in FIG. 142, in a state where the right rotating body main body 768 is attached to the right installation member 752, the guide through hole 776 of the right driven gear 774 is slightly forward of the arcuate guide 764. Are spaced apart from each other. In other words, the arcuate guide portion 764 is configured to face the rear opening of the guide through hole portion 776 by projecting forward from the right portion installation member 752.

  The right light emitting device 770 is provided on the right decorative body 769 in two upper and lower portions, and the light emission is controlled by the overall control device 37 to emit light when the right rotating body 753 is movable. Each right light emitting device 770 includes a right light emitting substrate 777 and a plurality of right light emitting elements 778 arranged on the front surface of the right light emitting substrate 777. The right light emitting element 778 emits light. The right decorative body 769 is illuminated. Each right light emitting substrate 777 is formed with a right substrate positioning hole 777a and a right substrate through hole 777b that open in the front-rear direction. Further, on the front surface of each right-side light emitting board 777, a right-side board connecting connector part 777c is provided so as to protrude forward, and wirings 777d are connected to both right-side board connecting connector parts 777c and 777c so The partial light emitting devices 770 and 770 are electrically connected. Further, on the right light emitting substrate 777 of the lower right light emitting device 770, a right external connector portion 779 is provided corresponding to the right rotating body main body notch 771 of the right rotating body main body 768. A wiring 779 a is connected to the right external connector portion 779.

  The right decorative body 769 is a decorative member having a required decoration on the front side, and a right portion corresponding to the right board through-hole 777b of the right light emitting board 777 is provided on the rear surface of the right decorative body 769. A decorative body screw hole 769a is formed to open rearward. Further, on the rear surface of the right decorative body 769, a right decorative body positioning protrusion 769b corresponding to the right substrate positioning hole 777a of the right light emitting substrate 777 is formed to protrude rearward. Then, the right ornament positioning protrusion 769b is inserted into the right substrate positioning hole 777a of each right light emitting substrate 777, and the screw is inserted to the right through the right substrate through hole 777b aligned with the right ornament screw hole 769a. The right light emitting substrate 777 is screwed to the rear side of the right decorative body 769 by being screwed into the partial decorative body screw hole 769a. Further, a right decorative body boss portion 769c corresponding to the right main body boss receiving portion 768a of the right rotating body main body 768 is formed on the rear surface of the right decorative body 769 so as to protrude rearward. And by fitting the rear end portion of the right decorative body boss portion 769c to the right body portion boss receiving portion 768a and screwing a screw through the through hole of the right portion main portion boss receiving portion 768a, The right decorative body 769 is screwed to the front side of the right rotating body main body 768. In a state where the right decorative body 769 is attached to the right rotating body main body 768, as shown in FIG. 139, the right external connector portion 779 faces the right rotating body main body notch 771. Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 139, the wiring 779a connected to the right external connector portion 779 is drawn out to the rear surface of the right rotating body main body 768 through the right rotating body main body notch 771. Guided upward along the right body wiring passage 772. Then, after the wiring 779 a is locked to the right body wiring hook 773, the wiring is inserted from the front side into the guide through hole 776 of the right driven gear 774 through the wiring space 775. That is, the guide through-hole portion 776 is configured such that the wiring 779a of the right light emitting device 770 is inserted therethrough to hold the wiring 779a, and the wiring 779a is pulled out to the rear side (installation member side). The wiring 779a drawn to the right side installation member 752 side through the guide through hole 776 is inserted into the arcuate guide part 764 from the front side, and the rear side of the rear side installation case body 755 (right side installation member 752) ( It is pulled out to the back side. The wiring 779a drawn to the rear surface of the rear installation case body 755 is locked to the rear installation case body wiring hook 758 and guided downward along the rear surface of the rear installation case body 755. The wiring insertion portion 759 is drawn below the right portion installation member 752. That is, since the wiring 779a connected to the right rotating body 753 is drawn out to the rear side of the right mounting member 752 via the guide through hole 776 and the arcuate guide section 764, the right rotating body 753 and the right section It is drawn between the installation members 752 with almost no exposure to the outside (see FIG. 142). Accordingly, the wiring 779a can be prevented from being caught by other members, and the wiring 779a can be prevented from being disconnected or from causing a malfunction in the rotation of the right rotating body 753.

  Here, when the right rotating body motor 754 is driven and the right driving gear 767 is rotated, the right driven gear 774 meshing with the right driving gear 767 is rotated, and the right rotating body body 768 is rotated. The (right part rotating body 753) is configured to rotate. Then, as shown in FIG. 5, the right rotating body 753 has a right decorative body 769 as shown in FIG. 6 from a right normal posture in which the left side portion of the right decorative body 769 extends in the vertical direction. Is rotated to a right-side rotation posture in which the lower side is displaced to the center side of the display unit 13a of the symbol display device 13. The guide through hole portion 776 moves in an arc shape together with the wiring 779a held in the guide through hole portion 776 when the right portion rotating body 753 rotates. Here, as shown in FIG. 140, the right rotating body 753 is in the right normal posture, and the guide through hole portion 776 has the right edge positioned in front of the right edge of the arcuate guide portion 764. To do. Further, as shown in FIG. 141, the right rotating body 753 is in the right rotating posture, and the guide through hole portion 776 has the left edge positioned in front of the left edge of the arcuate guide portion 764. is doing. That is, the arcuate guide portion 764 extends so as to cover the movement range of the guide through hole portion 776, and allows the wiring 779 a held by the guide through hole portion 776 to move. Accordingly, the wiring 779a held in the guide through-hole portion 776 can move while being accommodated in the arcuate guide portion 764 when the right rotation body 753 is rotated.

(About the movable effect of the second movable effect device)
Next, the movable effect of the second movable effect device 750 will be described below. The second movable effect device 750 performs a movable effect and a light emission effect when a predetermined condition is satisfied. As shown in FIG. 5, when the second movable effect device 750 is not in effect, the right decorative body 769 of the second movable effect device 750 is in the right normal posture with the left side portion extending in the vertical direction. . In addition, as shown in FIG. 140, the right rotating body 753 is in the right normal posture, and the guide through hole portion 776 of the right driven gear 774 has a right edge on the right edge of the arcuate guide portion 764. It is located in front of the part. When the overall control device 37 sends a control signal to the right rotating body motor 754 and the right rotating body motor 754 is driven, the right driving gear 767 starts to rotate. Then, the right driven gear 774 that meshes with the right drive gear 767 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 140, and the right rotating body 753 is rotated in the clockwise direction. In addition, the overall control device 37 sends a control signal to the right light emitting device 770 to turn on the right light emitting element 778 of the right light emitting device 770 and cause the right rotating body 753 to emit light. That is, the right rotating body 753 can perform an impactable moving effect by rotating while emitting light.

  Here, as the right driven gear 774 rotates, the guide through hole 776 moves in an arc shape, and the wiring 779a of the right light emitting device 770 inserted and held in the guide through hole 776 moves. However, as shown in FIG. 141, the arc-shaped guide portion 764 of the right-side installation member 752 extends in an arc shape over the movement range of the guide through-hole portion 776, and is thus held by the guide through-hole portion 776. The formed wiring 779a can move in the arcuate guide portion 764 without load. In other words, while the right rotating body 753 rotates, the wiring can be protected by the arcuate guide portion 764 while permitting the movement of the wiring 779a, so that no load is applied to the wiring 779a and the wiring 779a is deteriorated. It is possible to suppress disconnection. In addition, as shown in FIG. 142, the arcuate guide portion 764 is provided so as to protrude forward so as to face the guide through hole portion 776, so that the wiring 779a between the right rotation member 753 and the right portion installation member 752 is provided. Exposure to the outside can be suppressed. Accordingly, it is possible to suitably prevent the wiring 779a moving together with the right rotating body 753 from being caught by another member and being disconnected.

  Here, since the guide through hole portion 776 is provided at a position biased toward the right support shaft portion 673 side of the right driven gear 774, the amount of movement of the guide through hole portion 776 when the right rotating body 753 rotates. Can be reduced. Accordingly, the amount of displacement of the wiring 779a held in the guide through-hole portion 776 is reduced, reducing the load on the wiring 779a when the right rotating body 753 is rotated, and the wiring 779a is deteriorated or disconnected. Can be suppressed. Further, since the displacement amount of the wiring 779a is reduced, the extending length of the arcuate guide portion 764 can be reduced, and the arcuate guide portion 764 can be made compact.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the right rotating body 753 is further rotated, and the lower part of the right decorative body 769 is displaced to the center side of the display unit 13 a of the symbol display device 13. Then, the right driven gear 774 comes into contact with the rotation restricting projection 763 and the rotation of the right driven gear 774 is restricted. Further, the overall control device 37 stops driving the right rotating body motor 754 and stops the rotation of the right rotating body 753. Here, as shown in FIG. 141, when the right rotation body 753 is in the right rotation posture, the left edge of the guide through hole 776 is the left edge of the arcuate guide 764. Located in front. That is, since the arcuate guide portion 764 is positioned behind the guide through hole portion 776 even when the right portion rotating body 753 is in the right portion rotating posture, the arc-shaped guide portion 764 is loaded over the entire range in which the wiring 779a moves. The wiring can be protected without.

(About the third movable effect device)
Next, the third movable effect device 780 will be described. Similar to the second movable effect device 750, the third movable effect device 780 performs a movable effect and a light emission effect when a predetermined condition is satisfied. As shown in FIGS. A left space (space) 781 defined between the left side 52c and the rear surface of the board body 42 is disposed. As shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, the third movable effect device 780 is provided with a left part installation member (support base) 782 disposed on the left side part 52 c (game board 40) and the left part installation member 782. It is basically composed of a left rotating body (constituting member) 783 that is movably disposed and a left rotating body motor 784 that rotates the left rotating body 783.

(Left installation member)
As shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, the left portion installation member 782 includes a rear side mounting base 785 attached to the left side portion 52 c of the back unit 50 and a front side mounting disposed on the front side of the rear side mounting base 785. A base 786 and a left wiring guide portion (guide portion) 788 that defines a left guide passage (guide passage) 787 that opens in the front-rear direction are configured. The rear mounting base 785 is formed with a plurality of rear mounting base bosses 785a protruding rearward on the rear surface, and the rear mounting base 785 is screwed to the left side portion 52c via the rear mounting base boss 785a. The Further, a plurality of rear mounting base boss receiving portions 785b are formed in the front surface of the rear mounting base 785.

  The rear mounting base 785 is formed with a left motor installation portion 789 on which a left rotating body motor 784 is installed protruding forward, and is open in the front-rear direction on the front surface of the left motor installation portion 789. A left drive shaft through hole 789a is formed. Further, on the front surface of the left motor installation portion 789, a pair of left portion installation portion screw holes 789b and 789b are formed in the front-rear direction so as to sandwich the left drive shaft through-hole 789a. The rear mounting base 785 is formed with a cylindrical left bearing portion 790 that protrudes in the front-rear direction at the lower left corner. A pair of left cylindrical bearing bodies 792 and 792 for receiving a left support shaft rod 791 described later are fitted to the left and right opening portions 790 in front and rear openings. The rear mounting base 785 is formed with a plurality of ground positioning protrusions 785c that protrude rearward from the rear surface of the left edge and a ground rear boss 785d that protrudes to a predetermined height from the rear surface of the rear mounting base 785. Yes. Further, the rear mounting base 785 is formed with a pair of grounding holes 785e and 785e that are open in the front-rear direction and spaced apart from each other.

  The rear side mounting base 785 has a rear side guide half 793 that is positioned between the pair of grounding holes 785e and 785e and that constitutes the rear side portion of the left wiring guide portion 788. It is formed so as to protrude from the rear surface. The rear guide half 793 has a rectangular opening on the front side of the front side of the rear mounting base 785 on the front side, and is formed in a U shape with the rear side opened in the front-rear direction and the left side. The body 793 defines a rear guide path 794 that constitutes the rear side of the left guide path 787. Further, the rear end portion of the rear guide half 793 has a left side portion positioning hole (opened in the front and rear direction provided in the left side portion 52c in a state where the rear side mounting base 785 is attached to the left side portion 52c of the back unit 50. (Positioning hole) 815 (see FIGS. 8 and 11). That is, the rear guide half 793 (left wiring guide portion 788) is opened at the rear surface of the back unit 50 (the rear surface of the left side portion 52c) through the left side portion positioning hole 815, and the rear guide path 794 is The rear unit 50 communicates with the rear side.

  The front mounting base 786 has a design surface of the left portion installation member 782 with a required decoration on the front surface. On the rear surface of the front mounting base 786, a plurality of front mounting base boss portions 786a corresponding to the rear mounting base boss receiving portion 785b of the rear mounting base 785 are formed to protrude rearward. Then, the rear end portion of the front mounting base boss portion 786a is fitted into the rear mounting base boss receiving portion 785b, and a screw is attached to the front mounting base boss portion 786a through the through hole of the rear mounting base boss receiving portion 785b. Is screwed onto the front side of the rear side mounting base 785. On the lower side of the front mounting base 786, a left front base opening 795 that opens in the front-rear direction is formed. When the front mounting base 786 is attached to the rear mounting base 785, the left installation screw hole 789b and the left drive shaft through hole 789a of the rear mounting base 785 face the left front base opening 795. Yes. Further, the front mounting base 786 is provided with a pair of ground front bosses 786b and 786b protruding rearward and spaced apart from each other. Each front boss portion 786b for ground is fitted into a corresponding grounding hole 785e of the rear mounting base 785 with the front mounting base 786 and the rear mounting base 785 mounted, and the rear surface of the rear mounting base 785. It comes to face.

  The front mounting base 786 has a front guide half 796 that is positioned between the pair of ground front bosses 786b and 786b and that constitutes the front side of the left wiring guide 788, from the front of the front mounting base 786 to the front. Is formed to protrude. The front guide half 796 is a cylindrical body whose front and rear are opened in a rectangular shape. The front guide half 796 extends in the front-rear direction inside the front guide half 796 and forms the front side of the left guide path 787. 797 is defined. With the front mounting base 786 and the rear mounting base 785 assembled, as shown in FIG. 147, the rear end of the front guide half 796 and the front end of the rear guide half 793 come into contact with each other, and the front guide The rear opening of the half body 796 and the front opening of the rear guide half body 793 are configured to communicate with each other. Thereby, a left wiring guide portion 788 is formed, and one left guide path 787 extending in the front-rear direction is defined.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 147, the left wiring guide portion 788 extends in the front-rear direction in the left space 781 with the left portion installation member 782 installed on the left side portion 52 c of the back unit 50. It has become. Further, the left wiring guide portion 788 is located behind the gate through hole (penetrating portion) 42e of the panel body 42 in a state where the left portion installation member 782 is installed on the left side portion 52c of the back unit 50, and the left wiring The front opening of the guide portion 788 is configured to face the rear opening of the gate through hole 42e. A gate sensor (sphere detecting means) 799 of the sphere passage gate 798 is disposed in the gate through hole 42e in a state of being inserted from the front side. Here, as shown in FIGS. 148 and 149, the ball passage gate 798 includes a gate sensor 799 and a gate installation portion 800 that holds the gate sensor 799. The gate sensor 799 includes a rectangular parallelepiped gate sensor main body 799a and a gate detection unit 799b that is formed on the front side of the gate sensor main body 799a and opens in the vertical direction. A sensor connector portion 799c is provided at the rear end portion of the gate sensor main body 799a, and a wiring 799d is connected to the sensor connector portion 799c.

  The gate installation unit 800 includes a gate main body holding unit 801 that holds the gate sensor main body 799a and a detection unit holding unit 802 that stores the gate detection unit 799b. The gate main body holding portion 801 is formed to protrude from the left side of the frame main body 110 of the display frame body 100 toward the game area 40a side (left side), and the holding insertion that opens in the front-rear direction of the gate main body holding portion 801. The gate sensor body 799a is inserted and held in the hole 801a. As shown in FIG. 149, the gate sensor 799 held by the gate main body holding portion 801 is in a state where the rear end portion of the gate sensor main body 799 a protrudes rearward from the frame main body 110. The gate body holding portion 801 is formed with a sensor locking piece 801b protruding rearward, and the sensor locking piece 801b is locked to the rear end portion of the gate sensor body 799a inserted through the holding insertion hole 801a. Therefore, it is designed to prevent it from coming out backward. The detection unit holding unit 802 is provided on the second bowl-shaped unit 124 of the display frame 100 so as to protrude toward the game area 40a (left side). The detection part holding part 802 is formed in a box shape opened rearward and up and down, and the front side of the gate sensor 799 is inserted through the rear opening of the detection part holding part 802. In a state where the gate sensor 799 is inserted into the detection unit holding unit 802, the gate detection unit 799b is configured to face between the upper and lower openings of the detection unit holding unit 802. The upper and lower openings of the detection unit holding unit 802 are opened larger than the diameter of the pachinko ball W, and the pachinko ball W flowing down the game area 40a passes through the ball passing gate via the upper and lower openings and the gate detection unit 799b. 798 can be passed.

  Here, in a state where the display frame body 100 is disposed in the display through hole 42a of the game board 40, the frame main body extends along the inner peripheral surface of the display through hole 42a, and the gate main body is held in the gate through hole 42e. The part 801 is accommodated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 147, the gate sensor 799 installed in the gate installation unit 800 is held with the gate through hole 42e extending in the front-rear direction, and the rear end of the gate sensor body 799a is the board body. 42 is projected from the rear surface. That is, the rear end portion of the gate sensor main body 799a is positioned on the front side of the left wiring guide portion 788 facing the rear opening of the gate through-hole 42e. In other words, the front protrusion amount of the front guide half 796 (left wiring guide portion 788) is set so that the front end of the front guide half 796 is positioned slightly behind the rear end of the gate sensor 799. Yes. The wiring 799d connected to the sensor connector part 799c of the gate sensor main body 799a is inserted through the left guide path 787 (the front guide path 797 and the rear guide path 794) of the left wiring guide part 788 and guided rearward. It is like that. As shown in FIG. 147, the wiring 799 d inserted through the left wiring guide portion 788 is drawn out to the rear side of the back unit 50 through the left side portion positioning hole 815 and directly connected to the main control device 32. In this way, the left wiring guide portion 788 is fitted into the left side portion positioning hole 815 and the two are surely communicated, so that the wiring 799d of the gate sensor 799 can be accurately sent to the rear side of the back unit 50. .

  Thus, since the left wiring guide portion 788 is provided so as to extend to the left space 751 between the panel main body 42 and the back unit 50, the wiring 799d of the gate sensor 799 is protected by the left wiring guide portion 788. Can be pulled out to the rear side of the back unit 50. Therefore, when the game board 40 and the third movable effect device 780 are maintained, or when the third movable effect device 780 is installed on the game board 40, the tool is less likely to be caught by the wiring 799d, and the work can be performed efficiently. Is possible. In addition, the wiring 799d can be prevented from being disconnected during the operation, or the sensor connector portion 799c of the gate sensor 799 can be prevented from being damaged.

  Further, since the front end portion of the left wiring guide portion 788 is positioned behind the rear end portion of the gate sensor 799, the rear end portion of the gate sensor 799 and the left wiring guide portion 788 are caused by a design error or an assembly error. Even when the separation distance is smaller than expected, it is possible to prevent the left wiring guide portion 788 from coming into contact with the gate sensor 799 and prevent both members 788 and 789 from being damaged. Further, by inserting the wiring 799d of the gate sensor 799 through the left wiring guide portion 788, there is an advantage that it is difficult to visually recognize the wiring 799d from the player side through the transparent board body 42. As described above, when attaching the left portion installation member 782 to the left side portion 52c of the back unit 50, the rear end portion of the left wiring guide portion 788 is fitted into the left side portion positioning hole 815 of the left side portion 52c. It has become. Therefore, the left part installation member 782 is positioned on the back unit 50, and the left part installation member 782 can be accurately attached.

  On the rear surface of the left portion installation member 782 (rear mounting base 785), a conductive left portion grounding metal fitting 803 is disposed. The left ground metal fitting 803 includes a thin plate-like front installation plate 804 extending in the vertical direction, a rectangular plate-shaped rear ground piece 805 positioned behind the front installation plate 804, and a front-rear direction. And a ground connection portion 806 that connects the front installation plate portion 804 and the rear ground piece 805. A ground metal positioning hole 803a and a ground metal through hole 803b are formed in the front installation plate portion 804 and the rear ground piece 805, respectively, so as to open in the front-rear direction. The rear grounding piece 805 has the grounding metal through hole 803b aligned with the rear boss 785d for grounding of the rear mounting base 785 and the rear grounding with the left grounding metal 803 installed on the rear mounting base 785. The front surface of the piece 805 is in contact with the rear end of the grounding rear boss 785d.

  For the front installation plate 804, the ground positioning protrusion 785c of the rear mounting base 785 is fitted into the ground metal positioning hole 803a, and the ground front boss of the front mounting base 786 is fitted into the ground through hole 785e. By screwing a screw into the 786b through the grounding metal through hole 803b, the front installation plate 804 is screwed along the left edge of the left installation member 782 (rear mounting base 785). For the rear ground piece 805, the ground positioning protrusion 785c of the rear mounting base 785 is fitted into the ground metal positioning hole 803a, and a screw is screwed into the ground rear boss 785d through the ground metal through hole 803b. As a result, the rear ground piece 805 is screwed to the left portion installation member 782. Here, the rear ground piece 805 is positioned directly below the rear end of the rear guide half 793 in a state of being attached to the rear attachment base 785. Then, as shown in FIG. 8, the rear ground piece 805 faces the left side portion positioning hole 815 of the left side portion 52c in a state where the left portion installation member 782 is attached to the left side portion 52c of the back unit 50. The unit 50 (left side 52c) is exposed on the rear surface.

  The left rotating body motor 784 is driven and controlled by the overall control device 37 to rotate the left driving shaft 784a in the forward and reverse directions. The left rotating body motor 784 includes a pair of left rotating body motor mounting pieces 784b and 784b projecting outward from the motor main body, and opens to the left rotating body motor mounting pieces 784b in the front-rear direction. A motor rotating hole 784c for the left rotating body is formed. Then, the left drive shaft 784a is inserted through the left drive shaft through hole 789a of the rear mounting base 785 from the rear, and the left rotating body motor 784 is installed in the left motor installation portion 789. The left rotating body motor 784 is screwed to the left motor mounting portion 789 by screwing screws into the left mounting portion screw holes 789b via the rotating body motor through holes 784c. In a state where the left rotating body motor 784 is attached to the left motor installation portion 789, the left drive shaft 784 a projects forward through the left front base opening 795. A left drive gear 807 is connected to the left drive shaft 784a, and the left drive gear 807 faces the front side of the front mounting base 786 through the left front base opening 795.

(Left rotating body)
The left rotating body 783 includes a left rotating body main body 808 that is rotatably disposed on the left installation member 782, and a left decorative body that is disposed on the front side of the left rotating body main body 808. 809 and a plurality of left light emitting devices 810 arranged on the left decorative body 809 are basically configured. A plurality of left main body boss receiving portions 808 a are provided in the front surface of the left rotating body main body 808. A pair of left main body bosses 808 b and 808 b are formed on the lower side of the left rotating body main body 808 so as to protrude rearward from the rear surface of the left rotating body main body 808. A left driven gear 811 that meshes with the left drive gear 807 is provided on the rear surface of the left rotating body main body 808. The left driven gear 811 is composed of a left driven gear main body 811a formed in a fan shape and a tooth portion formed on an arc-shaped edge of the left driven gear main body 811a. The left driven gear main body 811a is formed with a pair of left driven gear boss receiving portions 811b and 811b corresponding to the left main body boss 808b of the left rotating body main body 808. Then, the left driven gear boss receiving portion 811b is fitted with the rear end portion of the left main body boss receiving portion 808b, and a screw is screwed into the left driven gear boss receiving portion 811b. Is screwed to the lower part of the rear surface of the left rotating body main body 808.

  The left driven gear 811 is formed with a left driven gear shaft hole 811c that opens in the front-rear direction. The left driven gear shaft hole 811c is fitted with a front end portion of a left supporting shaft rod 791 that forms a rotating shaft of the left rotating member 783, and the left supporting shaft rod 791 projects rearward into the left driven gear 811. (See FIG. 144). Then, the left support shaft rod 791 is inserted from the front side into the left bearing portion 790 of the rear mounting base 785 through a pair of left cylindrical bearing bodies 792 and 792 provided at the front and rear openings of the left bearing portion 790. Then, by preventing the rear end portion of the left support shaft rod 791 from coming off, the left rotating body main body 808 (left rotating body 783) is rotated around the rear mounting base 785 (left mounting member 782). Mounted freely. In a state where the left rotating body main body 808 is attached to the left installation member 782, the tooth portion of the left driven gear 811 is engaged with the left driving gear 807. The left rotating body main body 808 includes a left rotating body escape recess 812 that is recessed from the left edge to the right. As shown in FIG. 150, the left rotating body escape recess 812 has the left wiring guide portion 788 formed in the left rotating body escape recess 812 in a state where the left rotation body 783 is disposed on the left installation member 782. The left wiring guide portion 788 is prevented from interfering with the left rotating body 783.

  The left light emitting device 810 is provided on the left decorative body 809 in the upper and lower directions, and is controlled by the overall control device 37 to emit light when the left rotating body 783 is movable. Each left light emitting device 810 includes a left light emitting substrate 813 and a plurality of left light emitting elements 814 disposed on the front surface of the left light emitting substrate 813. The left light emitting element 814 emits light. The left decorative body 809 is illuminated. Each left light emitting substrate 813 is formed with a left substrate positioning hole 813a and a left substrate through hole 813b that open in the front-rear direction.

  The left decorative body 809 is a decorative member having a required decoration on the front side, and the left decorative body corresponding to the left substrate through hole 813b of the left light emitting substrate 813 is provided on the rear surface of the left decorative body 809. A body screw hole 809a is formed to open rearward. Further, a left decorative body positioning protrusion 809 b corresponding to the left substrate positioning hole 813 a of the left light emitting substrate 813 is formed on the rear surface of the left decorative body 809 so as to protrude rearward. Then, the left decorative body positioning protrusion 809b is inserted into the left substrate positioning hole 813a of each left light emitting substrate 813, and the screw is left via the left substrate through hole 813b aligned with the left decorative body screw hole 809a. The left light emitting substrate 813 is screwed to the rear side of the left decorative body 809 by being screwed into the partial decorative body screw hole 809a. On the rear surface of the left decorative body 809, a left decorative body boss 809c corresponding to the left main body boss receiving portion 808a of the left rotating body main body 808 is formed to protrude rearward. Then, by fitting the rear end portion of the left decorative body boss portion 809c to the left main body portion boss receiving portion 808a and screwing a screw through the through hole of the left main body portion boss receiving portion 808a, The left decorative body 809 is screwed to the front side of the left rotating body main body 808.

  Here, when the left rotating body motor 784 is driven and the left driving gear 807 rotates, the left driven gear 811 meshing with the left driving gear 807 is rotated, and the left rotating body main body 808 is rotated. The (left portion rotating body 783) is rotated about the left supporting shaft rod 791. Then, as shown in FIG. 150, the left rotating body 783 has a left decorative body 809, as shown in FIG. 6, from the left normal posture in which the right side of the left decorative body 809 extends in the vertical direction. Is rotated to a left-side rotation posture in which the upper side is displaced to the center side of the display unit 13 a of the symbol display device 13. As shown in FIG. 5, in the left normal posture, the left rotating body 783 is in a state in which only a part of the right side of the left decorative body faces the window 100 a of the display frame 100, and most of the left space 781. It is in a state of being housed inside.

(About the movable effect of the third movable effect device)
Next, the movable effect of the third movable effect device 780 will be described. Similar to the second movable effect device 750, the third movable effect device 780 performs a movable effect and a light emission effect when a predetermined condition is satisfied, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. Note that when the third movable effect device 780 is not performing, the left decorative body 809 of the third movable effect device 780 is in the left-side normal posture in which the right side portion extends vertically as shown in FIG. . As shown in FIG. 5, in the left normal posture, the left rotating body 783 is almost in a state of being accommodated in the left space 781, and there are few parts that face forward through the window 100 a of the display frame 100. . When the left rotating body 783 is in the left normal posture, the left wiring guide portion 788 faces the left rotating body escape recess 812 so that the left wiring guide portion 788 does not interfere with the left rotation body escape recess 812. It has become.

  When the overall control device 37 sends a control signal to the left rotating body motor 784 and the left rotating mode motor is driven, the left driving gear 807 starts to rotate. Then, the left driven gear 811 that meshes with the left drive gear 807 rotates, and the left rotating body 783 rotates about the left supporting shaft 791 in the clockwise direction in FIG. In addition, the overall control device 37 sends a control signal to the left light emitting device 810 to cause the left light emitting element 814 of the left light emitting device 810 to emit light and brighten the left rotating body 783. That is, the left rotating body 783 can perform a movable effect with impact by rotating while emitting light.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 147, the wiring 799 d connected to the gate sensor 799 installed in the gate installation unit 800 is inserted through the left wiring guide unit 788 and pulled out to the rear surface of the back unit 50. Further, the left wiring guide portion 788 is formed so as to protrude forward from the left portion installation member 782 and faces the rear end portion of the gate sensor 799. Therefore, the wiring 799d of the gate sensor 799 It is routed backward with almost no exposure. Therefore, the wiring 799d of the gate sensor 799 can be prevented from being caught by the rotating left part rotating body 783, and the wiring 799d can be prevented from being disconnected or malfunctioning in the operation of the left rotating body 783. .

  As shown in FIG. 151, when the left rotating body 783 is further rotated to the left rotating posture, the overall control device 37 stops the driving of the left rotating body motor 784 and rotates the left rotating body. The rotation of the moving body 783 is stopped. Then, as shown in FIG. 6, the left rotating body 783 changes from the state accommodated in the left space 781 to the front side through the window 100a of the display frame body 100, and the player moves to the left rotating body. 783 can be directly visually recognized. When the left rotating body 783 is returned to the left normal posture, the overall control device 37 drives the left rotating body motor 784 in the reverse direction to rotate the left rotating body 783 counterclockwise in FIG. Turn to. When the left rotating body 783 returns to the left normal posture, the overall control device 37 stops driving the left rotating body motor 784 and stops the rotation of the left rotating body 783. Here, as shown in FIG. 150, when the left rotating body 783 returns to the left normal posture, the left wiring guide portion 788 faces the left rotating body escape recess 812, so that the left rotating body 783 is There is no interference with the left wiring guide portion 788, and the left rotating body 783 can return to the left normal posture without any trouble.

(Wiring arrangement structure on the back side of the game board)
In the game board 40, production-side electric devices such as first to third movable production devices 500, 750, and 780, a light emission production device 200, and a lighting device 300 are installed on the front side of the rear unit 50 (FIGS. 7 and 7). 14 or FIG. 16), control-side electrical devices such as the relay board 38, the main control device 32, and the overall control device 37 are installed on the rear side of the back unit 50 (see FIG. 2). In the game board 40, the production-side electric device and the control-side electric device are installed by being distributed back and forth across the installation plate portion 52 of the back unit 50, and wiring openings 82, 83, 84 formed through the installation plate portion 52. , 85 and 86, wirings for electrically connecting the two are exchanged. That is, in the game board 40, the wiring connected to the production-side electric device on the front side of the installation plate portion 52 is taken out from the wiring openings 82, 83, 84, 85, 86 to the rear side of the back unit 50, and The wiring is connected to the relay board 38 after being arranged along the line. In the game board 40, the relay board 38 is connected to each control device by separate wiring (not shown). Here, in the game board 40, wirings routed along the same route are collected by a binding tool such as a nylon tie, and the position of the wiring is regulated by wiring holding means provided on the rear surface of the back unit 50.

(Wiring route)
An arrangement path of the wirings H2 to H8 on the rear side of the game board 40 will be described with reference to FIG. The first movable wiring (wiring) H3 connected to the first movable effect device 500 provided on the front side of the upper side 52a of the installation plate portion 52 in the back unit 50 is removed from the attachment area of the symbol display device 13 and installed on the installation plate portion 52. Is drawn out from the upper wiring opening 82 opened on the left side of the upper side 52a. The first movable wiring H <b> 3 is disposed from the upper side to the lower side through the left side of the device holding unit 56 that holds the left side of the symbol display device 13, and inwardly at the outside of the lower left corner of the mounting area of the symbol display device 13. It is bent and connected between the lower side of the attachment area and the board installation part 60 and connected to the relay board 38. The second movable wiring (wiring) H4 connected to the second movable effect device 750 provided on the front side of the right side portion 52b of the installation plate portion 52 in the back unit 50 faces downward below the right side portion 52b of the installation plate portion 52. It is pulled out from the opened right wiring opening 83 to the rear side. The second movable wiring H <b> 4 is connected to the relay board 38 through the space between the lower side of the attachment area of the symbol display device 13 and the board installation part 60. The light emitting wiring H2 connected to the first light emitting substrate 221 of the light emitting effect device 200 installed in the display frame 100 is drawn rearward from the right wiring opening 83, and below the attachment area of the symbol display device 13. It is connected to the relay board 38 through the board installation part 60.

  The third movable wiring (wiring) H5 connected to the third movable effect device 750 provided on the front side of the left side portion 52c of the installation plate portion 52 in the back unit 50 is removed from the installation area of the symbol display device 13 and installed on the installation plate portion. 52 is pulled out to the rear side from the left wiring opening 84 opened below the left side 52c (see FIG. 9). The third movable wiring H5 is disposed from the upper side to the lower side through the left side of the device holding unit 56 that holds the left side of the symbol display device 13 together with the first movable wiring H3, and the lower left of the mounting area of the symbol display device 13 It is bent inward at the corner outside and is connected to the relay board 38 through the space between the lower side of the attachment region and the board installation part 60.

  The first illumination wiring (wiring) H6 connected to the first illumination mechanism 310 of the illumination device 300 is a central wiring established at the center between the lower side of the attachment region of the symbol display device 13 and the substrate installation portion 60. It is pulled out from the opening 85 to the rear side and connected to the relay board 38 (see FIG. 9). Similarly, the second lighting wiring (wiring) H7 connected to the second lighting mechanism 340 of the lighting device 300 is drawn rearward from the central wiring opening 85 and connected to the relay board 38. The display wiring (wiring) H8 connected to the display board 464 in the display 460 is removed from the mounting area of the symbol display device 13 and rearward from the lower wiring opening 86 opened on the left side of the lower side 52d in the installation plate 52. Pulled out. The display wiring H8 is drawn upward from the lower wiring opening 86 and then bent inward outside the lower left corner of the mounting area of the symbol display device 13, together with the first and third movable wirings H3 and H5. The relay board 38 is connected between the lower side of the attachment area and the board installation part 60.

(Wiring holding means)
The game board 40 includes, as wiring holding means, a wiring holder 62 configured separately from the back unit 50, and a wiring hook 68 configured integrally with the back unit 50 (see FIG. 9). The wiring hook 68 is formed in a bowl shape having at least a piece protruding rearward from the rear surface of the back unit 50 and an extending piece extending along the game board surface at the tip of the protruding piece. (See FIG. 11). The wiring hook 68 can be inserted and removed between the rear surface of the back unit 50 and the extended piece portion from the open end, and is configured to restrict the position of the wiring between the rear surface of the back unit 50 and the extended piece portion. . On the rear surface of the rear unit 50, a plurality of wiring hooks 68 are provided on the left outer side of the device holding portion 56 that supports the symbol display device 13 so as to be vertically separated. A plurality of wiring hooks 68 are provided between the unit 60 and the left and right sides. A wiring hook 68 is also provided on the rear surface of the back unit 50 above the lower wiring opening 86. Here, in the game board 40, the open ends of the group of wiring hooks 68 adjacent in the vicinity region are configured to have different orientations, and are installed, for example, below the wiring hook 68 having an open end opened to the left. The wiring hook 68 has an open end opened to the right.

(Wiring holder)
The wiring holder 62 is installed on the rear side of the back unit 50 in accordance with the portion where the wiring is curved (see FIG. 9). In the embodiment, the wiring holder 62 is installed on the outside of the lower left corner of the mounting area of the symbol display device 13 according to the part where the wirings H3 and H5 bend from the vertical direction to the left and right direction. The wiring holder 62 holds the wiring. The curved portions of the wirings H3 and H5 may not be bent or easily loosen, but the wiring holder 62 holds the curved portions of the wirings H3 and H5, so that the wirings H3 and H5 have an appropriate route. Can be guided to extend at. Further, in the embodiment, when the game board 40 is attached to the middle frame 12, the wiring holder 62 is provided on the left side of the game board 40 on the first insertion side with respect to the middle frame 12. The wirings H3 and H5 are prevented from being caught when the frame 12 is attached.

  As shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, the wiring holder 62 has a wiring holding base (base) 63 fixed to the rear surface of the back unit, and is configured to be detachable from the wiring holding base 63. A wiring holding path (holding path) 62a that can hold the wirings H3 and H5 so as to extend along the rear surface of the back unit 50 between the wiring holding base 63 and the wiring holding base 63 is defined. On the other hand, a holding path opening / closing section (opening / closing section) 64 that releases the latch from the wiring holding base 63 and opens the wiring holding path 62a is provided. On the rear surface of the back unit 50, a concave portion 61 is provided outside the lower left corner of the attachment area of the symbol display device 13 so as to be recessed in accordance with the outer shape of the wiring holding base 63 of the wiring holder 62. 63 is fitted into the concave portion 61 and positioned. The wiring holding base 63 is a rectangular plate-like portion, and is fixed to the rear surface of the back unit 50 by means such as a double-sided tape, a claw fitting structure, a fastener such as a screw, or an adhesive.

  One end of the holding path opening / closing portion 64 is hinge-connected to the wiring holding base 63 via a hinge portion 65 extending from the rear surface of the wiring holding base 63, and is separated from the rear side of the wiring holding base 63. (See FIG. 153). Further, the holding path opening / closing portion 64 is provided with a claw piece 64a at the other end away from the hinge portion 65 side. The claw piece 64a is formed in a shape having a protrusion protruding in a direction away from the hinge portion 65 side at a rear end of a portion extending toward the wiring holding base portion 63 side. The wiring holding base 63 is provided with a hook piece 66 that extends rearward at a position spaced from the hinge portion 65. The hook piece 66 includes a claw portion 66a provided at the rear end and extending toward the hinge portion 65, and an operation portion 66b provided at the rear end and extending away from the hinge portion 65. It is configured to be elastically deformable in a direction in which it is in contact with and away from the portion 65. Here, the hinge portion 65 and the hook piece 66 are arranged apart from each other in the longitudinal direction of the wiring holding base portion 63. The wiring holding base 63 is provided with a pressing piece 67 that extends rearward so as to face the hinge side of the hook piece 66.

  The wiring holder 62 is configured such that the holding path opening / closing portion 64 is rotatable about the hinge portion 65, and the holding piece opening / closing portion 64 is parallel to the wiring holding base 63, and the claw piece 64 a A wire holding path 62a that is hooked and locked by the claw portion 66a of the hook piece 66 and communicates vertically between the wiring holding base 63 and the holding path opening / closing portion 64 is defined (see FIG. 153). Further, the wiring holder 62 pushes the operation piece 66b and elastically displaces the hook piece 66 so as to move away from the hinge part 65 side, so that the claw part 66a of the hook piece 66 is detached from the claw piece 64a and the holding path opening / closing part. Posture displacement with 64 hinges 65 as a fulcrum is allowed. The wiring holder 62 is set such that the distance between the tip of the claw portion 66 a of the hook piece 66 and the presser piece 67 is set smaller than the claw piece 64 a of the holding path opening / closing portion 64 and is held by the claw portion 66 a of the hook piece 66. The claw piece 64 a of the road opening / closing part 64 is pressed by the pressing piece 67.

  In this way, the game board 40 has the wiring holder 62 formed separately from the back unit 50, so that the degree of freedom of shape is high, and the wiring holder 62 opens and closes the wiring holding path 62a surrounding the wirings H3 and H5. It can be formed in such a shape that it can be. That is, since the wiring holder 62 can open and close the holding path opening / closing section 64 with respect to the wiring holding base 63, it is easy to attach the wirings H3 and H5, and the wiring passing through the wiring holding path 62a can be prevented from coming out. . Therefore, the wiring H3 and H5 can be appropriately collected by the wiring holder 62 on the rear surface of the back unit 50. Further, the wiring holder 62 is configured such that the holding path opening / closing portion 64 opens and closes with the hinge portion 65 as a fulcrum, and the other end engages and disengages with respect to the hook piece 66 of the wiring holding base 63. 64 does not fall off the wiring holding base 63, and the insertion and removal of the wirings H3 and H5 with respect to the wiring holder 62 can be further facilitated.

(Earth structure of game board)
The game board 40 has a ground structure for removing static electricity accumulated in the game board 40, and the pachinko machine 10 includes game board components such as a display frame 100 and a stage 150 provided on the game board 40, and a back unit. 50 is grounded to the island facility via the middle frame 12 from the lighting device 300 and the movable effect devices 500, 750, 780, etc. (see FIG. 154). The game board 40 has a grounding structure in which a ground 150 connected to static electricity removal targets such as a stage 150 provided on the front side of the back unit 50, the display frame 100, the light emitting effect device 200, the movable effect devices 500, 750, 780, and the lighting device 300 is provided. Wires E1, E2, and E3, ground relay portions 90, 91, and 803 that receive the ground wires E1, E2, and E3; (Base body) and a game board grounding portion 94 serving as a static electricity transfer port to the middle frame 12. The ground relay portions 90, 91, and 803 are connected to each other and the ground relay portions 90, 91, and 803 to the base metal plate 510 are connected by relay ground wires ER1, ER2, and ER3.

  The light emitting effect device 200 provided on the display frame 100 is provided with a reflection member ground protrusion 217b protruding rearward (see FIG. 21), and the reflection member ground protrusion 217b connects the panel body 42 and the back unit 50. When combined, the front side of the second movable effect device 750 abuts on a horizontal ornament grounding piece 78 (see FIG. 14) installed at the lower portion of the horizontal ornament portion 77 provided along the right inner surface of the back unit 50. It is like that. The light emitting effect device 200 is configured to be in contact with the display frame 100 at portions having conductivity, and the portion provided with the reflection member ground protrusion 217b has conductivity by metal plating or the like, and the display frame 100 and Static electricity staying in the light emitting effect device 200 is allowed to escape to the side grounding piece 78 through the reflecting member grounding protrusion 217b. Here, the side-grounding grounding piece 78 is configured to be elastically deformable in the front-rear direction, and elastically abuts against the positional deviation of the reflection member grounding protrusion 217b in the front-rear direction, so that reliable grounding with the board body 42 side is achieved. It is illustrated. The side decoration part 77 has conductivity by metal plating or the like, and is also electrically connected to the second movable effect device 750. A display frame ground wire (ground wire) E1 is connected to the horizontal ornament grounding piece 78, and the display frame ground wire E1 is taken out from the right wiring opening 83 to the rear side of the rear unit 50 (see FIG. 10). ). The display frame ground wire E1 is positioned on the left side of the right wiring opening 83 and is connected to the first ground relay section 90 provided between the lower side of the attachment area of the symbol display device 13 and the board installation section 60. It is connected. The first ground relay unit 90 is a metal plate material.

  A stage ground wire (ground wire) E <b> 2 is connected to the illumination cover member 322 of the first illumination mechanism 310 in the illumination device 300. As described above, the illumination cover member 322 located on the lower back side of the stage 150 is attached so as to be in contact with the unit stage portion 166, and the static electricity accumulated in the stage 150 and the first illumination mechanism 310 is caused by the ground wire for the stage. It will be missed via E2. The stage ground wire E <b> 2 is taken out from the illumination wiring passage 304 and the central wiring opening 85 opened in the center of the illumination housing portion 303 of the illumination base member 302 to the rear side of the back unit 50, and is placed on the right side of the central wiring opening 85. Is connected to the first ground relay section 90 located at (see FIG. 10).

  In the illumination device 300, an illumination ground wire (ground wire) E <b> 3 is connected to the illumination peripheral decoration portion 348 located on the rear side of the display 460 in the second illumination mechanism 340, and the illumination device 300 collects around the second illumination mechanism 340. Static electricity is allowed to escape through the lighting ground wire E3. The illumination surrounding decoration part 348 has conductivity by metal plating or the like. As described above, since the lighting device 300 is configured to release static electricity in the vicinity of the display 460, the influence of the static electricity on the display 460 can be suppressed. The lighting ground wire E3 is taken out from the lower wiring opening 86 to the rear side of the back unit 50, and is connected to a second ground relay portion 91 made of a metal plate provided below the lower wiring opening 86. (See FIG. 10). Further, the first ground ground wire 90 is disposed between the first ground relay portion 90 and the second ground relay portion 91 so as to pass between the lower side of the attachment area of the symbol display device 13 and the board setting portion 60. (Earth wire) Connected with ER1.

  The third movable effect device 780 is provided with a left ground metal fitting 803 made of a metal plate facing the rear side of the back unit 50, and static electricity accumulated in the third movable effect device 780 passes through the left ground metal fitting 803. To be missed. Also, the rear ground piece 805 of the left ground metal fitting 803 faces the rear side of the rear unit 50 through the opening formed in the rear unit 50, and the second ground relay portion 91 is connected to the rear ground piece 805. A second relay ground wire (ground wire) ER2 connected to is connected (see FIG. 10). That is, the left ground metal fitting 803 functions as a ground relay section. The second relay ground wire ER2 passes through the left side of the attachment area of the symbol display device 13 and is held by the wiring holder 62 described above. Further, a third relay ground wire (ground wire) ER3 is connected to the rear ground piece 805 of the left ground metal fitting 803, and the third relay ground wire ER3 is opened on the upper left side of the back unit 50. It is connected to the base metal plate 510 of the first movable effect device 500 facing the rear side through the ground opening 87.

  The base sheet metal 510 extends at least over the upper edge of the display opening 53 in the installation plate portion 52 of the back unit 50, and is provided with driving means for operably supporting the movable member and operating the movable member. This is a metal plate-like member having rigidity and conductivity. The base sheet metal 510 has a longer side that is longer than the display opening 53, and is attached to the upper side part 52 a of the installation plate part 52 along the edge of the display opening 53. In addition to the connection portion of the third relay ground wire ER3, a connection portion of another ground wire (fourth relay ground wire ER4 described later) is provided (see FIG. 10).

  The game board grounding portion 94 is provided on the right side of the upper edge of the back unit 50, and is provided on a portion of the middle frame 12 that faces the right side of the upper edge of the back unit 50 when the game board 40 is attached to the middle frame 12. Further, it comes into contact with the grounding portion on the middle frame side (see FIG. 10 or FIG. 11). The game board grounding portion 94 is a metal plate-like member that is exposed on the upper surface of the back unit 50 and is provided on the upper surface of the back unit 50 so as to extend in the front-rear direction. The first movable effect device 500 is provided between the upper edge where the game board grounding portion 94 is provided and the upper edge of the display opening 53, and is provided on the front surface of the installation plate portion 52. 500 base sheet metal 510 is used as a member for electrically relaying the ground wire ER3 and the game board grounding portion 94 connected to the game board constituent members and the like. Here, the game board grounding portion 94 is provided in contact with the upper right portion of the base sheet metal 510.

  The game board 40 is provided with a game board sub-grounding portion 95 that is electrically connected to the middle frame 12 at an upper portion of a right edge that is an edge different from the upper edge where the game board grounding portion 94 is provided. (See FIG. 10 or FIG. 12). In the rear unit 50, a right ground opening 88 is opened on the rear side of the connection portion with the game board grounding portion 94 provided at the upper right side of the base metal plate 510, and the connection portion is connected via the right ground opening 88. Is connected to the fourth relay ground wire ER4. The fourth relay ground line ER4 is connected to the game board sub-grounding portion 95, and the base sheet metal 510 is electrically connected to the game board sub-grounding portion 95 via the fourth relay ground line ER4. The game board sub-grounding portion 95 is a metal plate-like member configured to be elastically deformable in the front-rear direction, and is provided at a corresponding portion of the middle frame 12 when the game board 40 is attached to the middle frame 12. It is configured to elastically contact the grounding portion on the side of the middle frame 12.

  The game board 40 relays a base sheet metal 510 of a large first movable effect device 500 that is longer than the display opening 53 in the upper side portion 52a of the back unit 50, and the rear surface on which the first movable effect device 500 is provided. Static electricity charged on the components provided on the front side of the back unit 50 is removed from the game board grounding portion 94 provided on the same side (upper side) as the side (upper side) of the unit 50. That is, the trouble of arranging the ground wire in the upper side portion 52a of the back unit 50 can be saved, and the burden of handling the ground wire in the game board 40 can be reduced. Further, since the base sheet metal 510 of the first movable effect device 500 is shared as a member for relaying the ground, the number of parts can be reduced. Moreover, although the first movable effect device 500 includes the movable member 503 that reciprocates toward the front side of the display unit 13a, it is not necessary to arrange the ground wire in a region overlapping the first movable effect device 500. There is no need to consider interference between the ground wire and the movable member 503. Further, since the base sheet metal 510 is a large member that occupies most of the upper side portion 52a of the back unit 50, the degree of freedom in setting the connection portion of the ground wire ER3 and the connection portion of the game board grounding portion 94 is high. It is easy to connect the ground wire ER connected to the constituent members of the game board 40, and the burden of handling the ground wire ER3 can be further reduced. Further, since the game board grounding portion 94 and the base metal plate 510 are in direct contact with each other, the trouble of connecting a ground wire between them can be saved. Furthermore, since the game board sub-grounding portion 95 that is electrically connected to the base metal plate 510 is double-grounded together with the game board grounding portion 94 with respect to the middle frame 12, the game board 40 and the middle frame are arranged. 12 can be prevented from being poorly grounded.

(Example of change)
The present invention is not limited to the configuration of the embodiment described above, and can be modified as follows.
(1) In the embodiment, a pachinko machine has been described as an example of the gaming machine. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various gaming machines such as an arrangement ball machine, a pinball machine, and a slot machine machine can be adopted.
(2) Although the game board of the embodiment uses a board made of synthetic resin as the board body, it may be a board made of wooden plywood.
(3) The ball guide path is not limited to the configuration in which the lateral passage portion extends in the front-rear direction, and may have a configuration in which it extends in the left-right direction.
(4) The guide recess provided in the ball guide path is not limited to the configuration provided on the rear surface of the vertical passage portion, and may be a side surface or a front surface.
(5) In the embodiment, the buffer ribs are distributed and provided on the front and rear surfaces of the passage constituting member that defines the ball passage. Also good.
(6) As a sensor that detects the passage of the pachinko sphere, a contact type that is detected when the pachinko sphere contacts the switch, a proximity type that uses electromagnetic waves such as magnetism or light, and the like can be employed.
(7) As a structure that reflects light, the light is positively applied, such as by plating, application of glossy paint, mirror finishing such as polishing of the surface, or by the characteristics of the material itself such as metal. Any structure that reflects light can be employed.
(8) The arrangement of the movable effect device is not limited to the embodiment, and even if the first movable effect device is arranged on the side or below the display unit, the second movable effect device is located above or below the display unit. You may arrange in.
(9) The drive source of the movable effect device is not limited to the motor, and a solenoid may be used.
(10) The illuminating body and the light emitting body are not limited to LEDs, and any lamp or organic EL can be used as long as it can irradiate light. Further, the LED may be either one that emits light in a single color or one that can emit light in multiple colors (full color).
(11) Terms such as “same”, “parallel”, “straight line” and the like in the embodiments are not limited to mathematical meanings, and may be slightly deviated as long as the object can be achieved.

(12) In the embodiment, the light emitting effect device is installed so that the light emitting portion of the cover member faces forward, and the first light emitting device emits light forward. For example, the light emitting portion faces obliquely forward. Thus, the light emitting effect device may be installed so that the first light emitting device emits light obliquely.
(13) In the embodiment, the case where the second light emitting device is installed below the reflecting member (reflecting portion) is shown. However, if the light from the second light emitting device can be reflected toward the reflecting portion, the second light emitting device is used. The device may be installed above or on the side of the reflecting member.
(14) In the embodiment, a reflective surface is formed on the first light emitting substrate of the first light emitting device provided with a reflecting member (reflecting portion) separate from the first light emitting device, and the first light emitting substrate is the reflecting portion. It may be made to function as.
(15) In the embodiment, the pair of movable bodies are configured to move in the left-right direction in synchronization. However, the movable body accommodating portion is formed on the front side of the first case body, and the movable body relay board is provided on the rear side. If it is a structure, it may be one movable body or three or more movable bodies. Further, the moving direction of the movable body is not limited to the left-right direction, but may be moved in the up-down direction or in an oblique direction.
(16) In the embodiment, the connection guide portion is provided on the operating body and the connection guide shaft is provided on the movable member, but the connection guide portion is provided on the movable member and the connection guide shaft is provided on the operation body. Also good.
(17) In the embodiment, the movable guide as the support member is provided with the coupling guide portion and the operating body moves relative to the movable member. However, the support member is not necessarily limited to the movable member. Various members can be used as the support member as long as the operating body can move relative to the decorative member provided on the panel body or the back unit. Further, although the sub-base regulation groove (regulation groove) is provided in the movable member, when the connection guide portion is provided in the support member, the regulation groove is formed in the operating body.
(18) In the embodiment, the guide insertion hole is composed of one narrow diameter portion and two widened portions. However, the guide insertion hole is not limited to the configuration of the embodiment. For example, one narrow diameter portion and one widened portion are provided. You may comprise a guide insertion hole from an opening part.
(19) In the embodiment, the working body is configured to move in the vertical direction, but may be configured to move in the horizontal direction and the front-rear direction. That is, the extending direction of the connecting guide shaft may be any direction.
(20) In the embodiment, the drive arm is constituted by the first link portion and the second link portion, but the drive arm may be constituted by a single member or may be constituted by three or more link portions.
(21) In the embodiment, the regulating rib as the locking means is formed on the rear support case body, but may be provided on the front support case body. Further, the locking means is not limited to the regulating rib formed integrally with the rear support case body as in the embodiment, and may be configured such that an independent locking means is detachably installed on the case body or the like. Further, the installation location of the lock means may be changed as appropriate according to the amount of rotation of the drive arm.
(22) In the embodiment, the case where the drive arm contact portion as the contact portion is formed in the drive arm driven gear is shown, but the contact portion may be formed in another part of the second link portion, or the first You may form a contact part in a link part. That is, a contact portion may be formed at an appropriate position of the drive arm in accordance with the portion that contacts the lock means.
(23) In the embodiment, the movable member moves in the vertical direction. However, the movable member may move in the left-right direction or in the oblique direction. For example, when the movable member is moved in the left-right direction, the pair of arm members are installed separately in the vertical direction. Moreover, in the Example, although the connection means was comprised with the 1st connection part and the 2nd connection part, you may comprise a connection means only with a 1st connection part.
(24) In the embodiment, the movable member is in the first position, and the left and right overlapping portions are configured to overlap the back of the board body. The part may overlap the back of the board body.
(25) In the embodiment, the guide through hole is provided in the right driven gear of the right rotating body, but the guide through hole is not necessarily provided in the right driven gear. You may provide a guide through-hole part in a member.
(26) In the embodiment, the guide through hole provided in the right driven gear is employed as the guide holding portion. However, the guide holding portion may be, for example, a hook provided in the right rotating body.
(27) In the embodiment, the wiring of the gate sensor as the ball detecting means is guided by the left wiring guide portion, but the wiring of the ball detecting means installed in the normal winning device, the starting winning device or the like is guided. You may do it.
(28) In the embodiment, the left wiring guide part is provided on the left part installation member that supports the left rotating body. However, the guide part may be provided directly on the back unit or other members (decorative members, etc. ) May be provided with a guide.
(29) In the embodiment, the right rotating body is exemplified as a component that is a target to avoid interference with the wiring, but the component is a member that constitutes a game board, and includes a board body and a back unit. All members that exist in the space between them and can interfere with the wiring are included.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 13 Symbol display apparatus 13a Display part 40 Game board 40a Game area 100 Display frame 100a Window 150 Stage 166 Unit stage part (stage part)
168 Upper rolling surface (rolling surface)
302 Lighting base member (installation part)
303 Lighting housing (housing)
303a accommodation placement part 310 1st illumination mechanism (illumination mechanism)
312 First illumination board (illumination board)
313 LED (illuminator)
316 Lighting decoration member (decoration part)
319 Lower illumination pinching piece (clamping piece)
320 Upper illumination clamping piece (clamping piece)
322 Lighting cover member (upper cover)
328 Lighting holding piece (holding piece)
326 Lighting partition member (partition)
336 Illumination lens part (light emitting part)
334 Illumination translucent member (upper cover)
332 Partition 330 Illumination partition member (partition section)
W Pachinko ball (game ball)

Claims (3)

A symbol display device provided on the rear side of the game board for performing a symbol variation game; and a display frame body provided on the game board and having a window surrounding a display unit for performing the symbol variation game of the symbol display device; A gaming machine provided with a stage that is provided in an inner lower portion of the display frame and rolls a game ball taken in from a game area of the game board in a horizontal direction;
Provided on the lower side of the rolling surface on which the game ball rolls on the stage, and having an illumination mechanism that produces light emission on the rolling surface;
The illumination mechanism is
An illumination board having a plurality of illumination bodies on the upper surface;
A decorative portion covering the front side of the illumination board;
A partition part that is located on the upper side of the illumination board and is attached to the decoration part with an illumination body provided at a front end of the illumination board between the decoration part;
A housing part formed by being recessed backward from a front surface to which the decoration part is attached, and an installation part in which the illumination board is accommodated and the decoration part is attached.
The decorative portion is a pair of sandwiching pieces that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and extend backward to hold the lighting board so as to vertically position the illumination board in the thickness direction, and the partitioning portion is held on the upper side. Placed and supported,
The partitioning part is held between a pair of holding pieces that are spaced apart from each other and extend downward to hold the rear end of the illumination board so as to position the left and right, and the decorative part and the holding piece Hold the lighting board in front and back to regulate the position between
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the installation unit is configured to be mounted on a mounting unit provided on a bottom surface of the housing unit and to support a rear portion of the lighting board.   The illumination mechanism is provided on the rear side of the partition part on the upper side of the illumination substrate, and has an upper cover part having a plurality of light emitting parts capable of transmitting light on an upper surface, and the partition part together with the upper cover part attached on the upper side. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising: a partition portion that is attached to the partition and includes a partition wall that divides the lighting bodies arranged in accordance with the adjacent light emitting portions.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the stage includes a stage portion that constitutes a rolling surface located above the illumination mechanism.

Images